Et200 e

Important information, Table of
Contents
System Overview 1
Procedure - From Planning to
Initial Operation 2
Routing Cables and Bus
SIMATIC S5 Connectors 3
RS 485 Repeaters 4
ET 200 IM 308-C and Memory Card –
Distributed I/O System Structure and Functioning 5
IM 308-C – Addressing, Access
to the Distributed I/Os and 6
Manual Diagnostics
IM 308-C – Using the FB IM308C
(FB 192) 7
IM 308-C – Starting ET 200 8
S5-95U with DP Master Interface:
Design and Method of Operation 9
S5-95U – Addressing,
Diagnostics, FB 230 10
S5-95U – Starting ET 200 11
COM PROFIBUS Manual
(Placeholder) 12
A to
Appendices G
Glossary, Index
EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Edition 04
Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as
well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the
manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or
to a particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified
persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,
equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage Note the following:
Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers
which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks SIMATIC and SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.

Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the own-
er’s rights may be violated if they are used be third parties for their own purposes.
Copyright Siemens AG 1995 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hard-
permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for ware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely,
damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are
a utility model or design, are reserved. reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent
editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG Technical data subject to change.

Automation and Drives (A&D) Siemens AG 1995
Industrial Automation Systems (AS)
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nürnberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6ES5 998-3ES22
ET 200 Distributed I/O System

Important Information
Purpose of the The information in this manual will enable you to:
manual
set up the PROFIBUS bus
operate the IM 308-C as DP master and/or DP slave
parameterize the standard function block FB IM308C for the IM 308-C
operate the S5-95U with DP master interface on the PROFIBUS-DP
start up the PROFIBUS.
This manual deals with the S5-95U programmable controller and
supplements the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller. It
describes all the functions and features of the DP master interface of the
S5-95U.
The COM PROFIBUS configuration software as of version V5.0 is not des-
cribed in this manual. There is a separate manual for COM PROFIBUS. The
COM PROFIBUS manual is available on the COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM.
Target group This manual is aimed at readers who want to plan, set up and commission the
ET 200 distributed I/O system with COM PROFIBUS. We assume that you
have experience with or knowledge of how to handle the S5-95U, S5-115U,
S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers, depending on the master
you are using.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c iii
Scope of validity This manual is valid for the following:
Module / software Order number As of release/

version
IM 308-C 6ES5 308-3UC11 6
S5-95U 6ES5 095-8ME01 3
COM PROFIBUS 6ES5 895-6SE.2 3.3
6ES5 895-6SE03 5
RS 485 repeater 6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0 1
PROFIBUS bus connectors 6ES7 972-0B.11-0XA0 1
6ES7 972-0B.40-0XA0 1
6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0 1
FB IM308C (FB 192) with Available on the intranet 3
demo program (Siemens) or Internet
This manual describes all the modules approved at the time of issue. We re-
serve the right to enclose a Product Information Sheet containing up-to-date
information with each new or revised module.
Changes since the The following things have changed since the previous version of the manual:
previous version
COM PROFIBUS as of version V 5.0 is now an open configuration soft-
ware package for DP masters and is marketed as a separate product.
COM PROFIBUS is therefore no longer described in this manual. There
is a separate manual for COM PROFIBUS, which is shipped together with
COM PROFIBUS on CD-ROM.
For a limited transitional period, COM PROFIBUS version 3.3 will be
supplied in parallel with the new version 5.0. You will still find the des-
cription of COM PROFIBUS V 3.3 in Appendix G of this manual.
The description of the optical PROFIBUS-DP network has been included.
The PROFIBUS Terminator (active bus terminating element) has been
added to the PROFIBUS network components.
Standards, The components described in this manual fulfill the requirements and criteria
certificates and of IEC 1131, Part 2 and the requirements for CE marking. CSA, UL and FM
approvals certificates and approvals have been obtained. You will find detailed infor-
mation on the certificates, approvals and standards in Section A.1.
The IM 308-C master interface module and the DP master interface of the
S5-95U are based on the EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS standard.

iv EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Recycling and The ET 200 is low in contaminants and can thus be recycled.
disposal
To recycle and dispose of your old device in an environment-friendly man-
ner, please contact:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Anlagenbau und Technische Dienstleistungen
ATD ERC Essen Recycling/Remarketing
Frohnhauser Str. 69
45127 Essen
Phone: +49 201 / 816 1540 (hotline)
Fax: +49 201 / 816 1504
Other requisite You will find information on the S5-95U with DP-master interface and all
manuals other versions of the S5-95U in the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Program-
mable Controller. At various points in this manual, you will find references to
the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller.
The description of the slaves does not form part of this manual. You can find
the order numbers for the slave manuals in Catalog ST PI, PROFIBUS &
AS-Interface, Components on the Field Bus.
COM PROFIBUS as of version 5.0 is not described in this manual. You can
print out the COM PROFIBUS manual from the COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM
(6ES5 895-6SE03) and insert it in Chapter 12 (which is a placeholder).
Quick access A number of features in this manual will help you to obtain quick access to
the information you require:
At the start of the manual, you will find a general table of contents, plus a
list of all the illustrations and a list of all the tables in the manual.
On each page throughout the manual, the bold-face headings on the left
summarize the contents of the individual passages.
The Appendices are followed by a Glossary containing definitions of the
important terms used in the manual.
The manual closes with an index. The index is in alphabetical order and
you can use it to find information on the topic of your choice.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c v
Further support If you have any questions of a technical nature, please get in touch with your
contact at the Siemens office or agent responsible for dealing with you. You
will find the address in the manuals for the DP masters (e.g. in the “Siemens
Worldwide” appendix of the manual S7-300 Programmable Controller; Hard-
ware and Installation manual, in catalogs and on CompuServe (GO AUTFO-
RUM).
If you have questions about the load feeders, please get in touch with the
contact people in your region for communication-capable low-voltage
switchgear. You can obtain a list of contacts by fax on
+49 8765/9302/781001.
If you need a type file or device master file, you can obtain this via modem
on +49 (911) 737972 or via Internet:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd
If you have questions or comments about the manual itself, please complete
the reply card at the end of the manual and send it to the specified address.
Please also give us your personal assessment of the manual on the reply card.
In order to make it easier for you to start working with the ET 200 distributed
I/O system, we provide the ”KO-ET 200” workshop. If you are interested,
please notify your regional training center or the central training center in
Nuremberg, D (tel. +49 911 895 3154).
Constantly You can obtain constantly updated information about SIMATIC products:
updated
On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/
information
By fax on +49 8765-93 00 50 00
In addition, SIMATIC Customer Support assists you with information and
downloads that can be useful when using the SIMATIC products:
On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs
At the SIMATIC Customer Support mailbox on +49 (911) 895-7100
To access the mailbox, use a modem with up to V.34 (28.8 kbps), whose
parameters you set as follows: 8, N, 1, ANSI. Alternatively, dial in using
ISDN (x.75, 64 kbps).
You can reach SIMATIC Customer Support by phone on +49 (911) 895-7000
and by fax on +49 (911) 895-7002. You can also make inquiries by e-mail on
the Internet or by leaving a message at the above-mentioned mailbox (ad-
dresses: see above).

vi EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table of contents
1 System overview
1.1 What is the ET 200 distributed I/O system? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Expansion options of the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3 Masters in the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.3.1 IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3.2 S5-95U programmable controller with DP master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4 Slaves in the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5 PROFIBUS field bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.6 COM PROFIBUS parameterization software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.7 Network components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.7.1 Bus connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.7.2 Fiber-optic cable Simplex connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.7.3 RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.7.4 PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
2 Procedure – from planning to initial operation
2.1 Planning the layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Structuring the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 What to consider before parameterization with COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . 2-4
2.4 Parameterization with COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.5 Writing the STEP 5 application program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.6 Initial operation of the ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3 Routing cables; connecting and installing bus connectors
3.1 Notes on routing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.1 General rules and regulations for operation of ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.2 In-building cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.3 Outdoor cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.4 Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.5 Cable shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.1.6 Measures to prevent interference voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.1.7 Special measures for interference-proof operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.2 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.2.1 Why protect the automation system against overvoltage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.2.2 How to protect the ET 200 distributed I/O system against overvoltage . . . 3-19
3.2.3 Example illustrating lightning protection for the ET 200 distributed
I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c vii
Table of Contents
3.3 Characteristics of the bus cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.4 Applications and technical data of the bus connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.5 Connecting the bus cable to the bus connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.5.1 Connecting bus cable to bus connectors with order number
6ES7 972-0B.11 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
6ES7 972-0BA30 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
6ES7 972-0B.40 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.6 Connecting the bus connector to the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.7 PNO installation guideline (placeholder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
3.8 PROFIBUS-DP network with fiber-optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.8.1 Fiber-optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.8.2 Simplex connectors and connector adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3.8.3 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the PROFIBUS device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4 RS 485 repeaters: installing, connecting and operating
4.1 The RS 485 repeater: scope of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Mechanical design of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 Configuration options with the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.4 Installing and removing the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.5 Non-grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.6 Connecting the voltage supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.7 Connecting the bus cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.8 PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
5 IM 308-C master interface and memory card – structure and functioning
5.1 Function and appearance of the IM 308-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Technical data of the IM 308-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3 Installing the IM 308-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4 Installing the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5 Loading the operating system of the IM 308-C from the memory card . . . 5-12
5.6 IM 308-C as DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
6 IM 308-C – addressing, access to the distributed I/Os and diagnostics
with STEP 5
6.1 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Linear addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.1.2 Page addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.1.3 Addressing via the FB IM308C (FB 192) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.4 Access commands for distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2 Diagnostics with STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.3 Reading master diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

viii EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table of Contents
6.4 Reading slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

6.4.1 Slave diagnostics for DP slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.4.2 Slave-specific diagnostics for DP Siemens slaves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.5 Sending the FREEZE and SYNC control commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.6 Assigning PROFIBUS addresses with FB IM308C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.7 Addressing the ET 200 in multimaster mode and/or multiprocessor
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.7.1 Multimaster mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.7.2 Multiprocessor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
7 IM 308-C – Using the standard function block FB IM308C (FB 192) . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Functions of the FB IM308C (FB 192) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Technical data and installation of the FB IM308C (FB 192) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.3 Calling the standard function block FB IM308C and block
parameters (FB 192) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3.1 FCT parameter: function of the FB IM308C (FB 192) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.2 GCGR parameter: sending control commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.3 ERR parameter: interpreting the response and errors of the FB IM308C (FB
192) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.4 Indirect parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
8 IM 308-C – Starting ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Starting and operating the ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Response of the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2.1 Reaction when power supply is switched on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2.2 Reaction when IM 308-C is switched to OFF, ST or RN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.3 Reaction when CPU is switched to STOP or RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.4 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of the DP slave . 8-10
8.2.5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or DP slave is again
addressable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.3 Switching off ET 200 and reaction to power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
9 Design and method of operation of the S5-95U with DP master interface . . . . 9-1
9.1 Design of the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Pin assignment of the DP master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.3 Exchange of data between S5-95U and DP slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.4 Technical data of the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.5 Installing S5-95U and 32 K EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.6 Saving to 32 K EEPROM in the S5-95U (File Export DP master) . . . 9-11
10 S5-95U – addressing, accessing the distributed I/O and diagnostics
with STEP 5
10.1 Address areas and options for addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Accessing the distributed I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3 Parameterizing the S5-95U (DP master) in DB 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c ix
Table of Contents
10.4 Diagnostics in the STEP 5 application program of the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

10.4.1 Requesting overview diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.4.2 Requesting slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.4.3 Standard function block FB 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.5 Monomaster and multimaster modes with S5-95U as DP master . . . . . . . 10-13
11 S5-95U – Starting ET 200
11.1 Starting and operating the ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Power-up of the S5-95U on the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.3 Response of the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.3.1 Reaction to switching the S5-95U for the first time from STOP to RUN
(programmable controller startup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.3.2 Reaction after power failure in the S5-95U (restoration of mains power) . 11-8
11.3.3 Reaction when, with the bus running, you switch the S5-95U to
STOP or RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.3.4 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or DP slave failure . . . . . . 11-10
11.3.5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or the DP slave is
again addressable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
11.4 Switching off ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.5 Failure response of the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
12 COM PROFIBUS manual (placeholder for manual on CD-ROM)
A General technical data
A.1 Standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.3 Transport and storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.4 Mechanical and climatic conditions for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.5 Insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
B Access commands for the S5-115U, S5-135U and
S5-155U programmable controllers
B.1 General information about addressing consistent data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.2 Access commands for the CPUs 941 to 943 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.3 Access commands for the 944 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.4 Access commands for the 945 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
B.5 Access commands for the S5-135U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.6 Access commands for the S5-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B.7 Structure of the consistent data areas for the S5-115U, S5-135U and
S5-155U programmable controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B.7.1 S5-115U: CPUs 941, 942, 943 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
B.7.2 S5-115U: 944 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B.7.3 S5-115U: CPU 945 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
B.7.4 S5-135U: CPU 922 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
B.7.5 S5-135U: CPU 928 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
B.7.6 S5-155U: CPUs 946/947, 948 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26

x EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table of Contents
C Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system

C.1 Reaction times with IM 308-C as DP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.1 Reaction time tprog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.1.2 Reaction time tcons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C.2 Reaction times with S5-95U as DP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.2.1 Reaction time tprog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.2.2 Reaction time tinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.3 Reaction time tDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.4 Reaction time tslave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C.5 Example illustrating how to calculate reaction times for the ET 200
distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C.5.1 Calculating tprog and tcons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.5.2 Calculating tDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.5.3 Calculating tslave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.5.4 Calculating reaction time tR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.6 Special cases which may prolong the reaction time tR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C.6.1 How is data exchanged? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C.6.2 ET 200U operating in slow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
D Demo programs
D.1 Accessing the DP/AS-I link with FB IM 308-C (FB 192) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.1.1 Calling FB IM308C (FB 192) (DP/AS-I link only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.1.2 Interpreting the error messages of FBIM308C (FB 192)
(DP/AS-I link only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.2 S5-95U: demo FB 30 for saving the overview diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
E Dimensional drawings
E.1 Dimensional drawing of the IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2 Dimensional drawings of the bus connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.3 Dimensional drawings of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
E.4 Dimensional drawing of the PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
F Order numbers
G COM PROFIBUS V3.3 or lower
G.1 Differences between COM PROFIBUS V3.0 to V3.3 and important
information on the online functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
G.2 Scope of applications and preconditions for using the COM PROFIBUS
parameterization software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
G.3 Starting COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12
G.4 Graphical user interface of COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14
G.5 Example of how to parameterize a DP configuration with
COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17
G.6 Example of how to parameterize an FMS configuration with
COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-24

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c xi
Table of Contents
G.7 Creating and opening a program file; importing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-30

G.8 Parameterizing the configuration of a master system with
COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-33
G.8.1 Entering bus parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-35
G.8.2 Entering host parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-37
G.8.3 Entering master parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-39
G.8.4 DP slave: entering slave parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-42
G.8.5 FMS station: entering FMS station parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-44
G.8.6 Using PROFIBUS-DP and PROFIBUS-FMS simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . G-46
G.8.7 Creating a new master system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-47
G.8.8 Configuring the IM 308-C as a DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-48
G.8.9 Assigning DP slaves to groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-51
G.8.10 IM 308-C: Assigning a shared-input master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-52
G.9 Making provision for masters other than those entered with
COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-53
G.10 Device master files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-54
G.11 Saving and exporting the configuration parameterized with
COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-55
G.11.1 Saving to DP master (File Export DP master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-57
G.11.2 Saving to 32 K EEPROM in the S5-95U (File Export DP master) . . G-59
G.11.3 Saving to memory card for IM 308-C (File Export Memory Card) . . . G-62
G.11.4 Saving as a binary database in NCM format for SIMATIC NET PC modules
(File Export NCM file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-63
G.12 Documenting and printing the parameterized configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . G-64
G.13 PROFIBUS-DP: service functions with COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-65

xii EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table of Contents
Figures
1-1 Structure of a bus segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2 Linking bus segments with RS 485 repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-3 IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-4 S5-95U programmable controller with DP master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-5 Purpose of the COM PROFIBUS parameterization software . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1-6 Simplex connectors and the special plug-in adapter for the IM 153-2 FO
and IM 467 FO (assembled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-7 RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-8 PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
3-1 Securing shielded cables with cable clamps and cable ties
(schematic diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3-2 Circuits with DC-actuated coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-3 Circuits with AC-actuated coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-4 Measures for suppressing interference from fluorescent tubes in cabinets 3-15
3-5 Lightning-protection zones of a building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-6 Example showing lightning protection for the ET 200 distributed
I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-7 Bus connector with order number 6ES7 972-0B.11 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-8 Length of stripped ends for connection to bus connector
(6ES7 972-0B.11...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-9 Connecting bus cable to bus connectors with order number
6ES7 972-0B.11 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-10 Appearance of the bus connector with order number 6ES7 972-0BA30 ... 3-33
(6ES7 972-0BA30 ...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-12 Connecting bus cable to bus connector (6ES7 972-0BA30 ...) . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-13 Bus connector with order number 6ES7 972-0B.40 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
(6ES7 972-0B.40 ...) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-15 Connecting the bus cable to the bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.40 ...) . . . 3-36
3-16 Bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.11-...): positions of switch for
terminating resistor in circuit or not in circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3-17 Optical PROFIBUS-DP network with nodes that have an integrated
fiber-optic cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3-18 Simplex connectors and a special connector adapter for the IM 153-2 FO
and IM 467 FO (installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
4-1 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-2 Setting of the terminating resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3 Two bus segments connected to the RS 485 repeater (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-6 Mounting the RS 485 repeater on the busbar for S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-7 Removing the RS 485 repeater from the busbar for S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-8 ET 200 bus segments operating as non-grounded segments . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-9 Length of stripped ends for connection to RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-10 Stripping lengths for connection to the PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . 4-15
5-1 IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Block diagram of the IM 308-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-3 Method of operation, IM 308-C as DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-4 Structure of device-specific diagnostics of the IM 308-C as DP slave . . . . 5-16

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c xiii
Table of Contents
6-1 Diagnostics structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-2 Using the FB IM308C to assign a PROFIBUS address to a DP slave . . . . 6-24
6-3 Monomaster mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6-4 Multimaster mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-5 Multiprocessor mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
7-1 Appearance of the FB IM308C call in the STL or in KOP/FUP . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8-1 IM 308-C and CPU power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
9-1 Front view of the S5-95U with DP master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-2 Principle of data exchange between S5-95U and DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
10-1 DB 1 with default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-2 Structure of diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-3 S5-95U – monomaster mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-4 S5-95U – multimaster mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
11-1 Power-up of the S5-95U with DP master interface (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11-2 Power-up of the S5-95U with DP master interface (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
B-1 ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
C-1 Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C-2 Reaction time tcons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C-3 Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system (S5-95U) . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-4 Reaction time tinter (S5-95U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C-5 Reaction time tDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-6 Reaction time tslave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C-7 Example of a bus configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-8 Contribution of PROFIBUS-DP to the reaction time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-9 Block diagram illustrating exchange of data between DP master and
DP slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-10 Token passing between two masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
E-1 Dimensional drawing of the IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E-2 IP 20 bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.11-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E-3 IP 20 bus connector (6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E-4 IP 20 bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.40-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
E-5 RS 485 repeater on standard-section busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
E-6 RS 485 repeater on busbar for S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
E-7 PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
G-1 ”Create GSD File” Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
G-2 Screen elements of COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-14
G-3 Example of an application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-16
G-4 Sample configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17
G-5 Example of the ”Master Host Selection” window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-18
G-6 Example showing how the master system is displayed on screen . . . . . . . G-18
G-7 Example of the ”Bus Parameters” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-19
G-8 Example of the ”Host Parameters” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-19
G-9 Example of the ”Master Parameters” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-20
G-10 Example of the ”Slave Parameters ET 200B” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-21
G-11 Example of the ”ConET 200M” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-22
G-12 Sample configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-24
G-13 Example of the ”Master Host Selection” window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-25
G-14 Example showing how the FMS master system is displayed on screen . . G-25
G-15 Example of the ”Bus Parameters” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-26
G-16 Example of the ”FMS Station Properties SIMOCODE” dialog box . . . . . . . G-27
G-17 Example of the ”Edit FMS Connections” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-27
G-18 Example of the ”Edit FMS Connections” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-28

xiv EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table of Contents
G-19 Alternative ways of importing master systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-31

G-20 Application window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-34
G-21 Creating a new master system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-47
G-22 Groups and their Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-51

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c xv
Table of Contents
Tables
1-1 Permissible cable length of a bus segment as a function of baud rate . . . 1-5
1-2 Permissible cable length of a segment incorporating RS 485 repeaters . . 1-7
1-3 Mechanical design of and applications for IP 20 bus connectors . . . . . . . 1-17
2-1 Planning the layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 Setting up the ET 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 COM PROFIBUS and STEP 5 in parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-4 Parameterizing and saving the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-5 STEP 5 application program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-6 Initial operation of the ET 200 (with IM 308-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3-1 In-building cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2 Overvoltage-protection components for coarse protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-3 Fine protection of lines by means of overvoltage-protection
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-4 Example of configuration with adequate lightning protection (legend for Fig. 3-6)
3-22
3-5 Characteristics of the PROFIBUS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-6 IP 20 bus connectors, configuration and applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-7 IP 20 bus connectors, technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-8 Pin assignment of the 9-pole D-sub connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-9 Permissible cable lengths for a segment using RS 485 repeaters . . . . . . . 3-29
3-10 Length of droplines per segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-11 Features of the fiber-optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3-12 Order numbers – fiber-optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-13 Order numbers – Simplex connectors and connector adapters . . . . . . . . 3-44
3-14 Permissible cable lengths on the optical PROFIBUS-DP network
(partyline topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
4-1 Maximum cable length of a segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Maximum cable length between two stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-3 Description and functions of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-4 Technical data of the RS 485 repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-5 Pin assignment of the 9-pin sub-D adapter (programmer/OP interface) . . 4-4
4-6 Description and functions of the PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-7 Technical specifications of the PROFIBUS Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
5-1 Controls and features of the IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2 Meanings of ”BF” LED on the IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3 Meanings of the LEDs on the IM 308-C master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-4 Technical data of the IM 308-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-5 Slots in the S5-115U system, CR 700-0 module rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-6 Slots in the S5-115U system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-7 Slots in the S5-135U/S5-155U system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-8 Flashing code output by LEDs on IM 308-C when the operating system
is loaded from memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
6-1 Maximum data lengths and consistent areas in bytes for the IM 308-C . . 6-2
6-2 Modes of addressing with the IM 308-C as DP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3 Assignment of pages to IM 308-C master interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-4 How page addressing works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-5 Structure of master diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-6 Appearance of master diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-7 Structure of slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-8 Structure of station status 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-9 Structure of station status 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

xvi EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table of Contents
6-10 Structure of the master PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

6-11 Structure of the header for station, module or channel diagnostics . . . . . . 6-21
6-12 Structure of the slave-specific diagnostics for DP Siemens slaves . . . . . . 6-22
7-1 File designations for FB IM308C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2 Technical data of the FB IM308C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-3 Runtimes for the FB IM308-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-4 Meanings of the block parameters of the FB IM308C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-5 Meaning of the FCT parameter for IM 308-C as DP master . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-6 Structure of the S5 memory area after FCT = WO, RO or RI . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-7 Structure of the S5 memory area for FCT = CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-8 Assignment of the GCGR parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-9 Assignment of the ERR parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-10 Meanings of the error numbers in the ERR parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-11 Structure of the parameter data block for the FB IM308C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
8-1 Reaction when power supply is switched on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-2 Operating modes of the IM 308-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-3 Reaction when IM 308-C is switched to OFF, ST or RN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-4 Reaction when CPU is switched to STOP or RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-5 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of a DP slave
(with QVZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
(with PEU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
(error-reporting mode ”none”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-8 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or DP slave is
9-1 The indicators, controls and interfaces of the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-2 Significance of the ”BF”, ”RUN” and ”STOP” LEDs of the S5-95U . . . . . . . 9-4
9-3 Pin assignment of the DP master interface on the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-4 Technical data of the S5-95U with DP master interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-5 Contents of EB 63 (baud rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
10-1 Addressing with S5-95U as DP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-2 Linear addressing with S5-95U as DP master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-3 Meaning of the ”LNPG” parameter in DB 1 of the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-4 Overview diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-5 Structure of slave diagnostics (S5-95U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10-6 Meanings of the block parameters of the FB 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10-7 Technical data of the FB 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
11-1 Reaction to switching the S5-95U for the first time from STOP to RUN . . 11-7
11-2 Reaction after power failure in the S5-95U (restoration of mains power) . 11-8
11-3 Reaction when, with the bus running, you switch the S5-95U to STOP
or RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11-4 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of a DP slave . . 11-10
11-5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or DP slave is
A-1 Electromagnetic compatibility with regard to pulse interference . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-2 Tests of mechanical conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
B-1 Linear addressing with 941 to 943 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-2 P-page addressing with the 941 to 943 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B-3 Linear addressing with 944 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-4 P-page addressing with the 944 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B-5 Linear addressing with the 945 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c xvii
Table of Contents
B-6 P-page addressing with the 945 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

B-7 Q-page addressing with the 945 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B-8 Linear addressing with the S5-135U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B-9 P-page addressing with the S5-135U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B-10 Q-page addressing with the S5-135U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B-11 Linear addressing with the S5-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B-12 P-page addressing with the S5-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B-13 Q-page addressing with the S5-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B-14 Word consistency over one word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
B-15 Byte consistency over m bytes (total length) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
B-16 Word consistency over m/2 words (total length) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
C-1 Importance of reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system . . . . . . C-2
C-2 Reaction time tprog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-3 Importance of reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
(S5-95U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C-4 Reaction time tprog (S5-95U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-5 Factors influencing reaction time tDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C-6 Factors which favor reaction time tslave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C-7 Reaction times in the ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C-8 Constants for various baud rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-9 Basic values at different baud rates for calculating the reaction time tIM 318
of the ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-10 Constants for calculating tI/Obus for ET 200U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C-11 Multiplication factors for the reaction times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C-12 Calculating the typical reaction time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-13 Calculating the worst-case reaction time tR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-14 Reaction times in the station connecting cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
D-1 Data block (y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D-2 FCT parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D-3 FCT = DW parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D-4 Allocation of the S5 memory area if FCT = DW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D-5 FCT = CW parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D-6 FCT = DR parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D-7 FCT = CR parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D-8 Allocation of the S5 memory area if FCT = CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D-9 Meaning of the error code 2 parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D-10 FB 230 call for the demo FB (”SLAVEINF”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13

xviii EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table of Contents
D-11 Contents of DB 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14

D-12 Call for the demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF” ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D-13 Contents of the demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
D-14 Overview diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
D-15 MW 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
F-1 Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
G-1 Possible setups on the PROFIBUS card for the online functions of
COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
G-2 The functions in the pull-down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15
G-3 Functions of the mouse buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-15
G-4 Meanings of icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-16
G-5 File types in COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-30
G-6 Meanings of bus parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-35
G-7 Bus times that must be set for a ”DP with S5-95U” bus profile . . . . . . . . . G-36
G-8 Meanings of host parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-37
G-9 Meanings of master parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-39
G-10 Meanings of DP slave parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-42
G-11 Meanings of FMS station properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-44
G-12 Meanings of the connections of an FMS station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-45
G-13 Saving the configuration parameterized with COM PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . G-55
G-14 Contents of EB 63 (baud rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-60
G-15 Documenting the parameterized configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-64
G-16 Meaning of the ”Overview Diagnostics” dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-66

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c xix
Table of Contents

xx EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview 1
In this chapter This chapter explains:
Section Topic Page

1.1 What the ET 200 distributed I/O system is 1-2
1.2 The expansion options offered by the ET 200 distributed I/O 1-5
system
1.3 Masters in the ET 200 distributed I/O system 1-8
1.4 Slaves in the ET 200 distributed I/O system 1-11
1.5 PROFIBUS field bus 1-14
1.6 COM PROFIBUS parameterization software 1-15
1.7 Network components 1-16
Goal After reading this chapter, you should know what the ET 200 distributed I/O
system is and you should be familiar with its principal components.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-1
System overview
1.1 What is the ET 200 distributed I/O system?
What is ET 200? When a conventional system is set up, the I/O modules are usually grouped
together in the programmable controller.
If the inputs/outputs are distant from the programmable controller, the cab-
ling may be complex and cumbersome, while reliability may be impaired by
disruptive electromagnetic fields.
Under these circumstances, Siemens recommends the use of the ET 200 dis-
tributed I/O system. The controller CPU is located at a central point, the in-
puts and outputs are distributed so as to be at their most efficient, and the
high- performance ET 200 bus system with its high data-transfer rates en-
sures excellent communication between the CPU and the I/O stations via the
PROFIBUS.
What does ET 200 The distributed I/O system consists of active (master) and passive (slave)
consist of? stations interconnected by the PROFIBUS.
ET 200 also includes the COM PROFIBUS parameterization software which
enables you to set up and commission the distributed configuration.
What is PROFIBUS is a bus system designed for communication in small cellular

PROFIBUS? networks as well as with field devices in accordance with the European stan-
dard EN 50 170.
PROFIBUS-DP is ideal for high-speed, cyclic communication when only
small amounts of data are involved. Transmission rates of up to 12 Mbaud
are possible.
PROFIBUS-FMS is intended for communication with complex field devices
with an FMS interface as well as for small cellular networks (10 to 15 sta-
tions). Transmission rates of up to 1.5 Mbaud are possible.
PROFIBUS-DP and FMS: Both these protocols are based on the same bus
components and can be operated together on a single line (Combimaster).
Reference PROFIBUS is based on EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. A distinction is

standards for drawn between active stations (masters) and passive stations (slaves).
PROFIBUS
EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS describes:
the bus access and transfer protocol and the specifications for the neces-
sary data transfer technology,
the high-speed, cyclic exchange of data between the master and the
slaves,
the procedures for configuration and parameterization,
how cyclic data exchange with the distributed I/Os functions, and
the diagnostics options at your disposal.

1-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
What is a master? A master is an active station on the PROFIBUS. This means that only a mas-
ter can send data to other stations on the PROFIBUS and request data from
them.
What is a slave? A slave is a passive station on the PROFIBUS. This means that it can only
exchange data with the master when requested to do so.
You can operate up to 124 slaves in the ET 200 distributed I/O system.
Parameterization The COM PROFIBUS parameterization software is used for straightforward

with parameterization and initial operation of the ET 200 distributed I/O system.
COM PROFIBUS
COM PROFIBUS runs under MS-WindowsR (V 3.1x or higher) or Windows
9x/NT, presenting a graphical user interface with tools for:
S straightforward parameterization of the master and slaves,
S transferring data to the master directly via the PROFIBUS (exporting),
S starting up the PROFIBUS with the aid of diagnostics functions and the
states of the inputs/outputs,
S detailed documentation of parameterization.
COM PROFIBUS includes detailed online help, offering you any assistance
you may need when working with the parameterization program.
Addressing the When you use the control program, you access the distributed inputs/outputs
distributed I/Os in just the same way as those of the central programmable controller (e.g.
L PW/T PW).
If you use the IM 308-C master interface, FB IM308C is available for
straightforward data interchange (FB 230 is provided for the S5-95U).
What does the The PROFIBUS-DP transfers data at a maximum rate of 12 Mbaud, so
PROFIBUS do? reaction times are short, while the PROFIBUS-FMS transfers at up to
1.5 Mbaud for medium reaction times.
You can use either shielded, two-wire cables or fiber optics to set up your
PROFIBUS.
The maximum range with copper cabling is 10,000 meters; fiber optics ex-
tend the range to 90 km.
The bus connectors are of a design such that slaves can be linked to or dis-
connected from the bus without interrupting data traffic.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-3
System overview
Reaction time of The average reaction time of the PROFIBUS-DP is approx. 1 ms under the
PROFIBUS-DP following conditions:
one DP master on the bus (IM 308-C)
up to 30 DP slaves with a total of 128 bytes inputs/128 bytes outputs
12 Mbaud transfer rate
no transfer of diagnostics data and consistent areas

1-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
1.2 Expansion options of the ET 200 distributed I/O system
What is a bus The ET 200 distributed I/O system consists of at least one bus segment. If the
segment? ET 200 consists of only one bus segment, this segment has at least two sta-
tions, one of which is a master.
A bus segment can consist of up to 32 stations, all physically connected by a
bus cable.
Maximum A bus segment consists of up to 32 stations. You must insert a terminating

configuration of a resistor at the start and end of the bus.
bus segment
Master No. 6 Master No. 20
Slave No. 10 Slave No. 13 Slave No. 64
: Station (master or slave)
: Station with terminating resistor in circuit
Figure 1-1 Structure of a bus segment
Cornerstone data You can interconnect a maximum of 32 stations in a single bus segment.
for a bus segment
The maximum physical length of a bus segment depends on the baud rate
used (see Table 1-1).
Table 1-1 Permissible cable length of a bus segment as a function of baud rate
Baud rate Max. cable length of a segment (in meters)

9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 1000
500 kbaud 400
1.5 Mbaud 200
3 to 12 Mbaud 100

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-5
System overview
Rules for more You must insert RS 485 repeaters between the bus segments:
than one bus
if you want to have more than 32 stations connected to the bus, or
segment
if the maximum permissible cable length per segment is exceeded (see
Table 1-1).
All the bus segments together must have at least one master and one slave.
Linking bus The configuration below will serve by way of example:

segments
Master No. 20
Segment 1
Slave No. 4 Slave No. 64

R
Master No. 73
Segment 2
R Slave No. 10
Segment 3
: Station (master or slave) R : RS 485 repeater
: Station with terminating resistor in circuit
Figure 1-2 Linking bus segments with RS 485 repeaters

1-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
Cornerstone data In the ET 200 distributed I/O system, you can operate a maximum of 126 sta-
for linking bus tions on a single bus. Of this total, a maximum of 124 can be DP slaves. The
segments maximum number of slaves you can address with an IM 308-C is 122.
The maximum number of stations per bus segment diminishes with each
RS 485 repeater inserted in the system (because of power consumption). This
means as that soon as you include an RS 485 repeater in a segment, the seg-
ment in question can accommodate a maximum of only 31 other stations.
Note that the number of RS 485 repeaters has no effect on the maximum
number of stations connected to the bus.
Up to 10 bus segments can be connected in series. The distance between the
two most widely separated stations must not exceed the appropriate value
shown in the table below.
Table 1-2 Permissible cable length of a segment incorporating RS 485 repeaters
Baud rate Max. cable length of Max. distance between

a segment (in meters) two most widely separated
stations (in m)
9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 1,000 10,000
500 kbaud 400 4,000
1.5 Mbaud 200 2,000
3 to 12 Mbaud 100 1,000

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-7
System overview
1.3 Masters in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Overview In the distributed I/O system, the following can function as masters:
In SIMATIC S5 and COM PROFIBUS:
S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers, each with
– one IM 308-C as DP master up to 12 Mbaud (COM PROFIBUS V 1.0
or later versions), or
– one IM 308-B as DP master up to 1.5 Mbaud (up to COM PROFIBUS
V 4.x), or
– one CP 5431 as Combimaster for PROFIBUS-FMS and PROFIBUS-
DP
S5-95U programmable controller with DP master interface (COM ET 200
V 2.0 or later versions),
In SIMATIC S7 and STEP 7:
CPU 315-2 DP with integrated DP interface or the SIMATIC NET com-
munications processor CP 342-5 in S7-300
CPU 413-2 DP/414-2 DP/416-2 DP with integrated DP interface or the
SIMATIC NET communications processor CP 443-5 in S7-400
In SIMATIC M7:
IF 964-DP interface module in M7-300 and M7-400
or ...
PG 720, PG 740, PG 760 programmers with integrated interface
PG 720, PG 730, PG 740, PG 750, PG 760, PG 770 programmers or AT-
PCs with the SIMATIC NET PC modules
– CP 5412 (A2) as FMS/DP master
– CP 5411 + SOFTNET for PROFIBUS as DP master
– CP 5511 + SOFTNET for PROFIBUS as DP master
PROFIBUS-DP master interface IM 180
SIMATIC 505-FIM (Field Interface Module) for connecting a SIMATIC
TI505
IM 329-N for SINUMERIK 840C and SINUMERIK 805SM
SIMADYN D digital control system
CP 581 TM-L2 as interface to TELEPERM M
Other Siemens or other-vendor masters.

1-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
1.3.1 IM 308-C master interface
Definition The IM 308-C master interface links the PROFIBUS-DP to the CPUs in the
S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers.
Backplane connector X1
Memory card
FLASH
Jumper X9
Mode selector
switch RN
ST
OFF
RN Backplane connector X2
OF
BF
LEDs IF
PROFIBUS-DP Jumper X10

interface (X3)
Figure 1-3 IM 308-C master interface
Functions The IM 308-C offers:

large address space (up to 13,300 bytes in all for inputs, outputs and diag-
nostics data, for addressing with FB IM308C)
baud rates from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud
FREEZE and SYNC control commands
usable as DP master and/or DP slave
Additional See chapter 5 for a detailed description of the IM 308-C master interface.
information

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-9
System overview
1.3.2 S5-95U programmable controller with DP master interface
Definition One version of the S5-95U has an integral interface for connecting the
S5-95U as a DP master to the PROFIBUS-DP.
Mechanical design The DP master interface is integrated in the S5-95U:
DP master interface
Figure 1-4 S5-95U programmable controller with DP master interface
Functions The S5-95U with DP master interface offers:

256 bytes of address space (128 bytes inputs, 128 bytes outputs; linear
addressing only).
baud rates from 9.6 kbaud to 1.5 Mbaud.
connection of up to 16 DP slaves.
Restrictions The S5-95U with DP master interface does not offer:

support for DP slaves that cannot be limited to a telegram length of 32 by-
tes. The S5-95U processes a maximum of 32 bytes of input data and
32 bytes of output data per DP slave.
use as a shared-input master.
selection of an error reporting mode.
the ”overview diagnostics” function of COM PROFIBUS.
Additional The S5-95U with DP master interface is described in detail in chapter 9.

information
Information applicable to the S5-95U with DP master interface and to all
other versions of the S5-95U is to be found in the system manual
S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller. See Appendix G for the order
number of this manual.

1-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
1.4 Slaves in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Overview The following can be used as DP slaves in the distributed I/O system:
Distributed I/O stations: ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200M, ET 200S,
ET 200X (up to 12 Mbaud) and ET 200U, ET 200L (up to 1.5 Mbaud)
Progammable controllers/automation systems, such as:
– S5-115U, S5-135U or S5-155U with IM 308-C as DP slave
– S5-95U with DP slave interface (up to 1.5 Mbaud)
– S7-300 with CPU 315-2 DP or CP 342-5 as DP slave
– S7-400 with CP 443-5 as DP slave
Interface to the actuator/sensor interface with the DP/AS-I link
Text displays and operator panels for local operator control and monitor-
ing
MOBY identification systems
Low- voltage switchgear
Siemens or other-vendor field devices, such as drives, valve islands, etc.
FMS slaves may be, for example, the ET 200U or SIMOCODE, the motor
protection and control unit.
ET 200B (DP slave) The ET 200B is a small, compact I/O station. It is a slimline module and its
degree of protection is IP 20. The ET 200B is particularly suitable for ap-
plications requiring a limited number of inputs/outputs or where space is at a
premium.
The ET 200B distributed I/O station consists of the terminal block (TB) for
the inhouse wiring and the electronics block (EB). The ET 200B connects to
the PROFIBUS-DP field bus by means of bus connectors.
ET 200C (DP slave) The ET 200C is a small, compact I/O station. The degree of protection is
IP 66/67. On account of its sturdy design, the ET 200C is eminently suitable
for use in harsh industrial environments.
The ET 200C distributed I/O station consists of a sturdy metal housing with
integrated inputs/outputs and the interface for the PROFIBUS-DP field bus.
ET 200L (DP slave) The ET 200L is a small, compact I/O station. The degree of protection is
IP 20 and it is suitable for baud rates up to 1.5 Mbaud.
On account of its compact, slimline design, the ET 200L is eminently suit-
able for applications where space is at a premium or where only a limited
number of inputs/outputs are required.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-11
System overview
ET 200M (DP slave) The ET 200M is a slave interface for the modules of the S7-300 line.
The ET 200M is eminently suitable for applications requiring a large number
of locally installed inputs/outputs or modules from the S7-300 range.
The ET 200M consists of the IM 153 slave interface, the power supply unit
and up to 8 modules from the S7-300 range.
ET 200U (DP slave The ET 200U is a slave interface module for the I/O modules of the
and FMS slave) S5-100U.
The ET 200U distributed I/O station is compatible with both PROFIBUS-DP
and PROFIBUS-FMS.
The ET 200U is eminently suitable for applications requiring a large number
of locally installed inputs/outputs or modules from the S5-100U I/O range
(e.g. CPs and IPs).
The ET 200U consists of the IM 318-B or IM 318-C slave interface module
plus modules from the S5 I/O range.
ET 200S (DP slave) ET 200S is a fine-step modular I/O device that offers the highest possible
degree of flexibility.
You can connect virtually any number and combination of I/O modules next
to the interface module, which transfers the data to the DP master. This
means you can configure the system exactly to suit local requirements.
ET 200X (DP slave) The ET 200X is a small, modular I/O station. The degree of protection is
IP 66/67.
On account of its modular design and its integrated load feeders, e.g. direct-
on-line or reversing starters, the ET 200X is eminently suitable for use in
harsh industrial environments where only a limited number of inputs/outputs
are required.
DP/AS-I link (DP The DP/AS-I link connects the actuator-sensor interface to PROFIBUS-DP.
slave) Its degree of protection is high (IP 66/67), so the DP/AS-I link is ideal for use
in harsh industrial environments.
S5-95U (DP slave) One version of the S5-95U has an integrated interface for connecting the
S5-95U as a DP slave to the PROFIBUS-DP.
The S5-95U with DP slave interface is suitable for applications which require
local intelligent signal preprocessing.
IM 308-C As of release status 3, the IM 308-C can be used as a DP slave in the

(DP slave) S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers. This means, for
example, that you can transfer data between two programmable controllers.

1-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
Additional You can find additional information about the above-mentioned products in
information the Catalog ST PI (PROFIBUS & AS Interface) Components on the Field
Bus.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-13
System overview
1.5 PROFIBUS field bus
Definition The PROFIBUS interconnects all stations. The physical connection to these
stations is effected by means of bus connectors (exception: RS 485 repeaters
and programmer interface).
Characteristics The characteristics of the PROFIBUS are as follows:

reliable data transfer (hamming distance = 4, i.e. reliable detection of
three simultaneously occurring errors in the telegram)
high data-transfer rate with baud rates from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud or in
the case of PROFIBUS-FMS medium data-transfer rates from 9.6 kbaud
to 1.5 Mbaud
supports up to 32 hosts parameterized with COM PROFIBUS. A host is a
system or device that contains the master interface. An S5-115U,
S5-135U or S5-155U programmable controller is the host for the
IM 308-C.
supports up to 126 stations connected to the bus, of which a maximum of
124 may be DP slaves (up to 16 DP slaves connecting to an S5-95U with
DP master interface; up to 122 DP slaves connecting to an IM 308-C)
supports up to 126 active stations (masters) connected to the bus. The
number of masters is limited to 123 if they are all parameterized with
COM PROFIBUS.
each slave can be connected to or removed from the bus without any det-
rimental effect on the transfer of data (subject to certain rules as described
in section 3.6)
range up to 1 km without RS 485 repeaters
range up to 10 km with RS 485 repeaters
range up to 90 km with fiber-optic cables

1-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
1.6 COM PROFIBUS parameterization software
Definition You require the COM PROFIBUS parameterization software in order to plan
the layout of the distributed I/O system and to go operational when the sys-
tem is installed.
COM PROFIBUS
Export via
PROFIBUS
Memory card
DP master IM 308-C
Figure 1-5 Purpose of the COM PROFIBUS parameterization software
Functions COM PROFIBUS runs under MS-WindowsR or Windows 95/NT, presenting

a graphical user interface with tools for:
S straightforward parameterization of the bus configuration,
S transferring data directly to the master via the PROFIBUS (exporting),
S starting up the PROFIBUS with the aid of diagnostics functions and the
states of the inputs/outputs,
S detailed documentation of parameterization.
COM PROFIBUS includes detailed online help, offering you any assistance
you may need when working with the parameterization program.
Additional You will find a detailed description of COM PROFIBUS in the form of an
information electronic manual (PDF) on the COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM. You can print
out the COM PROFIBUS manual from the CD-ROM and insert it in Chap-
ter 12 (which is a placeholder) of this manual.
You will find the order number of the COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM in Appen-
dix G.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-15
System overview
1.7 Network components
Definition You require network components

to connect the bus to a station,
to amplify the signal
to convert the signal to a fiber-optic medium.
to actively terminate the bus (e.g. PROFIBUS Terminator)
Connecting the The following options exist for connecting the bus to the station ...
bus ... For electrical networks (copper cable):
Bus connectors with IP 20 protection (see section 1.7.1)
Bus connectors with IP 66/67 protection (e.g. to the ET 200C)
... For optical networks (fiber-optic cables):
Fiber-optic cable Simplex connectors with IP 20 protection (see Sec-
tion 1.7.2)
Signal RS 485 repeaters are used to amplify the electric signal (see section 1.7.3).
amplification Optical link modules (OLMs) are used to amplify the optical signal up to
1.5 Mbaud.
Electrical/optical If you want to use the field bus for larger distances irrespective of the trans-
conversion mission rate, or if you do not want the data traffic on the bus to be impaired
by external interference fields, use fiber-optic cables instead of copper ca-
bles.
There are two ways to convert electrical cables to fiber-optic cables:
PROFIBUS nodes with a PROFIBUS-DP interface (RS 485) are connec-
ted to the optical network via an optical bus terminal (OBT) or via the
optical module link (OLM).
PROFIBUS nodes with an integrated fiber-optic cable interface (e.g.
ET 200M (IM 153-2 FO), S7-400 (IM 467 FO)) can be integrated in the
optical network directly.
The structure of optical networks with an optical link module (OLM) is des-
cribed in detail in the manual SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks. You will
find the most important information on the structure of an optical PROFI-
BUS-DP network with PROFIBUS nodes that have an integrated fiber-optic
cable interface in Section 3.8 of this manual.

1-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
1.7.1 Bus connector
Definition The bus connector connects the bus cable (copper cable) with the station.
The bus connector enables you to isolate a station (under certain circum-
stances) without interrupting the data traffic on the bus.
Mechanical design There are various bus connectors with IP 20 protection, the different uses of
which are indicated in Table 1-3. There are also special bus connector types
with IP 65 protection. You will find a detailed description of the bus connec-
tors in Chapter 3.
Table 1-3 Mechanical design of and applications for IP 20 bus connectors
Order numbers: 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0 6ES7 6GK1

6ES7 972-0BB11-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB40-0XA0 0BA30-0XA0 500-0EA00
Appearance:
SIEMENS
35_ outgoing cable 30_outgoing

unit cable unit
Recommended for:
S IM 308-B ~ (since release 6) ~ ~
S IM 308-C ~ ~ ~
S S5-95U ~ ~
S S7-300 ~ ~ ~
S S7-400 ~ ~ ~
S M7-300 ~ ~ ~
S M7-400 ~ ~
S CP 5412 (A2) ~
S CP 5411 ~
S CP 5511 ~
S CP 5611 ~
S ET 200B ~ ~ ~
S ET 200L ~ ~ ~
S ET 200M ~ ~ ~
S ET 200S ~ ~ ~
S ET 200U ~ ~ ~
S PG 720/720C ~ ~ ~
S PG 730 ~ ~ ~
S PG 740 ~ ~ ~
S PG 750 ~ ~ ~
S PG 760 ~ ~ ~

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-17
System overview
1.7.2 Fiber-optic cable Simplex connectors
Definition Simplex connectors connect the fiber-optic cable to the integrated fiber-optic
cable interface of the PROFIBUS device. In some Siemens modules (e.g. the
IM 153-2 FO and the IM 467 FO), two Simplex connectors (one for the sen-
der and one for the recipient) are inserted in the module via a special plug-in
adapter.
Mechanical design Two Simplex connectors (a sender and a recipient) and a plug-in adapter with
the following features are required for a fiber-optic cable connection:
IP 20 protection
Transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps
Plug-in adapter
Recipient
Sender
Simplex Fiber-optic
connectors cables
Figure 1-6 Simplex connectors and the special plug-in adapter for the IM 153-2 FO and
IM 467 FO (assembled)
Additional You will find a detailed description of the fiber-optic cable connection sys-
information tem in Section 3.8.

1-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
System overview
1.7.3 RS 485 repeater
Definition An RS 485 repeater regenerates data signals on the bus line (copper cable).
By inserting RS 485 repeaters, you can split the ET 200 distributed I/O sys-
tem into a number of segments, thus bridging longer distances.
Mechanical design The characteristics of the RS 485 repeaters with order numbers
6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0 are as follows:
degree of protection IP 20
baud rates from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud
repeater adapters for connecting waveguides
Figure 1-7 RS 485 repeater
Additional The RS 485 repeater is described in detail in chapter 4.

Information

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1-19
System overview
1.7.4 PROFIBUS Terminator
Definition A PROFIBUS Terminator forms an active bus terminating element. The es-
sential benefit is that bus nodes can be disconnected, removed or replaced
without data transfer being impaired.
Mechanical design The PROFIBUS Terminator (order number: 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0) has the
following features:
IP 20 protection
Connectable cables: all SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables
SIEMENS
PROFIBUS
TERMINA-
TOR
L+M PE A1 B1
Figure 1-8 PROFIBUS Terminator
Additional You will find a detailed description of the PROFIBUS Terminator in Sec-
information tion 4.8.

1-20 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Procedure – from planning to initial
operation 2
In this chapter This chapter offers an overview of the procedure in the ET 200 distributed
I/O system. This chapter is intended primarily for readers who as yet have no
experience with the ET 200.
It is in the nature of a quick reference for the rest of the manual, beginning
with planning and continuing through cabling, parameterization with
COM PROFIBUS, generation of the STEP 5 application program and on to
initial operation.
Section Topic Page

2.1 Planning the layout 2-2
2.2 Structuring the ET 200 distributed I/O system 2-3
2.3 What to consider before parameterization with COM PROFIBUS 2-4
2.4 Parameterization with COM PROFIBUS 2-5
2.5 Writing the STEP 5 application program 2-6
2.6 Initial operation of ET 200 2-7
Goal After reading this chapter, you should be familiar with the outlines of the
procedure for the distributed I/O system and know where to look for addi-
tional information in this manual.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 2-1
Procedure – from planning to initial operation
2.1 Planning the layout
Overview This section lists the important points for planning.
Layout, planning The first thing to do when planning the layout is to draw up a site plan:
Table 2-1 Planning the layout
Step Objective Additional in-

formation
1 Distribute the inputs and outputs to the locations where –
they are required.
2 Assign the inputs and outputs to the appropriate slaves. Manuals on slaves
3 Choose the master and protocol (PROFIBUS-DP or –
-FMS) which are best suited to achieving your particu-
lar goals.
4 Decide the locations of the slaves and the master. Manuals on slaves
5 If you are using IM 308-C master interface(s), decide See section 5.3
which slot(s) will accommodate the IM 308-C(s).
6 Calculate the distances between the sites. These figures
will determine:
the maximum possible baud rate See section 3.5
whether or not you require RS 485 repeaters (bus See chapter 4
amplifiers)
whether you require fiber-optic waveguides SIMATIC NET
PROFIBUS Net-
works manual

2-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
2.2 Structuring the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Overview This section indicates the points that must be borne in mind with regard to
the mechanical and electrical layout of the components.
Setting up the To set up the ET 200 system:

ET 200 system
Table 2-2 Setting up the ET 200
Step Objective Additional information

1 Begin by determining the positions of the See section 3.1
cable ducts, and thus the spacing between the
cables.
2 Install the slaves and the master securely in Manuals on slaves
their designated locations.
3 IM 308-C: Insert the IM 308-C in the pro- See section 5.3
grammable controller.
4 Connect the power supply, sensors and actua- Manuals on slaves
tors to the slaves.
5 Connect all nodes to the PROFIBUS-DP
field bus:
with bus connectors 34
See section 3.4
to RS 485 repeaters without bus connec- See chapter 4
tors
with special IP 66/67 bus connectors, for e. g. Manual ET 200C Dis-
example for ET 200C, DP/AS-I link. tributed I/O Station

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 2-3
2.3 What to consider before parameterization with COM PROFIBUS
Overview This section deals with the aspects you should consider before starting para-
meterization with COM PROFIBUS.
Considerations Broadly speaking, there are two approaches to parameterization with

COM PROFIBUS and to writing the application program:
You can begin by parameterizing the configuration with COM PROFI-
BUS and allow COM PROFIBUS to automatically assign all station num-
bers and addresses in the STEP 5 application program. Thereafter, you
can have the program print the system documentation and use this to set
up your STEP 5 application program.
Alternatively,
Parameterization with COM PROFIBUS and writing of the STEP 5 ap-
plication program are parallel. If you opt for this alternative, you must
define the following before you start parameterization with COM PROFI-
BUS:
Decisions Before starting parameterization with COM PROFIBUS, decide on the fol-
lowing:
Table 2-3 COM PROFIBUS and STEP 5 in parallel
Before starting parameterization with COM PROFIBUS, decide ... Additional

information
... which slave will have which PROFIBUS address. –
... which addresses the slaves will use in the STEP 5 application pro- –
gram.
IM 308-C: The scope of the addresses determines which mode of ad- See
dressing you select (linear, P-page addressing or Q-page addressing; section 6.1
plus function block FB IM308C).
The system requirements determine whether you activate response See
monitoring for the slaves. The response monitoring setup determines section G.8.3
whether the slave is switched to ”0” in a defined manner in the event of
an error.
IM 308-C: You must define the error reporting mode for the See
IM 308-C: QVZ (acknowledgment delay), PEU (power fail in expan- section G.8.3
sion unit) or none.

2-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
2.4 Parameterization with COM PROFIBUS
Overview This section provides a brief outline of the procedure for parameterization
with COM PROFIBUS.
Parameterizing the When you are ready to parameterize and save the configuration, proceed as
configuration follows:
Table 2-4 Parameterizing and saving the configuration

formation
1 After starting COM PROFIBUS, assign the parameters to See COM PRO-
the individual components: FIBUS manual
Bus
Host
Master and
DP slaves or FMS stations.
2 After you have finished parameterizing the configuration, See COM PRO-
save all the parameters and transfer the data to the master. FIBUS manual
3 Finally, print the system documentation. See COM PRO-
FIBUS manual

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 2-5
2.5 Writing the STEP 5 application program
STEP 5 application You must know the following in order to write the STEP 5 application pro-
program gram:
Table 2-5 STEP 5 application program
You must know the following in order to write the Additional information
STEP 5 application program ...
... the addresses that the various DP slaves will have in See COM PROFIBUS man-
the STEP 5 application program. ual
... how to access the distributed inputs and outputs in the IM 308-C:
STEP 5 application program: see sections 6.1 and B.7
S5-95U: see section 10.1
... how to use FB IM308C for the IM 308-C. See section 7
... how to interpret diagnostics messages. IM 308-C: see section 6.2
S5-95U: see section 10.4
... what the FREEZE and SYNC control commands See section 6.5
mean and how to send these commands to the DP
slaves.

2-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
2.6 Initial operation of the ET 200
Initial operation of The procedure for initial operation of the ET 200 distributed I/O system is as
the ET 200 follows:
Table 2-6 Initial operation of the ET 200 (with IM 308-C)

formation
1 Use COM PROFIBUS or the FB IM308C to assign a See Section 6.6
valid PROFIBUS address to slaves that have to be See the
assigned a PROFIBUS address by software means. COM PROFIBUS
manual
2 Test the individual slaves first with COM PROFIBUS. See the
COM PROFIBUS
manual
3 Connect the individual stations to the bus, following See section 8.1
the correct sequence.
4 Via the AS 511 interface of the programmable control- Manuals on pro-
ler, power up the ET 200 distributed I/O system. grammable con-
trollers
5 Using COM PROFIBUS, interpret the diagnostics See COM PROFI-
messages on the PROFIBUS. BUS manual

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 2-7

2-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Routing cables; connecting and installing
bus connectors 3
In this chapter This chapter contains information on:
Section Topic Page

3.1 Notes on routing cables 3-2
3.2 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 3-16
3.3 Characteristics of the bus cable 3-24
3.4 Applications and technical data of the bus connectors 3-26
3.5 Connecting bus cables to bus connectors 3-29
3.6 Connecting bus connectors to modules 3-37
3.7 PNO installation guideline (placeholder) 3-38
3.8 PROFIBUS-DP network with fiber-optic cables 3-39
Goal This chapter contains all the information that you must bear in mind with
regard to routing cables.
After reading this chapter you will know how to connect the bus connectors
and what you must bear in mind when routing the PROFIBUS cable.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-1
Routing cables; connecting and installing bus connectors
3.1 Notes on routing cables
Overview Certain rules and regulations apply to use of the ET 200 as a component in a
higher-order system. These rules and regulations vary from application to
application.
In this chapter The various sections of this chapter contain information on the following
topics:
Section Topic Page

3.1.1 General rules and regulations for operation of ET 200 3-3
3.1.2 In-building cable routing 3-5
3.1.3 Outdoor cable routing 3-7
3.1.4 Potential equalization 3-8
3.1.5 Cable shielding 3-10
3.1.6 Ways of avoiding interference voltages 3-12
3.1.7 Special measures for interference-proof operation 3-14

3-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.1.1 General rules and regulations for operation of ET 200
Specific The rules and regulations for safety at work and accident prevention (e.g.
application machine-protection guidelines) must be observed in all instances.
EMERGENCY OFF IEC 204 EMERGENCY OFF facilities must remain effective in all operating
facilities modes of the plant or system.
System startup The table below lists the points to bear in mind when a system starts up after
after certain events certain events.
When ... then ...

ET 200 restarts after voltage no dangerous operating statuses are per-
collapse or power failure mitted to occur. If necessary, an EMER-
GENCY OFF may have to be forced.
ET 200 starts up when the it must be impossible for an uncontrolled
EMERGENCY OFF facility is or undefined startup to occur.
reset
Mains power The important points are listed in the table below.
System feature System requirement

Permanently installed sys- A mains disconnector or a fuse must be in-
tem without all-pole mains corporated in the in-building wiring system.
disconnector
Load power supply modules, The voltage range must be correct for the
power supply modules local mains supply.
All circuits Fluctuations/variation of mains voltage
from rated value must be within permissible
tolerance (see technical data).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-3
24 V DC supply The points to bear in mind with regard to the 24 V supply are as follows:
With regard to ... it is important to ensure ...

buildings exterior lightning protec- provide adequate
tion lightning
g g protection
p
24 V DC supply lines, interior lightning protec- (
(see S ti 3.2)
Section 3 2)
signal lines tion
24 V supply dependable electrical isolation of low voltage
Protection against The points of importance with regard to protection against external electrical
external electrical effects and faults are shown below.
effects
With regard to ... it is important to ensure ...

all facilities or systems incorpo- that the facility or system is connected to
rating the ET 200 the protective conductor so that destruc-
tive influences are diverted.
connecting lines and signal lines that routing and installation are correct.
signal lines that line or conductor breakage cannot
cause the facility or system to assume an
undefined state.

3-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.1.2 In-building cable routing
Introductory The EMC rules with regard to in-building cable routing (inside and outside
remarks cabinets) require certain clearances to be maintained between individual line
groups. Table 3-1 shows the general rules with regard to spacing as they ap-
ply to cable selection.
How to read the If you want to know how two cables of different types should be routed, pro-
table ceed as follows:
1. Find the first cable type in column 1 (cables for ...).
2. Find the second cable type in the corresponding section of column 2 (and
cables for ...).
3. Read off the applicable guidelines in column 3 (route ...).
Table 3-1 In-building cable routing
Cables for ... and cables for ... route ...

Bus signals, shielded Bus signals, shielded in shared bundles or in shared
(SINEC L1, PROFIBUS) (SINEC L1, PROFIBUS) cable ducts
Data signals, shielded Data signals, shielded
(programmers, OPs, printers, (programmers, OPs, printers, counter in-
counter inputs, etc.) puts, etc.)
Analog signals, shielded Analog signals, shielded
DC voltage (60 V), DC voltage (60 V), unshielded
unshielded Process signals (25 V), shielded
Process signals (25 V), AC voltage (25 V), unshielded
shielded
Monitors (coaxial cabling)
AC voltage (25 V),
unshielded DC voltage in separate bundles or cable ducts
(60 V and400 V), unshielded (no minimum spacing required)
AC voltage
(25 V and400 V), unshielded
DC and AC voltages (400 V), unshielded inside cabinets:
in separate bundles or cable
ducts (no minimum spacing
required)
outside cabinets:
on separate cable racks with
at least 10 cm spacing

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-5
Table 3-1 In-building cable routing, continued
Cables for ... and cables for ... route ...

DC voltage Bus signals, shielded in separate bundles or cable ducts
(60 V and400 V), (SINEC L1, PROFIBUS) (no minimum spacing necessary)
unshielded Data signals, shielded
AC voltage (programmers, OPs, printers, counter sig-
(25 V and400 V), nals etc.)
unshielded Analog signals, shielded
DC voltage (60 V), unshielded
Process signals (25 V), shielded
AC voltage (25 V), unshielded
DC voltage (60 V and400 V), un- in shared bundles or cable ducts
shielded
AC voltage (25 V and400 V), un-
shielded
DC and AC voltages (400 V), unshielded Inside cabinets:
in separate bundles or cable
ducts (no minimum spacing
necessary)
Outside cabinets:
on separate cable trays with
at least 10 cm spacing
DC and AC voltages Bus signals, shielded Inside cabinets:
(400 V), unshielded (SINEC L1, PROFIBUS) in separate bundles or cable
DC and AC voltages Data signals, shielded ducts (no minimum spacing
(400 V), unshielded (programmers, OPs, printers, counter sig- necessary)
nals, etc.) Outside cabinets:
Analog signals, shielded on separate cable trays with
DC voltage
g (60 V), unshielded min. 10 cm spacing
p g
Process signals (25 V), shielded
AC voltage (25 V), unshielded
DC voltage (60 V and400 V),
unshielded
AC voltage (25 V and400 V), un-
shielded
DC and AC voltages (400 V), unshielded in shared bundles or cable ducts
SINEC H1 SINEC H1 in shared bundles or cable ducts
Others in separate bundles or cable ducts
with at least 50 cm spacing

3-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.1.3 Outdoor cable routing
Cable routing rules The rules that apply to in-building routing and EMC also apply outdoors.
for EMC Outdoor cabling is also subject to the following rules:
Lay cables on metal cable carriers.
Galvanically connect the butting faces of cable-carrier sections.
Ground the cable carriers.
If necessary, ensure adequate potential equalization between the con-
nected devices.
Provide adequate lightning protection and grounding as applicable in your
case (see below).
Additional Section 3.2 contains additional information on lightning protection for the
information ET 200 distributed I/O system. If you have any questions, do not hesitate to
contact your local Siemens branch or a company specializing in lightning
protection.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-7
3.1.4 Potential equalization
When do Differences in potential can occur, for example, when different mains sup-
differences in plies are used. Damage may be caused to the system as a result of potential
potential occur? differences between various system parts if:
programmable controllers and inputs/outputs are connected by potential-
bonded couplings,
or
cable shields are connected at both ends and grounded to different parts of
a system.
Avoiding potential It is important to install potential equalization lines in order to minimize po-
differences tential differences and ensure the functionality of the electronic components.
When and why do Potential equalization has the following advantages:

you need potential
Devices with a grounded interface may be destroyed as a result of poten-
equalization?
tial differences.
The shielding of the PROFIBUS cable must not be used for potential
equalization. This is the case, however, with any parts of the system that
are linked together via the cable shield, but connected to different ground-
ing points.
Potential equalization is a precondition of lightning protection.
Rules for potential Note the following points:

equalization
The smaller the impedance of the potential equalization line, the higher
the efficiency of potential equalization.
If shielded signal cables are installed between certain parts of the system
and connected at both ends to ground/protective conductors, it is impor-
tant to ensure that the impedance of the additional potential equalization
line is not in excess of 10 % of the shield impedance.
Use connectors with large contact areas to connect the potential equaliza-
tion conductors to the ground/protective conductor.
Protect the potential equalization conductors against corrosion.
Use potential equalization conductors made of copper or galvanized steel.
Route the potential equalization conductors in such a way that the areas
bounded by the potential conductor and the signal lines are as small as
possible.
Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized steel.

3-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Note
Equipotental bonding conductors are not necessary if the parts of the system
are connected to each other exclusively by means of fiber-optic cables.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-9
3.1.5 Cable shielding
Definition Shielding is a means of weakening (attenuating) magnetic, electric and elec-

tromagnetic interference fields.
Interference currents on cable shields are diverted to ground via the shield
busbar, which forms a conductive connection with the housing. It is particu-
larly important to ensure a low-ohmic connection to the protective conductor,
as otherwise the interference currents themselves may become a source of
interference.
Measures for cable Note the following points:

shielding
If possible, use only cables with braided shields. The shield density
should be more than 80 %.
Avoid using cables with foil shielding, because tensile and compressive
loads at the attachments can easily damage the foil. The result is a reduc-
tion in shield efficiency.
Always connect the cable shields at both ends. It is only when the shield-
ing is connected at both ends that interference suppression is effective at
the high end of the frequency range.
Exceptions: It may be better to connect the shield at one end only, if
– for some reason it is not possible to install potential equalization lines,
– analog signals (in the low mV or A range) are transmitted, or
– foil shielding (static shields) is used.
Note, however, that if the shield is connected at one end only it can sup-
press only low-frequency interference.
Connect the shield of the data line to the plug body.
If the system is installed for stationary operation, it is advisable to remove
the insulation from the shielded cable without interruption and connect
the cable to the shielding/protective conductor busbar.
Note
If a potential difference occurs between the grounding points, an equaliza-
tion current can flow through a shield connected at both ends.
In this case, install an additional potential equalization line.

3-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Correct shield Observe the following points:

installation
Use cable clamps made of metal to secure the braided shield.
The enclosing clamps must hold a large part of the shield and make good
contact (see Fig. 3-1).
Connect the shield to a shield busbar immediately adjacent to the point
where the cable enters the cabinet.
Figure 3-1 Securing shielded cables with cable clamps and cable ties (schematic
diagram)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-11
3.1.6 Measures to prevent interference voltages
Overview Frequently, measures designed to suppress interference voltages are not

adopted until the controller is in operation and reception of a traffic signal is
found to be unsatisfactory. The outlay for post-installation measures (e.g.
special contactors) can often be reduced to a significant extent if you observe
the following points when configuring your control system.
Note the importance of the following:
Suitable positioning of devices and routing of cables
Grounding of all inactive metal components
Shielding of devices and lines, and
Special interference-suppression measures
Arrangement of Adequate suppression of magnetic DC or AC fields in the low-frequency

devices and range (e.g. 50 Hz) is costly. In many cases, however, the problem can be
routing of cables solved by ensuring that the interference sink is sufficiently far away from the
interference source.

3-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Installation and When the devices are installed, it is important to ensure that the inactive
grounding of metal components are correctly grounded with connectors having large con-
inactive metal tact areas. Correct grounding establishes a uniform reference potential for the
components control system and reduces the effects on spurious interference.
Grounding means the conductive connection of all inactive metal compo-
nents. The entirety of all interconnected inactive components is known as the
machine ground.
Inactive metal components are all conductive parts electrically isolated from
active parts by basic insulation at least and which can become charged only if
a fault occurs.
Even if a fault occurs, the ground may under no circumstances carry volt-
age that could cause injury in the event of accidental contact. The ground
must, therefore, be connected to the protective conductor. In order to avoid
ground loops, a star pattern must be adopted when grounded objects (cabi-
nets, parts of structures and machines) not immediately adjacent to each
other are connected to the protective conductor system.
Note the following:
1. When connecting the inactive metal parts, exercise the same meticulous
care and attention as with active parts.
2. Make sure that metal-to-metal connections are low-ohmic, i.e. use con-
nectors that are efficiently conductive and which have large contact areas.
3. If painted or anodized metal parts are included in grounding, these insu-
lating protective surface coatings must be penetrated. Use special contact
washers or remove the surface coatings down to bare metal.
4. Protect the assembled connections against corrosion, e.g. by applying a
coat of grease.
5. Use flexible grounding straps to connect moving grounded parts (e.g.
doors of cabinets). The grounding straps should be short and have a large
surface area, because the surface area is critical for the removal of high-
frequency interference.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-13
3.1.7 Special measures for interference-proof operation
Commutating As a rule, the inductors driven by SIMATIC S5 (e.g. contactor/relay coils) do

capacitors for not require external commutating capacitors, because the requisite compo-
inductors nents are integrated in the modules.
You need to install commutating capacitors for inductors only:
when SIMATIC S5 output circuits can be switched off by other integral
contacts (e.g. relay contacts for EMERGENCY OFF). In this case, the
commutating capacitors integrated in the modules are no longer effective;
if the inductors are not driven by SIMATIC S5 modules.
Note: The supplier of the inductors will be able to tell you how to dimension
the overvoltage-protection devices.
Circuit with DC- DC-actuated coils require diodes or Zener diodes.

actuated coils
with diode with Zener diode

+ +
- -
Figure 3-2 Circuits with DC-actuated coils
Circuit with A circuit incorporating diodes/Zener diodes has the following properties:
diodes/Zener
Shutdown overvoltages can be avoided completely
diodes
High shutdown delay (6 to 9 times higher than without protective cir-
cuitry)
Circuit with AC- AC-actuated coils require varistors or RC elements.

actuated coils
with varistor with RC element
~ ~
~ ~
Figure 3-3 Circuits with AC-actuated coils

3-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Circuit with A circuit incorporating a varistor has the following properties:

varistor
S The amplitude of the shutdown overvoltage is limited, but the overvoltage
is not suppressed
S Overvoltage slope is uniform
S Shutdown delay is slight
Circuit with RC A circuit incorporating an RC element has the following properties:

element
S The amplitude and slope of the shutdown overvoltage are reduced
S Shutdown delay is slight
Programming Each cabinet must feature a power point for connecting the programming
units: connection units to the mains supply. These power points must receive their supply via
to power supply the distribution board to which the protective conductor of the cabinet is con-
nected.
Cabinet lighting Use bulbs such as LINESTRAR bulbs for the cabinet lighting. Do not use
fluorescent tubes, because they generate interference fields. If there is no
alternative to fluorescent tubes, adopt the measures illustrated in Fig. 3-4.
Screen grid over tube
Shielded cable
Metal-encapsulated switch
Mains filter or shielded supply

cable
Figure 3-4 Measures for suppressing interference from fluorescent tubes in cabinets

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-15
3.2 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection
In this chapter This chapter describes ways and means of protecting your automation system
against overvoltage surge and lightning strike.
Section Topic Page

3.2.1 Why protect the automation system against overvoltage? 3-17
3.2.2 How to protect the ET 200 distributed I/O system against over- 3-19
voltage
3.2.3 Example illustrating lightning protection for the ET 200 distrib- 3-22
uted I/O system

3-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.2.1 Why protect the automation system against overvoltage?
Introduction Overvoltage is one of the most frequent causes of failure. These dangerous
voltage surges can be caused by:
switching operations in power-supply networks
atmospheric discharges, or
electrostatic discharges
In this context, it is important to understand the theory of overvoltage protec-
tion, in other words the concept of zoned lightning protection.
This chapter contains an outline of this concept, plus a discussion of the rules
governing the measures to be adopted at the interfaces between the individual
zones.
Note
This chapter merely indicates how to protect an automation system against
overvoltage.
Bear in mind that complete protection against overvoltage can be ensured
only if the entire structure which houses the system incorporates adequate
overvoltage-protection measures. This is especially significant for structural
measures intended for buildings in planning.
If you would like comprehensive information on overvoltage protection, we
strongly recommend that you consult your Siemens contact partner or a com-
pany which specializes in lightning protection.
In-depth literature The proposals advanced in this chapter are based on the concept of zoned
lightning protection as described in IEC standard 1024-2 Protection against
LEMP.
Principle of zoned The principle of zoned lightning protection requires that the volume (a fac-
lightning tory building, for example) to be protected against overvoltage be subdivided
protection into zones by the application of EMC criteria (see Fig. 3-5).
The individual lightning-protection zones are formed by
The external lightning protection of the Lightning-protection zone 0

building (field side)
The shielding of:
Buildings Lightning-protection zone 1
Rooms and/or Lightning-protection zone 2
Devices Lightning-protection zone 3

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-17
Lightning strikes Direct lightning strikes occur in lightning-protection zone 0, producing high-
and overvoltages energy electromagnetic fields that must be reduced or dissipated by suitable
lightning-protection elements/measures as they pass from one zone to the
next.
In lightning-protection zones 1 and higher, overvoltages may occur as the
result of switching operations, coupling operations, etc.
Lightning- Fig. 3-5 is a schematic showing the concept of lightning-protection zones as

protection zones: it applies to a free-standing building.
schematic
Lightning-protection zone 0 (field side)
Building
External shield
lightning (steel re-
prot. Lightning-protection zone 1
inforcing)
Room shield
Line in Light.-prot. zone 2 (steel re-

power inforcing)
system Light. Device shield
prot.
zone 3 (metal casing)
Device
Non-
electric
Metal line
part (metallic)
Internal
line
Line in information system Light. prot. potential equal.

Local potential equal.
Figure 3-5 Lightning-protection zones of a building
Principle of the At the interfaces between the lightning-protection zones, you must provide
interfaces between measures to prevent or hinder the passage of overvoltage surges.
the lightning-
The principle of establishing lightning-protection zones also requires that all
protection zones
lines capable of carrying the lightning pulse between the lightning-protection
zones be included in the potential equalization system for lightning protec-
tion.
Lines capable of carrying the lightning pulse include:
metal pipes (e.g. for water, gas and heat)
cables in power systems (e.g. mains supply, 24 V supply)
and
cables in information systems (e.g. bus line)

3-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.2.2 How to protect the ET 200 distributed I/O system against

overvoltage
Rules for the 0 1 Suitable measures for potential equalization in the lightning-protection sys-
interface (potential tem at the interface between lightning-protection zones 0 1 are as follows:
equalization in
lightning
Use twisted metal straps or metal braids of sufficient current-carrying
protection system) capacity as cable shields, e.g. NYCY or A2Y(K)Y, and ground these
straps at both ends;
or
lay the cables in
– continuously connected metal conduits grounded at both ends, or
– in reinforced-concrete ducts with continuous reinforcing members, or
– on enclosed cable trays made of metal and grounded at both ends.
or
use fiber-optic waveguides instead of lines which are capable of carrying
the surge current.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-19
Additional If the measures outlined above cannot be implemented, it is essential to pro-

measures vide coarse protection at the 0 ´ 1 interface in the form of suitable lightning
diverters. The table below is an overview of the components you can use for
this purpose.
Table 3-2 Overvoltage-protection components for coarse protection
Ser. Lines for ... ... install the following at the 0 ´ 1 inter- Order No.
No. face:
1 Three-phase TN-C system 3 pcs. DEHNport lightning diverter, phases 900 1001
L1/L2/L3 to PEN
Three-phase TN-S and TT systems 4 pcs. DEHNport lightning diverter, phases 900 1001
L1/L2/L3/N to PE
Alternating current TN-L, TN-S-, TT 2 pcs. DEHNport lightning diverter, phases 900 1001
systems L1+, N to PE
2 24 V DC supply 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type AD 24 V DSN: 919 2532
3 PROFIBUS bus line up to 500 kbaud: 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, DSN: 919 2322
Type ARE 8 V
over 500 kbaud: 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type DSN: 919 2702
AHFD 5 V
4 Inputs/outputs of digital modules
24 V DC 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type AD 24 V DSN: 919 2532
110/220 V AC 2 pc. DEHNguard 150 overvoltage diverter 900 6031
Inputs/outputs of analog modules
up to " 12 V 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type ALE 15 V DSN: 919 2202
1 Order components directly from: DEHN + Soehne, Elektrotechnische Fabrik, Hans-Dehn-Str. 1, D-92318 Neumarkt,
Germany
2 Order numbers as per catalog Service XV 10. The order number of this catalog is E89700-S1034-X-A3.

3-20 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Rules for the 1 ´ 2 The rules for all lightning-protection zone interfaces 1 ´ 2 and higher are as
interfaces and follows:
higher
Provide local potential equalization at each lightning-protection zone in-
(local potential
terface.
equalization)
At all lightning-protection zone interfaces, include all lines (e.g. metal
pipes, etc.) in the local potential equalization measures.
Include all metal fittings inside the lightning-protection zone in the local
potential equalization system (e.g. metal components inside lightning
protection zone 2 must be included in measures implemented at the 1 ´ 2
interface).
Additional We recommend the installation of fine protection:

measures
for all lightning-protection zone interfaces 1 ´ 2 and higher and
for all lines longer than 100 meters inside a lightning-protection zone.
Table 3-3 Fine protection of lines by means of overvoltage-protection components
Ser. Lines for ... ... at the 1 ´ 2 interface and higher, install: Order No.
No.
1 Three-phase TN-C system 3 pcs. DEHNguard 275 overvoltage diverter 900 6001
Three-phase TN-S and TT systems 4 pcs. DEHNguard overvoltage diverter 275 900 6001
Alternatiing current TN-L, TN-S, TT 2 pcs. DEHNguard 275 overvoltage diverter 900 6001
systems
2 24 V DC supply 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type AD 24 V DSN: 919 253 2
3 PROFIBUS bus line up to 500 kbaud: 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type DSN: 919 2322
ARE 8 V
over 500 kbaud: 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type DSN: 919 270 2
AHFD 5 V
4 Inputs/outputs of digital modules
24 V DC 1 pc. Blitzductor KT, Type AD 24 V DSN: 919 2532
110/220 V AC 2 pcs. DEHNguard 150 overvoltage diverter 900 6031
Inputs/outputs of analog modules
up to " 12 V 1 pc. Type FDK 12 V OV terminal DSN: 919 9992
1 Order components directly from: DEHN + Soehne, Elektrotechnische Fabrik, Hans-Dehn-Str. 1, 92318 Neumarkt,
Germany
2 Order numbers as per catalog Service XV 10. The order number of this catalog is: E89700-S1034-X-A3.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-21
3.2.3 Example illustrating lightning protection for the ET 200

distributed I/O system
Introduction This section contains an example illustrating how the ET 200 distributed I/O
system can be protected against overvoltage surges.
Components for Table 3-4 refers to Fig. 3-6 and clarifies the items referred to by their serial
lightning numbers:
protection
Table 3-4 Example of configuration with adequate lightning protection (legend for
Fig. 3-6)
Ser. No. Component Purpose

from Fig.
3-6
1 Lightning diverter to suit mains sys- Coarse protection against direct
tem; 2 to 4 pcs. DEHNport lightning strike and overvoltage
Order No.: 900 1001 at interface 0 1
2 Overvoltage diverter, 2 pcs. DEHN- Coarse protection against over-
guard 275 voltage
Order No.: 900 6001 at interface 1 2
3 Digital modules Fine protection against over-
Blitzductor KT, Type AD 24 V voltage at inputs and outputs of
SIMATIC the DP slaves at interface
12
Analog modules
Blitzductor KT, Type ARE 12 V
4 In dropline Fine protection against over-
1 pc. adapter type FS 9E-PB voltage for RS 485 interfaces at
Order No.: DSN 924 0172 interface 1 2
1 pc. 35 mm top-hat rail with
cable, type ÜSD-9-PB/S-KB
Order No.: DSN 924 0642
5 Bus cable shielding: –
ÎÎÎ
Copper plate Shield
ÎÎÎ Clamp
6 Potential equalization cable, 16 mm2 –
7 Blitzduktor KT, type AHFD, for Fine protection against over-
building transition voltages for RS 485 interfaces
Order No.: DSN 919 2702 at interface 0 1
1 Order components directly from: DEHN + Soehne, Elektrotechnische Fabrik, Hans-
Dehn-Str. 1, 92318 Neumarkt, Germany
2 Order numbers as per catalog Service XV 10. The order number for this catalog is
E89700-S1034-X-A3.

3-22 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Sample Fig. 3-6 is an example showing how the distributed I/O system must be con-
configuration figured for effective protection against overvoltage surges:
L1 L2 L3 NPE Lightning-protection zone 0, field side

Lightning-protection zone 1

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Lightning-prot. zone 2 Lightning-protection zone 2
Slave
PS, IM
CPU 308-C
6 mm2

A A
B B
10 mm2
PE 10 mm2
PE

Figure 3-6 Example showing lightning protection for the ET 200 distributed I/O system

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-23
3.3 Characteristics of the bus cable
Characteristics of Use a two-conductor, twisted, shielded cable with the following characteris-
the bus cable tics as the bus cable:
Table 3-5 Characteristics of the PROFIBUS cable
Designation Normal Normal with Buried cable Drum cable1 Normal cable
PE sheath with festoon 1
Order number 6VX1 ... 830-0AH10 830-0BH10 830-3AH10 830-3BH10 830-3CH10
Attenuation at
S 16 MHz < 45 dB/km < 52 dB/km
S 4 MHz < 22 dB/km < 25 dB/km
S 38.4 kHz < 5 dB/km < 5 dB/km
S 9.6 kHz < 3 dB/km < 3 dB/km
Characteristic impedance at
S 9.6 kHz 270 " 27 W
S 38.4 kHz 185 " 18,5 W
S 3 to 20 MHz 150 " 15 W
Rated value 150 W
Loop resistance v 110 W/km v 110 W/km v 132 W/km
Shield impedance v 9.5 W/km v 12 W/km v 14 W/km
Operating capacitance at 1 kHz approx. 28.5 nF/km
Operating voltage (rms value) v 100 V
Cable type (standard designation) 02Y (ST) 02Y (ST) 02Y (ST) 02Y (ST) 02Y (ST) C
CY C2Y CY2Y C11Y (ZG) 11Y
1 2 0.64/ 1 2 0.64/ 1 2 0.64/ 1 2 0.64/ 1 2 0.64/
2.55- 2.55- 2.55- 2.55- 2.55-
150 KF 40 150 SW 150 KF 40 150 LI petrol 150 LI petrol
FR VI SW
Sheath
S Material PVC PE PE PUR PUR
S Color violet black black petrol petrol
S Diameter (in mm) 8.0 " 0.4 8.0 " 0.4 10.2 " 0.4 8.5 " 0.4 9.7 " 0.4
Permissible ambient conditions
S Operating temperature –40 _C to +60 _C –40 _C to +60 _C
S Transport/storage temperature –40 _C to +60 _C –40 _C to +60 _C
S Laying temperature –5 _C to +50 _C –5 _C to +60 _C
Bending radius
S Single bending " 75 mm " 40 mm " 75 mm " 45 mm " 50 mm
S Multiple bending " 150 mm " 80 mm " 100 mm " 65 mm " 80 mm
Permissible tensile force 45 N 35 N
Weight 59 kg/km 52 kg/km 90 kg/km 74 kg/km 74 kg/km
Use of halogen Yes No Yes No No

3-24 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table 3-5 Characteristics of the PROFIBUS cable, continued
Designation Normal Normal with Buried cable Drum cable1 Normal cable
PE sheath with festoon 1
Behavior in fire Flame-retar- Flammable Flammable Flame-retar- Flame-retar-
dant to VDE dant to VDE dant to VDE
0472 T804, 0472 T804, 0472 T804,
test type C test type B test type B
Resistance to oil Conditional resistance to mineral oils and Good resistance to mineral oils
greases and greases
Resistance to UV light No Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 Segment lengths restricted

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-25
3.4 Applications and technical data of the bus connectors
Applications You need bus connectors to connect the PROFIBUS to a station. There is a
choice of IP 20 bus connectors; the uses of the various types are shown in
Table 3-6.
Table 3-6 IP 20 bus connectors, configuration and applications
Order numbers: 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0 6ES7 6GK1

6ES7 972-0BB11-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB40-0XA0 0BA30-0XA0 500-0EA00
Appearance:
SIEMENS
35_ outgoing
30_ outgoing
cable unit
cable unit
Recommended for:
S IM 308-B ~ (since release 6) ~ ~
S IM 308-C ~ ~ ~
S S5-95U ~ ~
S S7-300 ~ ~ ~
S S7-400 ~ ~ ~
S M7-300 ~ ~ ~
S M7-400 ~ ~
S CP 5412 (A2) ~
S CP 5411 ~
S CP 5511 ~
S CP 5611 ~
S ET 200B ~ ~ ~
S ET 200L ~ ~ ~
S ET 200M ~ ~ ~
S ET 200S ~ ~ ~
S ET 200U ~ ~ ~
S PG 720/720C ~ ~ ~
S PG 730 ~ ~ ~
S PG 740 ~ ~ ~
S PG 750 ~ ~ ~
S PG 760 ~ ~ ~

3-26 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Technical data The technical data of the various bus connectors is shown in the table below:
Table 3-7 IP 20 bus connectors, technical data
Order numbers 6ES7 972- 6ES7 972- 6ES7 972- 6GK1 500-
... 0BA11-0XA0 ... 0BA40-0XA0 0BA30-0XA0 0EA00
... 0BB11-0XA0 ... 0BB0-0XA0
Programmer socket 0BA11: no 0BA40: no no no
0BB11: yes 0BB40: yes
Max. baud rate 12 Mbaud 12 Mbaud 1.5 Mbaud 12 Mbaud
Terminating resistor optionally optionally no optionally
activatable activatable activatable
Outgoing cable vertical inclined 35_ inclined 30_ axial
Interfaces
S PROFIBUS sta- 9-pole sub-D socket 9-pole sub-D socket 9-pole sub-D socket 9-pole sub-D socket
tion 4 terminal blocks for 4 terminal blocks for 4 insulation-piercing 4 terminal blocks for
S PROFIBUS bus wires up to 1.5 mm2 wires up to 1.5 mm2 connecting devices wires up to 1.5 mm2
cable for wires 0.644 "
0.04 mm
Connectable PROFI- 8 " 0.5 mm 8 " 0.5 mm 8 " 0.5 mm 8 " 0.5 mm
BUS cable diameter
Supply voltage (must DC 4.75 to 5.25 V DC 4.75 to 5.25 V DC 4.75 to 5.25 V DC 4.75 to 5.25 V
be obtained from ter-
minal device)
Current consumption max. 5 mA max. 5 mA max. 5 mA max. 5 mA
Permissible ambient
conditions
S Operating temper- 0 _C to +60 _C 0 _C to +60 _C 0 _C to +60 _C 0 _C to +55 _C
ature
S Transport/storage –25 _C to +80 _C –25 _C to +80 _C –25 _C to +80 _C –25 _C to +70 _C
temperature
S Relative humidity max. 75 % at +25 _C max. 75 % at +25 _C max. 75 % at +25 _C max. 95 % at +25 _C
Dimensions (in mm) 15.8 54 34 15.8 54 38 15 58 34 15 39 57
Weight approx. 40 g approx. 40 g approx. 30 g approx. 100 g

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-27
Bus connector not You do not require the IP 20 bus connectors for:
necessary
IP 65 slaves (e.g. ET 200C)
RS 485 repeaters
Disconnecting a Under certain circumstances, the bus connector enables you to disconnect a
station station from the bus without interrupting traffic on it.
Bus connector We recommend fitting at least one bus connector with a programmer socket
with programmer in each bus segment. This will make it easier for you to start up with a pro-
socket grammer or a PC.
Pin assignment of Table 3-8 shows the pin assignment of the 9-pole D-sub connector.
sub-D connector
The assignment of pin nos. 1, 2, 7 and 9 corresponds to that of the connected
device. Pins 4, 5 and 6 of the bus connector with order number
6ES7 972-0BA30 ... are not wired.
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the 9-pole D-sub connector
View Pin No. Signal Designation

1 – –
2 – –
5
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
9
4 4 RTS Request to send
8
3 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)
7
2 6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
6
1 7 – –
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 – –

3-28 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.5 Connecting the bus cable to the bus connector
In section 3.5 This section contains:
Section Topic Page

3.5.1 Connecting bus cable to bus connectors with order number 3-31
6ES7 972-0B.11 ...
6ES7 972-0BA30 ...
6ES7 972-0BA40 ...
Rules for laying When you lay the bus cable, take great care to ensure that it is:
cables
not twisted
not stretched and
not compressed.
When laying the bus cable, moreover, you must observe the boundary condi-
tions stated in section 3.3.
Maximum cable The maximum cable lengths as stated in the table below are guaranteed only
length for PROFIBUS bus cables.
Table 3-9 Permissible cable lengths for a segment using RS 485 repeaters
Baud rate Maximum cable Max. distance between

length of a segment 2 stations (in meters)
(in meters)
9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 1000 10,000
500 kbaud 400 4,000
1.5 Mbaud 200 2,000
3 to 12 Mbaud 100 1,000

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-29
Length of If you do not connect the bus cable directly to the bus connector (e.g. when
droplines using an PROFIBUS bus terminal), you must take the maximum permissible
length of a dropline into account.
The maximum lengths for droplines per bus segment are shown in the table
below.
At baud rates of 3 Mbaud and higher, connect the programmer or PCs by
means of programmer droplines having the order number
6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0. You can use multiple droplines with this order num-
ber in a bus configuration. Other droplines are not permitted.
Table 3-10 Length of droplines per segment
Baud rate Max. length of Number of stations with

droplines
p per
p droplines measuring ...
segmentt 1.5 m or 1.6 m 3m
9.6 to 93.75 kbaud 96 m 32 32
187.5 kbaud 75 m 32 25
500 kbaud 30 m 20 10
1.5 Mbaud 10 m 6 3
3 to 12 Mbaud – – –

3-30 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c

6ES7 972-0B.11 ...
Appearance (6ES7 The bus connector with the order number 6ES7 972-0B.11 ... is illustrated
972-0B.11 ...) below:
9-pole sub-D male adapter for

Screws for se- connection to station
curing to station
Prog. connector adapter

(6ES7 972-0BB11-0XA0 Guides for
only) PROFIBUS bus cable
Switch for
terminating resistor
Housing screws
Figure 3-7 Bus connector with order number 6ES7 972-0B.11 ...
Preparing the bus To connect the bus cable to a bus connector with order number
cable 6ES7 972-0B.11 ... proceed as follows:
1. Strip the ends of the cable conductors as shown in Fig. 3-8.
6XV1 830–0AH10/-3BH10 6XV1 830–3AH10

11 11 11 11
6 23 6
Figure 3-8 Length of stripped ends for connection to bus connector

(6ES7 972-0B.11...)
2. To open the housing of the bus connector, slacken the securing screws and
lift off the cover.
3. Insert the green and red conductors in the screw terminals as shown in
Fig. 3-9.
Make sure that you always connect the same conductors to the same ter-
minal A or B (e.g. always connect the green conductor to terminal A and
the red conductor to terminal B).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-31
4. Press the cable sheath between the two retainers to hold the cable in posi-
tion.
5. Tighten the screws to secure the conductors in their respective terminals.
Bus cable connection for first Bus cable connection for all
and last stations on the other stations on the bus
bus1
A B A B A B A B
1: The bus cable can be connected to either the left or right set of terminals!
Figure 3-9 Connecting bus cable to bus connectors with order number
6ES7 972-0B.11 ...
6. Screw the housing tight.

Make sure that the naked cable shield is seated under the shield clamp.

3-32 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c

6ES7 972-0BA30 ...
Appearance (6ES7 Fig. 3-10 shows the bus connector with order number 6ES7 972-0BA30 ...:
972-0BA30 ...)
Screws for se-

curing to station 9-pole sub-D connector
for connection to station
Housing screws
Figure 3-10 Appearance of the bus connector with order number 6ES7 972-0BA30 ...
Installing the bus To connect the bus cable to a bus connector with order number
cable 6ES7 972-0BA30 ..., proceed as follows:
1. Strip the ends of the bus cable as shown in Fig. 3-11.
3 27
A
B
29
3 35
A
B
36

(6ES7 972-0BA30 ...)
2. Open the housing of the bus connector by slackening the housing screws
and lifting off the cover.
3. Press the bus cable into the strain relief device. The cable shield must lay
naked on the metal guide.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-33
4. Insert the green and red conductors into the guides through the insulation-
piercing connection devices as shown in Fig. 3-12.
5. Press the red and green conductors gently into the insulation-piercing con-
nection devices with your thumb.
6. Screw the cover on tightly again.
Guides A BA B
Insulation-pierc-
ing connection
devices
Guides
Strain relief de-

vices
Figure 3-12 Connecting bus cable to bus connector (6ES7 972-0BA30 ...)

3-34 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c

6ES7 972-0B.40 ...
Appearance (6ES7 The bus connector with the order number 6ES7 972-0B.40 ... is illustrated
972-0B.40 ...) below:
Screws for secur- 9-pole sub-D male

ing to station adapter for
connection to station
Prog. connector adapter

(6ES7 972-0BB40-0XA0 Housing screws
only)
Figure 3-13 Bus connector with order number 6ES7 972-0B.40 ...
Installing the bus To connect the bus cable to a bus connector with order number
cable 6ES7 972-0B.40 ... proceed as follows:
1. Strip the ends of the cable conductors as shown in Fig. 3-14.
6XV1 830–0AH10
5
A1 B1
16 5

(6ES7 972-0B.40 ...)
2. To open the housing of the bus connector, slacken the securing screws and
lift off the cover.
3. Insert the green and red conductors in the screw terminals as shown in
Fig. 3-15.
4. Press the cable sheath between the two retainers to hold the cable in posi-
tion.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-35
5. Tighten the screws to secure the conductors in their respective terminals.
Bus cable connection for first

and last stations on the bus1
Switch = “ON” (ter-

A B A B
minating resistor
connected)
Cable shield must lie bare

on the metal guide
Bus cable connection for all

other stations on the bus
Switch = “OFF” (ter-

A B A B
minating resistor di-
sconnected)
Cable shield must lie bare

on the metal guide
1: The bus cable must always be connected on the left!
Figure 3-15 Connecting the bus cable to the bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.40 ...)
6. Screw the housing tight.

3-36 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.6 Connecting the bus connector to the module
Connecting the The procedure for connecting the bus connector is as follows:
bus connector
1. Push the bus connector into position on the module adapter.
2. Tighten the screws to secure the connector to the module.
3. If the bus connector is at the start or end of a segment, you must activate
the terminating resistor (set switch to ”ON) (see Fig. 3-16).
You can activate the terminating resistor for bus connectors with order
number 6ES7 972-0B.11-... or 6ES7 972-0B.40-... .
Make sure that the stations with active terminating resistors are always ener-
gized throughout power-up and operation.
Terminating resistor on Terminating resistor on

in circuit off
not in circuit off
Figure 3-16 Bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.11-...): positions of switch for terminating
resistor in circuit or not in circuit
Disconnecting bus If the bus cable is in a loop, you can disconnect bus connectors from the
connectors PROFIBUS-DP interface at any time without interrupting traffic on the bus.
Warning
! Danger of disrupting data traffic on the bus.
Each bus segment must always have a terminating resistor at each end. Note
that this requirement is not satisfied if the last slave with a bus connector is
deenergized. The bus connector receives its power supply through the sta-
tion, so the terminating resistor has no effect if the supply is shut off.
Take care to ensure an uninterrupted power supply to the stations in which
the terminating resistors are in circuit.
Alternatively, you can use the PROFIBUS Terminator as an active bus termi-
nating element (see Section 4.8).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-37
3.7 PNO installation guideline (placeholder)
PNO installation Please comply with the PROFIBUS-DP/FMS Installation Guideline of the
guideline PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganistation (user organization) when using electrical
networks. It describes important measures to be taken as regards the wiring,
cabling and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganisation e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Straße 7
D-76131 Karlsruhe
Tel: ++49 721 / 9658 590
Fax: ++49 721 / 9658 589
Internet: http//www.profibus.com
Guideline order number 2.111

3-38 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.8 PROFIBUS-DP network with fiber-optic cables
Overview Section Topic Page

3.8.1 Fiber-optic cables 3-41
3.8.2 Simplex connectors and connector adapter 3-43
3.8.3 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the PROFIBUS device 3-44
Electrical/optical If you want to use the field bus for larger distances irrespective of the trans-
conversion mission rate, or if the data traffic on the bus is not to be impaired by external
interference fields, use fiber-optic cables rather than copper cables.
There are two ways to convert electrical cables to fiber-optic cables:
PROFIBUS nodes with a PROFIBUS-DP interface (RS 485) are con-
nected to the optical network via an Optical Bus Terminal (OBT) or via
the Optical Link Module (OLM).
PROFIBUS nodes with an integrated fiber-optic cable interface (e.g.
ET 200M (IM 153-2 FO), S7-400 (IM 467 FO)) can be directly integrated
in the optical network.
How to set up optical networks with the Optical Link Module (OLM) is de-
scribed in detail in the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual. You will
find below the most important information on setting up an optical PROFI-
BUS-DP network with PROFIBUS nodes that have an integrated fiber-optic
cable interface.
Benefits and areas Fiber-optic cables have the following advantages over electrical cables:
of application
Electrical isolation of the PROFIBUS-DP components
Insensitivity to electromagnetic interference (EMC)
No electromagnetic emission into the environment
Thus no need for additional grounding and shielding measures
No adherence to minimum clearances from other cables necessary for
EMC
No need for equipotential bonding conductors
No need for lightning conductors
Maximum permissible cable lengths independent of the transmission rate
Easy installation of the fiber-optic cable connections of the PROFIBUS-
DP components by means of standard fiber-optic cable connectors (Sim-
plex connectors)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-39
Optical The optical PROFIBUS-DP network with nodes that have an integrated fiber-
PROFIBUS-DP optic cable interface has a partyline topology. The PROFIBUS nodes are
network in interconnected in pairs by means of Duplex fiber-optic cables.
partyline topology
Up to 32 PROFIBUS nodes with a fiber-optic cable interface can be series-
connected in an optical PROFIBUS-DP network. If a PROFIBUS node fails,
as a result of the partyline topology none of the downstream DP slaves can be
accessed by the DP master.
Programming S7-400 with IM 467 FO ET 200M with Other field devices without
device/PC/OP IM 153-2 FO fiber-optic cable interface
PROFIBUS
cable
Distances between 2 nodes:

Plastic fiber-optic cable up
OBT to 50 m OBT
PCF fiber-optic cable up to
300 m
Other
Optical PROFIBUS-DP nodes
Figure 3-17 Optical PROFIBUS-DP network with nodes that have an integrated fiber-optic cable interface
Transmission rate The following transmission rates are possible when the optical PROFIBUS-
DP network is operated with a partyline topology:
9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 45.45 kbps, 93.75 kbps, 187.5 kbps, 500 kbps, 1.5 Mbps
and 12 Mbps
PROFIBUS Optical A PROFIBUS node can be connected to the optical PROFIBUS-DP network
Bus Terminal via a PROFIBUS Optical Bus Terminal (OBT) (6GK1 500-3AA00) without
(OBT) an integrated fiber-optic cable interface (e.g. programming devices (PGs) or
operator panels (OPs), see Figure 3-17).
The programming device/PC is connected to the RS 485 interface of the OBT
by means of the PROFIBUS cable. The OBT is integrated in the optical
PROFIBUS-DP line by means of its fiber-optic cable interface.

3-40 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
3.8.1 Fiber-optic cables
Features of the Use Siemens plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables with the following features:
fiber-optic cables
Table 3-11 Features of the fiber-optic cables
Description
p SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS
Plastic fiber-optic du- Plastic fiber-optic stan- PCF fiber-optic stan-
plex conductor dard cable dard cable
Standard designation I–VY2P 980/1000 I–VY4Y2P 980/1000 I–VY2K 200/230
150A 60A 10A17+8B20
Area of application Indoors with a low me- Indoors: Indoors:
chanical load, such as Cable lengths up to 50 m Cable lengths up to 300 m
laboratory test assem-
blies or in
cabinets:
Cable lengths up to
50 m
Fiber type Step-index fiber
Core diameter 980 µm 200 µm
Core material Polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) Quartz glass
Cladding outer diameter 1000 µm 230 µm
Cladding material Fluorinated special polymer
Inner sheath
Material PVC PA –
Color Gray Black and orange (Without inner sheath)
Diameter 2.2 " 0.01 mm 2.2 " 0.01 mm
Outer sheath
Material – PVC PVC
Color Purple Purple
Number of fibers 2
Attenuation at v 230 dB/km v 10 dB/km
wavelength 660 nm 660 nm
Cable grip – Kevlar fibers Kevlar fibers
Maximum permissible tensile
force
Short-term v 50 N v 100 N v 500 N
Continuous Not suitable for continu- Not suitable for continu- v 100 N
ous tensile load ous tensile load (At cable grip only,
v 50 N at connector or
single conductor)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-41
Table 3-11 Features of the fiber-optic cables, continued
Description
p SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS
Plastic fiber-optic du- Plastic fiber-optic stan- PCF fiber-optic stan-
plex conductor dard cable dard cable
Resistance to lateral pressure per v 35 N/ 10 cm v 100 N/ 10 cm v 750 N/ 10 cm
10 cm cable length (short-term)
Bend radii
S Single bend (without tensile w 30 mm w 100 mm w 75 mm
force)
S Multiple bends (with tensile w 50 mm w 150 mm w 75 mm
force) (flat side only)
Permissible environmental con-
ditions
S Transport/storage tempera- –30 _C to +70 _C –30 _C to +70 _C –30 _C to +70 _C
ture 0 _C to +50 _C 0 _C to +50 _C –5 _C to +50 _C
S Laying temperature –30 _C to +70 _C –30 _C to +70 _C –20 _C to +70 _C
S Operating temperature
Resistance against
S Mineral oil ASTM no. 2, Conditional2 Conditional1 Conditional1
grease or water
S UV radiation Not UV-resistant Conditional1 Conditional1
Flame retardance Flame retardant in accordance with the VW-1 flame test to UL 1581
External dimensions 2.2 4.4 mm Diameter: Diameter:
" 0.01 mm 7.8 " 0.3 mm 4.7 " 0.3 mm
Weight 7.8 kg/km 65 kg/km 22 kg/km
1 Please ask your Siemens contact about specific applications.
Order numbers You can order the fiber-optic cables specified in Table 3-11 as follows.
Table 3-12 Order numbers – fiber-optic cables
Fiber-optic cables Form Order number

SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic, duplex conductor 50 m ring 6XV1821–2AN50
I–VY2P 980/1000 150A
Plastic fiber-optic cable with 2 conductors and a PVC sheath, without
connectors,
for use in environments with low mechanical stress (e.g. in a cabinet or
for test assemblies in the laboratory)
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic, standard cable Meterware 6XV1821–0AH10
I–VY4Y2P 980/1000 160A 50 m ring 6XV1821–0AN50
Robust round cable with 2 plastic fiber-optic cable conductors, PVC 100 m ring 6XV1821–0AT10
outer sheath and PA inner sheath, without connectors,
for use indoors

3-42 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table 3-12 Order numbers – fiber-optic cables, continued
Fiber-optic cables Form Order number

SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS PCF fiber-optic, standard cable 50 m 6XV1821–1CN50
I–VY2K 200/230 10A17 + 8B20 75 m 6XV1821–1CN75
PCF fiber-optic cable with 2 conductors, PVC outer sheath, fitted with 100 m 6XV1821–1CT10
4 Simplex connectors, whip length 30 cm each, for distances up to 300 m 150 m 6XV1821–1CT15
(Other lengths on request) 200 m 6XV1821–1CT20
250 m 6XV1821–1CT25
300 m 6XV1821–1CT30
3.8.2 Simplex connectors and connector adapter
Definition Simplex connectors allow you to connect the fiber-optic cable to the integra-
ted fiber-optic cable interface on the PROFIBUS device. In some Siemens
modules (e.g. IM 153-2 FO, IM 467 FO) two Simplex connectors (one for the
sender and one for the receiver) are inserted in the module by means of a
special connector adapter.
Prerequisite The PROFIBUS device must be equipped with a fiber-optic cable interface,
such as the ET 200M (IM153-2 FO) or the IM 467 FO for S7-400.
Structure Two Simplex connectors (a sender and a receiver) and a connector adapter
with the following attributes are required for a fiber-optic cable connection:
IP 20 protection
Connector adapter
Receiver
Sender
Simplex Fiber-optic
connectors cables
Figure 3-18 Simplex connectors and a special connector adapter for the IM 153-2 FO
and IM 467 FO (installed)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-43
Order numbers You can order Simplex connectors and connector adapters as follows:
Table 3-13 Order numbers – Simplex connectors and connector adapt-

ers
Accessories Order number

SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic Sim- 6GK1901–0FB00–0AA0
plex connector/polishing set
100 Simplex connectors and 5 polishing sets for fit-
ting SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic
cables with connectors
Connector adapters 6ES7195–1BE00–0XA0
Pack of 50 for fitting plastic Simplex connectors with
the IM 467 FO and the IM 153-2 FO
3.8.3 Connecting a fiber-optic cable to the PROFIBUS device
Cable lengths With fiber-optic cables, the length of the cable segment does not depend on
the transmission rate.
Each bus node in the optical PROFIBUS-DP network has repeater functional-
ity. The distances specified below are the distances between two neighboring
PROFIBUS nodes in the partyline topology.
The maximum cable length between two PROFIBUS nodes depends on the
type of the fiber-optic cable used.
Table 3-14 Permissible cable lengths on the optical PROFIBUS-DP network (party-
line topology)
SIMATIC NET Maximum cable Projected for 1 network

PROFIBUS lengths between two (= 32 nodes) (in m)
fiber-optic cable nodes (in m)
Plastic fiber-optic 50 1,550
duplex conductor
Plastic fiber-optic 50 1,550
standard cable
PCF fiber-optic 300 9,300
standard cable

3-44 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Mixed use of To gain the maximum benefit from the different cable lengths you can mix
plastic fiber-optic the plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables.
and PCF fiber-
For example, you can use plastic fiber-optic cable for connections between
optic cable
DP slaves locally (distances t 50 m) and PCF fiber-optic cable for the con-
nection between the DP master and the first DP slave in the partyline topol-
ogy (distance u 50 m).
Laying PCF fiber- You can order PCF fiber-optic cables fitted with 2x2 connectors in specific
optic cable lengths from Siemens.
Lengths and order numbers: See Table 3-12
Laying plastic You can easily fit connectors to and install plastic fiber-optic cables yourself.
fiber-optic cable Please read the following information on how to do this and on the rules for
laying the cable.
Installation You will find detailed installation instructions and a series of photographs on
instructions for fitting plastic fiber-optic cables with Simplex connectors:
plastic fiber-optic
In the appendix of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual
cable
(with photos) On the Internet
– German: http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/net
– English: http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/net
Click SEARCH on this page, enter the number “574203” under
“Entry-ID” and start the search function.
Enclosed with the Simplex connector/polishing set (see Table 3-13)
Title: Assembly instructions for SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Op-
tics with Simplex connectors
Rules for laying When you lay plastic fiber-optic cable, please adhere to the following rules:
cable
Use only the Siemens fiber-optic cables specified in Section 3.8.1
Never exceed the maximum permissible stresses (tensile load, crushing,
etc.) of the cable you are using specified in Table 3-11. Impermissible
crushing can occur, for example, when screw clamps are used to fix the
cable in place.
Follow the steps specified in the installation instructions, and use only the
tools specified there. Grind and polish the fiber ends carefully.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 3-45
Note
Polishing the fiber ends of the fiber-optic cable, as described in the installa-
tion instructions, reduces attenuation by 2 dB.
Grind and polish by pressing the connector only lightly against the abra-
sive paper or polishing foil in order to prevent the connector fusing with
the fiber.
Ensure that you maintain the bend radii specified in Table 3-11 during
grinding and polishing, particularly when cables are supported for me-
chanical strain relief. In this case, ensure an adequate whip length.
Ensure that there are no loops when cables are cut to length. Under tensile
load, loops can cause kinks to form in the cable and thus damage it.
Ensure that the outer and conductor sheathing of the cable and the fibers
are not damaged. Scoring and scratches can let light escape and thus lead
to higher attenuation values and line failure.
Never insert dirty connectors or connectors with protruding fibers in the
device sockets. This can destroy the optical sending and receiving ele-
ments.
Installing the The installation of the cut fiber-optic cable with connector on the PROFIBUS
connector adapter devices is module-specific, and it is therefore described in the manual for the
PROFIBUS device with an integrated fiber-optic cable interface.

3-46 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
RS 485 repeaters: installing, connecting
and operating 4
Section Topic Page

4.1 Scope of application of the RS 485 repeater 4-2
4.2 Mechnical design of the RS 485 repeater 4-3
4.3 Configuration options with the RS 485 repeater 4-6
4.4 Installing and removing the RS 485 repeater 4-8
4.5 Non-grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater 4-10
4.6 Connecting the power supply 4-11
4.7 Connecting the bus cable 4-12
4.8 PROFIBUS Terminator 4-13
Goal After reading this chapter, you will be able to identify the situations in which
you must use the RS 485 repeater.
You will also be able to install and use the RS 485 repeaters with order num-
ber 6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-1
RS 485 repeaters: installing, connecting and operating
4.1 The RS 485 repeater: scope of application
What is an RS 485 An RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and is the link be-
repeater? tween individual bus segments.
Using the RS 485 You must use an RS 485 repeater, if:

repeater
you want to connect more than 32 stations to the bus,
you want to operate bus segments as non-grounded segments, or
a segment exceeds the maximum permissible cable length (see Table 4-1).
Table 4-1 Maximum cable length of a segment
Baud rate Max. cable length of a segment (in meters)

9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 1,000
500 kbaud 400
1.5 Mbaud 200
3 to 12 Mbaud 100
Rules When you set up a bus with RS 485 repeaters, the following rules apply:
You cannot connect more than nine RS 485 repeaters in a cascade.
If you use RS 485 repeaters the maximum cable length between two
nodes is subject to the limits stated in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Maximum cable length between two stations
Baud rate Max. cable length between 2 stations (in meters)

with RS 485 repeaters
9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 10,000
500 kbaud 4,000
1.5 Mbaud 2,000
3 to 12 Mbaud 1,000

4-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
4.2 Mechanical design of the RS 485 repeater
Mechanical design Table 4-3 shows the RS 485 repeater.
Table 4-3 Description and functions of the RS 485 repeater
Appearance of the repeater No. Function

À Terminal for power supply to the RS 485 repeater (pin M5.2 is the
ground reference for measuring the voltage transient between A2 and
À
DC
10 24 V L+ M PE M 5.2
B2).
Á Á Shield clamp for strain relief and grounding the bus cable of bus seg-
ment 1 or bus segment 2
Â Â Terminals for bus cable of bus segment 1

A1 B1 A1 B1 Ã Terminating resistor for bus segment 1
ON
Ã Ä Switch for OFF operating status
11 (= separating bus segments, e.g. for commissioning)
Ä
DP1
È PG
OFF
Å Terminating resistor for bus segment 2
OP 12
DP2
Å Æ Terminals for bus cable of bus segment 2
ON
SIEMENS Ç Locking mechanism for installing/removing the RS 485 repeater on/
RS 485-REPEATER
A2 B2 A2 B2 from the DIN rail
Æ
È Interface for the programming device (PG)/operator panel (OP) on bus
segment 1
Á
10 24V power supply LED
Ç 11 LED for bus segment 1
12 LED for bus segment 2
Note
Terminal M5.2 of the power supply (see Table 4-3, No. À) serves as a
ground reference for signal measurements in the event of a fault and must
not be wired.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-3
Technical data The table below shows the technical data of the RS 485 repeater:
Table 4-4 Technical data of the RS 485 repeater
Technical data
Power supply
Rated voltage
g 24 V DC
Ripple (static limit) 20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC
Current consumption at rated voltage
No consumer via
i programmer/OP
/O interface
i f 200 mA
A
Consumer via programmer/OP interface (5 V/90 mA) 230 mA
Consumer via programmer/OP interface 300 mA
(24 V/100 mA)
Galvanic isolation yes, AC 500 V
Connection of wave guides yes, via repeater adapters
Redundancy no
Transmission rate (detected automatically by the repeater) 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud,
45.45 kbaud,
93.75 kbaud,
187.5 kbaud, 500 kbaud,
1.5 Mbaud, 3 Mbaud,
6 Mbaud, 12 Mbaud
Degree of protection IP 20
Dimensions W H D (in mm) 45 128 67
Weight (including packaging) 350 g
Pin assignment of The pin assignment of the 9-pin sub-D adapter is as follows:
the sub-D adapter
(programmer/OP
Table 4-5 Pin assignment of the 9-pin sub-D adapter (programmer/OP interface)
interface)
1 – –
2 M24V Ground 24 V
5
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
9
8
3 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from station)
7
6
7 P24V 24 V
1
9 – –

4-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Block diagram Fig. 4-1 is a block diagram of the RS 485 repeater:

Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated.
Bus segment 2 and the programmer/OP interface are galvanically iso-
lated.
Signals are amplified
– between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2
– between programmer/OP interface and bus segment 2
Segment 1 Segment 2
A1 A2
Logic
B1 B2
A1 A2
B1 B2
program-
mer/OP- 5V 1M 5V 1M
interface
24V 24V
L+ (24 V) L+ (24 V)
M M
A1
B1 PE
5V M 5.2
M5 V
Figure 4-1 Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-5
4.3 Configuration options with the RS 485 repeater
Overview This section discusses the configuration options offered by the RS 485 re-
peater:
Segment 1 and segment 2 terminating at the RS 485 repeater
Segment 1 terminating at the RS 485 repeater and segment 2 looped
through the RS 485 repeater,
and
Segment 1 and segment 2 looped through the RS 485 repeater.
Terminating Fig. 4-2 shows the position of the selector switch for the terminating resistor:
resistor ON
(in circuit) or OFF
(not in circuit) Terminating resistor Terminating resistor
in circuit: not in circuit:
Figure 4-2 Setting of the terminating resistor
Segment 1 and 2 Fig. 4-3 shows the RS 485 repeater used to terminate two segments:
terminated
Segment 1
Segment 1 Terminating resistor
bus segment 1
on
R Segment 2
Terminating resistor
bus segment 2
on
Segment 2
Figure 4-3 Two bus segments connected to the RS 485 repeater (1)

4-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Segment 1 In Fig. 4-4, one of the two segments connected to the RS 485 repeater is
terminated, looped through and one is terminated:
segment 2 looped
through
Segment 1 Segment 1
bus segment 1
on
Segment 2
bus segment 2
off
Segment 2
Segments 1 and 2 In Fig. 4-5, both segments connected to the RS 485 repeater are looped
looped through through:
Segment 1
Segment 1 Terminating resistor
bus segment 1
off
R
bus segment 2
Bus segment 2
off
Segment 2 off!
Segment 2

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-7
4.4 Installing and removing the RS 485 repeater
Overview You can install the RS 485 repeater:

on a special busbar for S7-300
or
on a standard-section busbar (order number 6ES5 710-8MA..)
Installation on If you want to mount the RS 485 repeater on a special busbar for S7-300, you
busbar for S7-300 must first remove the clamp at the rear of the RS 485 repeater (see Fig. 4-6):
1. Insert the blade of a screwdriver under the lip of the latch (1) and
2. press the handle of the screwdriver toward the rear of the module (2).
Hold the screwdriver in this position.
Result: This releases the clamp from the RS 485 repeater.
3. Using your free hand, slip the clamp up as far as it will go (3) and disen-
gage it from the module.
Result: The clamp is released from the RS 485 repeater.
4. Place the RS 485 repeater in position on the busbar for S7-300 (4).
5. Push the bottom back as far as it will go (5).
6. Tighten the securing screw to between 80 and 110 Ncm (6).
Rear: Front:
4
2
1
6 80 to 110 Ncm
Figure 4-6 Mounting the RS 485 repeater on the busbar for S7-300

4-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Releasing from To release the RS 485 repeater from a busbar for S7-300:
busbar for S7-300
1. Release the screw securing the RS 485 repeater (1) and
2. swing the RS 485 repeater up and away from the busbar (2).
1 2
Figure 4-7 Removing the RS 485 repeater from the busbar for S7-300
Installation on If you want to mount the RS 485 repeater on a standard-section busbar, make
standard-section sure that the clamp is in position on the rear of the RS 485 repeater:
busbar
1. Engage the RS 485 repeater on the standard-section busbar and
2. push it back until the clamp engages.
Releasing from To disengage the RS 485 repeater from the standard-section busbar:
standard-section
1. Using a screwdriver, press the clamp at the bottom of the RS 485 repeater
busbar
down and
2. swing the RS 485 repeater up and away from the busbar.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-9
4.5 Non-grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater
Non-grounded Non-grounded operation means that ground and PE are not connected.
operation
If you use the RS 485 repeater in non-grounded mode, the bus segments can
operate with potential isolation.
The way in which the RS 485 repeater influences potential on bus segments
is illustrated in Fig. 4-8.
Signals non-grounded
Signals grounded
Figure 4-8 ET 200 bus segments operating as non-grounded segments
Installing RS 485 To ensure non-grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, ensure that the
repeater for non- power supply to this repeater is also non-grounded.
grounded
operation

4-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
4.6 Connecting the voltage supply
Cable type For the 24 V DC voltage supply, use flexible cables with a cross-section from
0.25 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 26 to 14).
Rules for routing See section 3.1 for details on cable routing (DC voltage 60 V, unshielded).
cables
Connecting the To connect the power supply of the RS 485 repeater:

power supply
1. Strip the ends of the 24 V DC cable conductors.
2. Connect the cable to the terminals marked ”L+”, ”M” and ”PE”.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-11
4.7 Connecting the bus cable
Cable type The PROFIBUS bus cable must satisfy the requirements laid down in sec-
tion 3.5.
Connecting the Connect the PROFIBUS bus cable to the RS 485 repeater as follows:
PROFIBUS bus
1. Cut the PROFIBUS bus cable to length.
cable
2. Strip the ends of the PROFIBUS bus cable as shown in Fig. 4-9.
Fold back the braided shield over the end of the cable sheath. This is nec-
essary to ensure that the shield clamp can function as strain relief and as a
terminal for the shield.
6XV1 830–0AH10 (bus cable, solid) 6XV1 830–3AH10 (buried cable)

6XV1 830–3BH10 (drum cable)
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
8.5 16 10 16 16 10
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
8.5
Braided shield must be folded back
Figure 4-9 Length of stripped ends for connection to RS 485 repeater
3. Connect the PROFIBUS bus cable to the RS 485 repeater:

Connect the same conductor (green/red for PROFIBUS bus cable) to the
same connections, A or B (e.g., always connect the green conductor to
terminal A and the red conductor to terminal B).
4. Tighten the shield clamps so that the naked shield is held firmly by the
clamp.

4-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
4.8 PROFIBUS Terminator
What is a The PROFIBUS Terminator forms an active bus terminating element. The
PROFIBUS essential benefit is that bus nodes can be disconnected, removed or replaced
Terminator? without data transfer being impaired. This applies particularly to the bus no-
des at both ends of the bus cable, at which the terminating resistors have had
to be connected and supplied up to now. The PROFIBUS Terminator can be
installed on a DIN rail.
Order number 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0
Appearance of the Table 4-6 shows the appearance of the PROFIBUS Terminator:
PROFIBUS
Terminator
Table 4-6 Description and functions of the PROFIBUS Terminator
Appearance of the PROFIBUS Terminator No. Function
SIEMENS 24 V power supply LED
PROFIBUS Connection for 24 V DC power supply

TERMINATOR
1 DC
24 V PROFIBUS connection
2 L+ M PE A1 B1 3
Shield clamp for grounding the shield braid and for strain
4
relief on the bus cable
6
Grounding screw
972 0DA00 0AA0
6ES7 972–0DA00–0AA0
Shield clamp for strain relief on the cable for the power
supply
5

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-13
Technical Table 4-7 shows the technical specifications of the PROFIBUS Terminator:
specifications
Table 4-7 Technical specifications of the PROFIBUS Terminator
Technical specifications
Power supply
Rated voltage
g 24 V DC
Ripple (static limit) 20.4 V DC to 28.8 V DC
P
Power consumption
ti att rated
t d voltage
lt max. 25 mA
A
Isolation Yes, 600 V DC

Transmission rate 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps
Degree of protection IP 20
Permissible ambient temperature 0° C to 60° C
Storage temperature – 40° C to +70° C
Connectable cables; power supply Screw type;

Flexible cables
– With wire end ferrule 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
– Without wire end ferrule 0.14 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
Rigid cables 0.14 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
Connectable cables; PROFIBUS Screw type; all
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS
cables
Dimensions W H D (in mm) 60 70 43
Weight (incl. packaging) 95 g

4-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Cable type The PROFIBUS bus cable must meet the requirements specified in Sec-
tion 3.5.
Connecting a Connect the PROFIBUS bus cable to the PROFIBUS Terminator as follows:
PROFIBUS bus
1. Cut the PROFIBUS bus cable to the required length.
cable
2. Strip the insulation from the PROFIBUS bus cable as in Figure 4-10.
The shield braid must be folded back on the cable. If it is not, the shield
point cannot subsequently be used for the purpose of strain relief or
grounding the shield braid.
6XV1 830–0AH10 (rigid bus cable) 6XV1 830–3AH10 (direct–buried cable)

6XV1 830–3BH10 (drum cable)
ÇÇ ÇÇ
8.5 16 10 16 16 10
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
8.5
Shield braid must be folded back!
Figure 4-10 Stripping lengths for connection to the PROFIBUS Terminator
3. Connect the PROFIBUS bus cable to the PROFIBUS Terminator:

Connect the same conductors (green/red for PROFIBUS bus cable) to the
same connection A or B (thus, always connect connection A to green wire
and connection B to red wire, for example).
4. Tighten the shield clamps so that the bare shield has contact under the
shield clamp.
Note
Ensure when installing that no terminating resistor is connected to the bus
connectors when the PROFIBUS bus system has 2 active PROFIBUS Termi-
nators.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 4-15

4-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
IM 308-C master interface and
memory card – structure and functioning 5
In this chapter In this chapter you will find all the information you need on:
Section Topic Page

5.1 Design and function of the IM 308-C 5-2
5.2 Technical data of the IM 308-C 5-7
5.3 How to install the IM 308-C 5-9
5.4 How to install the memory card 5-11
5.5 Upgrading the IM 308-C operating system from memory card 5-12
5.6 IM 308-C as DP slave 5-14
Goal After reading this chapter, you will know what to bear in mind when instal-
ling the IM 308-C.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-1
IM 308-C master interface and memory card
5.1 Function and appearance of the IM 308-C
Purpose of the The IM 308-C enables you to connect the distributed I/O stations to the
IM 308-C S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers via the PROFI-
BUS-DP bus.
Appearance of the The IM 308-C is shown below:

IM 308-C
Backplane connector X1
Memory card
Jumper X9
FLASH
X9
1
Mode switch se-
lector
RN
ST
OFF
RN Backplane connector X2
OF
BF
LEDs IF
PROFIBUS-DP Jumper X10

interface (X3)
X10
Figure 5-1 IM 308-C master interface

5-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Controls and The controls and features of the master interface are as follows:
features
Table 5-1 Controls and features of the IM 308-C master interface
Designation Function
Backplane con- Backplane connectors X1 and X2 enable communication between the IM 308-C
nectors X1 and X2 and the CPU via the S5 I/O bus.
Memory card All important configuration data for the IM 308-C and the bus layout is stored on
the memory card.
Mode selector The mode selector switch is a three-position switch:
switch
it h
IM 308-C as DP master: IM 308-C as DP slave:
RN (RUN): normal operation; RN (RUN): normal operation; IM 308-C is
IM 308-C reads the inputs of the DP slave and exchanges data with the DP
slaves and sets the outputs. master.
ST (STOP): IM 308-C does not ST (STOP) or OFF:
exchange data with the slaves; it
IM 308-C is DP slave and does not exchange
may, however, receive the token
data with the DP master. No exchange of data
(send authorization) from
between the IM 308-C/DP slave and the slave
another master on the bus and
CPU.
pass on the token.
D di on parameterization
Depending t i ti withith COM
OFF: IM 308-C does not ex-
PROFIBUS, QVZ or PEU is reported to the
change data with the slaves and
master CPU.
cannot receive the token (send
authorization) from another Bit 0, station status 1, is set;
master on the bus.
LEDs The meanings of the LEDs are shown in Tables 5-2 and 5.3.
PROFIBUS-DP The bus connectors of the field bus connect to the IM 308-C via the
interface (X3) PROFIBUS-DP.
Jumper X10 PROFIBUS-DP grounded or not grounded (see section 5.3)
Jumper X9 PEU signal switched (power fail in expansion unit) (see section 5.2)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-3
Meaning of ”BF” The ”BF” LED indicates bus-fault messages. It can indicate the following:
Table 5-2 Meanings of ”BF” LED on the IM 308-C master interface
BF Meaning Remedy
Off Data exchanged with all –
parameterized slaves
On Bus fault 1 Check:
(physical fault) whether there is a short-circuit on the data
lines of the PROFIBUS (A and B)
the parameters set with COM PROFIBUS
(different baud rates)
whether the DP master receives the token
(HSA not correct in the bus parameters; the
HSA is lower than the PROFIBUS address
of the DP master)
Flashes No exchange of data with Check whether the bus cable is connected to the
at least one slave which IM 308-C.
is assigned to an Wait until the IM 308-C has powered up. If the
IM 308-C as DP master LED does not cease flashing, check the DP
slaves or interpret the diagnostics report for the
DP slaves.
Only if IM 308-C is DP slave: check whether the
DP master addresses the IM 308-C/DP slave.
1: During power-up, the ”RN”, ”OF” and ”IF” LEDs light up along with the ”BF” LED
for approx. 0.5 seconds.

5-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Meaning of ”RN”, The meanings of the LEDs RN (= RUN), OF (= OFF) and IF (= IM FAULT)
”OF” and ”IF” are as follows:
Table 5-3 Meanings of the LEDs on the IM 308-C master interface
RN OF IF Meaning Remedy
On On On IM 308-C is powering up (”BF” LED on). –
On Off Off IM 308-C as DP master: Status is RUN: –
IM 308-C reads the slave inputs and sets the outputs.
The IM 308-C can receive the token from another mas-
ter and pass it on.
IM 308-C as DP slave: normal operation; IM 308-C as
DP slave exchanges data with the DP master.
Flashes Off Off IM 308-C as DP master: IM 308-C parameterizes all –
slaves on the bus and checks their addressability.
Status is CLEAR:
Afterwards, the IM 308-C reads the inputs but sets all
outputs to ”0”. The IM 308-C can receive the token
from another master and pass it on.
IM 308-C as DP slave: CPU outputs BASP; bit 7, byte –
7 of the slave diagnostics is set.
Off Flashes Off IM 308-C as DP master: Status is STOP: –
IM 308-C does not exchange data with the slaves.
The IM 308-C can receive the token from another mas-
ter and pass it on.
IM 308-C as DP slave: IM 308-C as DP does not ex-
change data with the DP master.
Depending on parameterization with
COM PROFIBUS, QVZ, PEU or no error is reported at
the slave CPU and the master CPU.
Bit 0, station status 1, is set.
Off On Off IM 308-C as DP master: Status is OFF: –
IM 308-C does not exchange data with the slaves and
can neither receive nor pass on the token.
IM 308-C as DP slave: IM 308-C as DP slave does not –
exchange data with the DP master.
No exchange of data between the IM 308-C/DP slave
and the slave CPU

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-5
Table 5-3 Meanings of the LEDs on the IM 308-C master interface, continued
RN OF IF Meaning Remedy
Off Off On No memory card or wrong memory card inserted, or Insert a memory card with
the correct order number.
Read the notes in sec-
tion 5.4.
There is no master system on the memory card that was Delete the memory card
exported with COM PROFIBUS, or with COM PROFIBUS by
means of Service Delete
memory card.
Fault in the IM 308-C. Withdraw and reinsert the
IM 308-C. If the fault per-
sists, replace the module or
contact Siemens Support.
On Off On Empty memory card in the IM 308-C, or Check the memory card.
IM 308-C waiting for a master system to be exported
from COM PROFIBUS, or
Master system is being exported to IM 308-C from
COM PROFIBUS.
Off On On IM 308-C waiting for master system exported from –
COM PROFIBUS to be activated
(Service Activate parameters).
Flashes Flashes Off Operating system is being loaded from memory card. –
On On Off Operating system has been loaded from memory card. –
On On Flashes An error has occurred in importing the operating sys- Repeat the import proce-
tem from memory card. dure.
Check that the correct
memory card is inserted.

5-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
5.2 Technical data of the IM 308-C
Block diagram Fig. 5-2 is a block diagram of the IM 308-C:
Memory card
5V X1
GND
RUN
Logic
STOP
PEU OFF
RUN
X2 TxD RxD OFF
BUS-FAULT
5V Isolation
IM-FAULT
GND
X3
5V
b18 1
GND
2 X9 1 B
z14 3 2 A
z18 X10 3
CPKLA
PE
PE
Figure 5-2 Block diagram of the IM 308-C

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-7
Technical data The table below contains the technical data of the IM 308-C.
Table 5-4 Technical data of the IM 308-C
Technical data
Rated voltage 5 V (via S5 I/O bus)
Current consumption (at 5 V) 0.7 A (typ. 0.4 A)
Output voltage X3 (external power source) 5 V / 90 mA (bus connector)
Voltage isolation yes, between logic and PROFIBUS-DP
Jumper X10 see section 5.3
in position
p 1-2 PROFIBUS-DP interface grounded
g
in position 2-3 (normal operation) PROFIBUS-DP interface not grounded
Jumper X9 Switches over ”PEU signal
in position 1-2 (normal operation) ”PEU” signal at pin X2/B18
in position 2-3 ”PEU” signal at pin X2/Z14
Status indicators RUN: green LED
OF: red LED
Diagnostic functions BF (bus fault): red LED
IF (IM fault): red LED
Heat loss typ. 2.5 W
Dimensions W H D (in
( mm)) 20 243.4 173
Weight with memory card and boxed approx. 350 g

5-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
5.3 Installing the IM 308-C
Setting the You must set jumper X10 on the IM 308-C. Jumper X10 enables you to con-
jumpers figure bus segments in such a way that they are not grounded:
If you want to operate the PROFIBUS-DP as grounded, set the jumper to
position ”1-2”.
If you want to operate the PROFIBUS-DP as non-grounded, set the
jumper to position ”2-3”.
Slots in the The tables below show you where to insert the IM 308-C in the rack. The
S5-115U system gray hatching indicates the slots in which you can insert the IM 308-C.
Table 5-5 Slots in the S5-115U system, CR 700-0 module rack
CR 700-0 module rack:

PS CPU 0 1 2 3 IM
Table 5-6 Slots in the S5-115U system

PS CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 IM

PS CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 IM

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-9
Slots in the The tables below show you where to insert the IM 308-C in the S5-135U and
S5-135U and S5-155U systems. The gray hatching indicates the slots where you can insert
S5-155U the IM 308-C.
Table 5-7 Slots in the S5-135U/S5-155U system
S5-135U programmable controller:

3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 67 75 83 91 99 107 115 123 131 139 147 155 163
S5-155U programmable controller:

3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 67 75 83 91 99 107 115 123 131 139 147 155 163
S5-135U/155U programmable controller:

3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 67 75 83 91 99 107 115 123 131 139 147 155 163

5-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
5.4 Installing the memory card
Purpose of the The memory card is used to store the following data:
memory card
Configuration data generated with COM PROFIBUS,
or
The operating system to be imported to the IM 308-C.
Changing the If you want to change the memory card, proceed as follows:
memory card
1. Set the mode selector switch on the IM 308-C to ”ST”or ”OFF”
2. Switch off the power supply to the IM 308-C.
3. Pull the memory card.
4. Insert the new memory card.
5. Switch on the power supply to the IM 308-C.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-11
5.5 Loading the operating system of the IM 308-C

from the memory card
Usage You only need to load a new operating system on the IM 308-C if you are
working with COM PROFIBUS version 3.3 or lower and have installed a
new version of COM PROFIBUS.
The operating system of the IM 308-C is stored in the ”\BESY308C” direc-
tory in COM PROFIBUS.
If you need to upgrade the operating system of the IM 308-C, you can refer
to Siemens Information ”Kunden aktuell” for further details. If in doubt,
please consult Siemens Support.
Exception Since the IM 308-C release 3 is not hardware-compatible with release 2, and
release 6 is not hardware-compatible with release 5, the IM 308-C of these
releases can only be upgraded with the assistance of Siemens Support. You
cannot upgrade to release 3 or release 6 by loading the new operating system
from memory card.
Loading the If you want to load the operating system of the IM 308-C from memory card,
operating system proceed as follows (all order numbers are listed in Appendix G):
of the IM 308-C
1. Insert the memory card
from memory card
– in the memory-card interface of the programmer, or;
– in the E(E)PROM slot of the programmer with the associated pro-
gramming adapter, or
– in the external programmer connected to your PC.
2. Using the commands FileExport Operating system file, export the
operating system file to a memory card.
3. Select the operating system file (extension is .LFW) and confirm your
choice by answering the query with ”OK”.
Result: COM PROFIBUS exports the operating system for the IM 308-C
to the memory card.
4. Insert the memory card into the IM 308-C.
5. Set the IM 308-C to the ”OFF” position.
6. Switch on the power supply for the IM 308-C.
Result: The IM 308-C indicates the operating system version (on
IM 308-C and memory card) by means of LEDs (see below, Table 5-8).
7. Set the IM 308-C mode selector switch to RN.
Result: The IM 308-C automatically loads the operating system from the
memory card. The ”RN” and ”OF” LEDs flash.

5-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
8. Wait until the ”RN” and ”OF” remain on for at least 5 seconds. The oper-
ating system has now been loaded.
If the ”IF” LED lights up in this process, an error has occurred in loading.
Repeat the entire procedure once, and check that the correct memory card
is inserted.
Code for Before the IM 308-C operating system is loaded from the memory card, the
operating-system four LEDs on the IM 308-C output a flashing BCD code which indicates the
version current statuses of the operating system on the IM 308-C and on the memory
card.
You can call up the code indicating which version of the operating system is
currently available on the IM 308-C (see steps 1 through 6, Table 5-8), when
the mode selector switch of the IM 308-C is in the ”OFF” position and you
switch on the power supply.
The operating system version is not indicated if there is an empty memory
card in the IM 308-C.
Table 5-8 Flashing code output by LEDs on IM 308-C when the operating system
is loaded from memory card
RN 23 V x.y
OF 22
BF 21
IF 20 Version Release
Step LED sequence Duration
1 3 in sequence from bottom to top 3s
2 all LEDs are off 1s
3 BCD code indicating the current operating-system 4s
version of the IM 308-C
5 BCD code indicating the current operating system 4s
release of the IM 308-C
7 3 from top to bottom in sequence 3s
9 BCD code indicating the operating-system version on 4s
the memory card
11 BCD code indicating the operating-system release on 4s
the memory card

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-13
5.6 IM 308-C as DP slave
In this section Section 5.6 summarizes everything you need to know about operating the
IM 308-C as DP slave.
The function of the mode selector switch and the meanings of the indicators
are discussed above, in section 5.1.
IM 308-C as DP You use the IM 308-C as a DP slave for fast data interchange between two
slave programmable controllers. The module functions as a high-speed I/O link
between the two programmable controllers.
Method of Fig. 5-3 illustrates the method of operation of the IM 308-C when it is used
operation as a DP slave.
The DP master sends outputs to the IM 308-C as DP slave. The DP slave
treats these outputs as inputs (DP slave inputs).
The IM 308-C as DP slave sends the CPU outputs to the DP master (DP
slave outputs). The DP master treats the DP slave outputs as inputs.
You define the addresses and the scope of the DP slave inputs and outputs
with COM PROFIBUS (see section G.8.8).
IM 308-C/
CPU DP master DP slave CPU
Inputs Inputs
Outputs Outputs
Figure 5-3 Method of operation, IM 308-C as DP slave

5-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Characteristics The characteristics of the IM 308-C as a DP slave are as follows:

For each IM 308-C as DP slave, you can process up to 244 bytes of inputs
and up to 244 bytes of outputs. You can find the maximum consistent data
length for the IM 308-C as a DP slave in Table 6-1 in section 6.1.
The same IM 308-C can be operated as:
– DP master
– DP slave
– DP master and DP slave (precondition: there must be at least two DP
masters on the bus)
Using COM PROFIBUS, you can set a response monitoring time.
Preconditions If you want to use the IM 308-C as a DP slave, you require COM PROFIBUS
version 2.0 or later and an IM 308-C release 3 or higher. The IM 308-C run-
ning as DP slave requires a memory card containing parameters set with
COM PROFIBUS.
Restrictions You need a memory card in order to operate the IM 308-C as DP slave, so the
following restrictions apply:
The PROFIBUS address of the IM 308-C as DP slave is set by means of
the memory card.
The baud rate is set by means of the memory card and is invariable, i.e.
unlike other DP slaves the IM 308-C does not auto-detect the baud rate.
The IM 308-C as DP slave cannot process the FREEZE and SYNC con-
trol commands.
The slave CPU cannot read the slave diagnostics.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 5-15
Structure of slave The structure of the slave diagnostics (bytes 0 to 5) is described in

diagnostics section 6.4. You can read the slave diagnostics via the DP master. The struc-
ture of the device-specific diagnostics of the IM 308-C as DP slave is as fol-
lows:
7 0 Bit No.
Byte 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Length of device-specific diagnostics

incl. byte 6 (= 3 bytes)
Code for device-specific diagnostics (see section 6.4)
7
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: CPU outputs BASP (disable command output)
Byte 8 00H: reserved
Figure 5-4 Structure of device-specific diagnostics of the IM 308-C as DP slave
Response If the IM 308-C as DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP master and

monitoring ”Response monitoring = YES” is configured in COM PROFIBUS, the
IM 308-C goes to STOP when the response monitoring time elapses. Inputs
of the IM 308-C as DP slave are set to ”0”.

5-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
IM 308-C – addressing, access to the
distributed I/Os and diagnostics with
STEP 5 6
Section Topic Page

6.1 Addressing 6-2
6.2 Diagnostics with STEP 5 6-13
6.3 Reading master diagnostics 6-14
6.4 Reading slave diagnostics 6-17
6.5 Sending the FREEZE and SYNC control commands 6-23
6.6 Assigning PROFIBUS addresses with FB IM308C 6-24
6.7 Addressing ET 200 in multimaster and/or multiprocessor mode 6-26
Goal After reading this chapter, you will be in possession of all the information
you need in order to write the STEP 5 application program.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-1
IM 308-C – addressing, access to the distributed I/Os and diagnostics with STEP 5
6.1 Addressing
In this section Section 6.1 contains information on the following:
Section Topic Page

6.1.1 Linear addressing 6-6
6.1.2 Page addressing 6-8
6.1.3 Addressing via the FB IM308C (FB 192) function block 6-11
6.1.4 Access commands for distributed I/O 6-12
Configuration of The CPUs of the S5-135U and S5-155U series require you to generate a
the DB 1 DB 1 if you access consistent data areas in the P area. The rules governing
entries in the DB 1 are as follows:
CPU Entries under ”Digital inputs / Example

digital outputs”
CPU 922 decrementing 20, 19, 18, 5, 4
CPU 928 (A/B) incrementing 4, 5, 18, 19, 20
CPU 946/947 decrementing 20, 19, 18, 5, 4
CPU 948 decrementing 20, 19, 18, 5, 4
Data consistency The table below shows the maximum data lengths for which data consistency
and the IM 308-C is still guaranteed, depending on the addressing mode:
Without consistency: ”byte” format and ”no module consistency”
With consistency: ”word” format and ”no module consistency” or ”byte”
or ”word” format and ”module consistency”
Table 6-1 Maximum data lengths and consistent areas in bytes for the IM 308-C
Without consistency With consistency

Inputs Outputs Inputs and outputs
Overall data length (in 122 122 244 122 122
bytes) 244 244
Maximum consistent 1 1 1 1 16 1
area of an ID (in bytes) 16
Possible addressing P area DP window P area P area DP window DP window
modes Q area Q area Q area
DP window DP window DP window

6-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
CPU 944 and The warning below applies to the use of the FB 250 and 251 function blocks
FB 250 and 251 and the CPU 944 in conjunction with ET 200:
Warning
!
There is a possibility of outputs of the distributed I/O being inadvertently
reset.
The FB 250 and 251 function blocks with the CPU do not comply with the
specified sequence for accessing the distributed I/O. This can cause an inter-
ruption in data traffic on the PROFIBUS-DP bus and a reset of the slave out-
puts. The IM 308-C may stop processing and the inputs/outputs are not up-
dated.
To avoid this difficulty, do not use the FB 250 and 251 function blocks with
the CPU 944 in the ET 200 distributed I/O system.
Address space By default, the IM 308-C uses the address space (F)F800H to (F)F9FFH for
used by IM 308-C addressing the distributed I/O. This address space is also required if you use
only linear or page addressing.
Caution
! Danger of double addressing!
The IM 308-C uses fully one or more of the address areas shown in
Table 6-2 under DP window (default: (F)F800H to (F)F9FFH).
No part of these address areas may be used by other modules such as CPs,
IPs in the CP area, central I/O in the IM3/IM4 area or the WF 470 position-
sensing module in the central programmable controller.
Address space Please note the following points if you are using the ASM 401 module:
used by ASM 401
Caution
Double addressing is allowed.
!
The ASM 401 module uses the entire page address range from (F)F400H to
(F)FBFFH and therefore accesses the two DP windows (F)F800H to (F)F9FF-
H (default) and (F)FA00H to (F)FBFFH.
If you use the ASM 401 module, you should set the DP address to (F)FC00H
for the CPUs in the S5-115U series and to (F)FE00H for the CPUs in the
S5-135U and S5-155U series.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-3
RESTART The ”RESTART” mode is not allowed for the CPUs in the S5-135U and
S5-155U series!
QVZ during data If ”QVZ” occurs during a consistent data access, the data preceding this QVZ
access must not be interpreted. It will be inconsistent in relation to any data which is
read after the QVZ.
Alarm processing If you access a consistent data area, you must disable the process alarms be-
forehand with the ”AS” command and then enable them again after the data
access.
Addressing in The 13300 bytes used for addressing in the DP window represent the maxi-
DP window mum addressing volume – even if you use linear and page addressing in par-
allel. The maximum addressing volume depends on:
the number of bytes required per slave for inputs, outputs and diagnostics
data (rounded up to an even length), and
the configured data consistency. If the consistency is 16 bytes, you
must also add on the data length (rounded up to an even value) for each
consistent ID and for each data-transfer direction (inputs/outputs).

6-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Options for Your options for addressing the distributed I/O system are as follows:
addressing
linear addressing (P and Q areas)
page addressing (P and Q areas)
or
function block FB IM308C (FB 192) in the DP window.
Table 6-2 shows the inputs and outputs at your disposal and the applicable
modes of addressing.
Table 6-2 Modes of addressing with the IM 308-C as DP master
Addressing Address Access Page selec- Max. Restrictions

range1 through ... tion address inputs / outputs
Linear (F)F000H to PY 0 to – 256 bytes for inputs / If an output can be ad-
P area (F)F0FFH PY 255 256 bytes for outputs dressed in linear mode,, it
cannott be
b addressed
dd d
Linear (F)F100H to QB 0 to – 256 bytes for inputs /
through the FB IM308C.
Q area (F)F1FFH QB 255 256 bytes for outputs
P page (F)F0C0H to PY 192 to PY 255 / per IM 308-C: If an output is addressed
(F)F0FEH PY 254 (F)F0FF 16 pages, 63 bytes = through pages, it cannot
1,008 bytes for inputs / be addressed through the
1,008 bytes for outputs FB IM308C. PROFIBUS
max. 16 IM 308-C: addresses 120 through
16,128 bytes / 16,128 123 are not available
bytes
Q page (F)F100H to QB 0 to QB QB 255 / per IM 308-C: If an output is addressed
(F)F1FEH 254 (F)F1FF 16 pages, 255 bytes = through pages, it cannot
4,080 bytes for inputs / be addressed through the
4,080 bytes for outputs FB IM308C. PROFIBUS
max. 16 IM 308-C: addresses 120 through
65,280 bytes / 65,280 123 are not available
bytes
DP window (F)F800H to FB IM308C – Min. 6,650 bytes and –
(F)F9FFH (FB 192) max. 13,300 bytes in to-
(default) tal for inputs,
p , outputs
p and
di
diagnostics
ti ddata
t
(F)FA00H to
(F)FBFFH
(F)FC00H to
(F)FDFFH
(F)FE00H to
(F)FFFFH**
* If you use the address range starting at (F)FC00H for the CPU 948, you must deactivate the ”PESP” signal (jumper
X 13).
** S5-135U and S5-155U only.
1 Column indicates the address area of the IM 308-C for addressing. In the 945, 946/947 and 948 CPUs, this address
is on memory page F.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-5
6.1.1 Linear addressing
Definition Linear addressing is possible in the P and Q areas of the CPU. Each input or
output of a DP slave has one and only one address in the P or Q area, respec-
tively (i.e. linear addressing).
Advantages Linear addressing affords rapid access to the individual bytes of a DP slave.
You also have bit-serial access to input and output bytes 0 to 127 (63 with
941 CPU) via the process image (e.g. U E 1.0).
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to linear addressing:

If you address an output using linear addressing, you cannot also write to
the output via the FB IM308C. The IM 308-C does not recognize the at-
tempt to address this output via the FB IM308C.
CPUs 941 to 944: The 941 to 944 CPUs build the process image word by
word. This can mean that under certain circumstances, two DP slaves are
addressed within a word. If you selected QVZ as the error reporting mode
in COM PROFIBUS and you address via the process image, the following
case may arise:
There are two DP slaves in a word and one DP slave fails: the CPU gener-
ates QVZ for the second DP slave as well, despite the fact that this
DP slave can still be addressed via the bus.
The following rules therefore apply to the CPUs 941 to 944:
– Align the start of address of a DP slave with an even address (e.g. 2, 4,
6, ...) and leave the odd address free. You can then use access via the
process image as well.
– Use load and transfer commands. The commands run byte-by-byte
checks and can tell whether or not a byte exists.
CPUs 941 to 944: If you select linear addressing for the Q area with
CPUs 941 to 944, you cannot use L QB /T QB. Instead, you access the
addresses through the standard function block FB 196.
S5-135U and S5-155U: If an input/output module is inserted in the cen-
tral programmable controller, you must not assign any P or Q addresses
for the IM 308-C if they are also used by this input/output module!
If you use the entire Q area for the IM 308-C, do not insert an input or
output module in the central programmable controller (host).
You can avoid the danger of inadvertent double assignments by reserving
input and output areas when you enter the master parameters with
COM PROFIBUS (see section G.8.3).

6-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
When should I use Use linear addressing when you do not need more than 512 bytes for inputs
linear addressing? and 512 bytes for outputs as the sum of all DP slaves in a host.
If you require more input or output bytes, use P-page addressing, Q-page ad-
dressing or the FB IM308C.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-7
6.1.2 Page addressing
Definition of page In page addressing, 16 pages numbered from n to (n + 15) are created on
addressing each IM 308-C. The first page number n corresponds to the number of the
IM 308-C. The number of the IM 308-C is a multiple of 16 and is entered in
COM PROFIBUS as one of the master parameters.
In a maximum configuration, you can create 256 pages distributed across
8 IM 308-C master interfaces. The pages are assigned as follows:
Table 6-3 Assignment of pages to IM 308-C master interfaces
Pages with numbers ... ... are on the IM 308-C with the num-
ber:
0 to 15 0
16 to 31 16
32 to 47 32
... ...
224 to 239 224
240 to 255 240
Example The number of the IM 308-C is ”48”; I-addr is ”02P192”.

Address
P area
Page
Calculate the page number as follows:
Page number = 48 + 2 = 50.
Definition of page Before you can use a page for data exchange, you must include the page in
selection address question in the address area of the CPU. To do so, you write the number of
the desired page into the page selection address (PY 255 for P-page addres-
sing, QB 255 for Q-page addressing).

6-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Example: page The table below shows how page addressing works. Note that the mode
addressing shown here by way of example illustrates P-page addressing.
In the example, the I/O byte PY 193 is read from the page having the page
number 18. Page 18 is on the second IM 308-C, the number of which is 16.
Table 6-4 How page addressing works
Activity Memory areas in the IM 308-Cs Result

1. Write the number of the page The page selection address is
to the read/written into the loaded into the IM 308-C via the
”page selection address” I/O bus.
byte. The IM 308-C sets a pointer to
15
L KF +18 PY 254 ... page 18 and makes this page
T PY 255 15 available for read/write.
... ...
PY 193 2
PY 192 1 31
Page 0 ...
... 18
1st IM 308-C 255
(number of 17
Page 16 ...
IM 308-C = 0) ...
Page 240
16th IM 308-C
(number of the
IM 308-C = 240)
2. You can now read or write You have direct access to a

the actual address, for exam- memory area of the IM 308-C.
ple load I/O byte PY 193:
L PY 193
15
T MB 100
PY 254
...
PY 193 31
PY 192 ...
18
17
Page 16
P/Q-page P or Q addressing for distributed I/Os only functions in the ordinary I/O area.
addressing It is independent of page addressing for communications processors (CPs)
and intelligent I/O modules (IPs) (address range: (F)F400H to (F)F7FFH).
Definition of P- In P-page addressing, part of the P area is replicated. The part in question is
page addressing from PY 192 to PY 254.
You can use PY 0 to PY 191 to address the central I/O modules in the pro-
grammable controller.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-9
Q-page addressing In Q-page addressing, the Q area is replicated. The Q area extends from QB 0
to QB 254.
Using the Q area You can use I/O bytes QB 0 to QB 254 for the I/O modules in the expansion
unit and for distributed I/O.
Warning
! There is a possibility of inputs or outputs receiving double assignments in
the Q area.
If an input/output module is inserted in the central programmable controller,
you must not assign any P or Q addresses with any page number for the IM
308-C if they are also used by this input/output module!
If you use the entire Q area for the IM 308-C, do not insert an input or output
module in the central programmable controller (host).
You can avoid the danger of inadvertent double assignments by reserving
input and output areas when setting the master parameters with COM PRO-
FIBUS (see section G.8.3).
Restrictions The following restrictions apply to page addressing:

With P-page addressing, you cannot use PROFIBUS addresses 120 to 123.
Only the PROFIBUS addresses from 1 to 119 are available.
With Q-page addressing, you cannot use PROFIBUS addresses 108 to
123. Only the PROFIBUS addresses from 1 to 107 are available.
If you use pages to address an output, you can no longer address the out-
put via the FB IM308C. The IM 308-C does not recognize the attempt to
access this output via the FB IM308C.
Additional programming: (write page selection address and only then the
I/O byte as such)

6-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
6.1.3 Addressing via the FB IM308C (FB 192) function block
Definition If you opt for addressing through the FB IM308C (FB 192) you use the
CP page area and the IM3/IM4 area to address the distributed inputs and out-
puts.
This address area is known as the DP window; by default, it occupies the ad-
dress area (F)F800H to (F)F9FFH.
See chapter 7 for an explanation of the parameters exported to the
FB IM308C for the individual functions.
Advantages The advantages of addressing via the FB IM308C are as follows:

You can always address inputs through the FB IM308C, irrespective of
whether or not you have assigned the address with COM PROFIBUS.
The FB IM308C is ideal for addressing large data quantities as is the case
with operator panels, IM 308-C as DP slave, drives, for example.
Data can be saved directly to a data block or a bit memory address area –
no linear addresses are lost.
The FB IM308C permits mixed addressing. For example, if you have
large data quantities you can address the first byte with linear addressing
and address the remaining bytes via the FB IM308C. The maximum con-
sistent area is then 16 bytes (see Table 6-1).
In this case you use the first byte as coordination byte that for high-speed
cyclic queries. When this coordination byte shows that the data in the
remaining bytes has been updated, you can address them through the
FB IM308C. This mechanism cuts down on runtime in the application
program.
If you want to address more than one IM 308-C in multiprocessor mode,
you can assign a DP window to each IM 308-C. This significantly reduces
the complexity of addressing.
Restrictions If you use the FB IM308C, bear the following in mind:

Access to inputs/outputs is faster when you use linear or page addressing
than when you use the FB IM308C for addressing.
If you have already addressed an output with linear or page addressing,
you cannot read or write this output through the FB IM308C. The
IM 308-C does not recognize any attempt to set this output through the
FB IM308C.
When should I use Use the FB IM308C when the addressing volume of the DP slaves or the
the FB IM308C? IM 308-C is such that linear addressing is no longer adequate.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-11
6.1.4 Access commands for distributed I/O
Overview You can access the addresses of the distributed I/O as follows:
Via the process image or with load/transfer commands
Via the standard function block FB IM308C
Process image or You cannot access inputs or outputs via the process image or load/transfer
load/transfer commands unless you assigned the inputs and outputs beforehand with
commands COM PROFIBUS.
Appendix B contains a list of all the commands for the various CPUs and
address areas. Appendix B also contains a list of rules that you must observe
in order to maintain data consistency.
Mixed-mode You can mix the various modes of addressing to suit your application. Define
addressing ”Linear”, ”P-page” or ”Q-page” as the addressing mode in the ”Master pa-
rameters” dialog box in COM PROFIBUS. This mode then applies for all
DP slaves assigned to the DP master in question.
If you mix the modes of addressing linearly or mix page addressing with
FB IM308C, the following applies:
Inputs can be read either with the FB IM308C or by linear or page ad-
dressing.
If you have addressed outputs using linear or page addressing, you cannot
simultaneously use the FB IM308C to address these outputs.

6-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
6.2 Diagnostics with STEP 5
Overview Diagnostics means identifying and pinpointing errors. You require the
FB IM308C function block to read the diagnostics data.
Structure of Diagnostics consists of master diagnostics and slave diagnostics.

diagnostics
Master diagnostics comprises the diagnostics functions implemented in the
DP master for the DP slaves of the master, and for the status of the DP master.
Slave diagnostics comprises detailed diagnostics messages for each DP slave.
Master diagnostics
Over- ... indicates which DP slaves report diagnosis

view dia.
Master status ... indicates the status of the DP master as RUN,
CLEAR or STOP
Data-transfer list ... marks the DP slaves with which data transfer has
taken place
Slave diagnostics
Station ... provides an overview of the diagnostics for a

status DP slave
Master stat. No. ... indicates which DP master has access to
Slave diagnostics
the DP slave
Manufacturer ID ... provides information on the type
of DP slave
Slave-specific diagnostics
Scope of slave-specific diag-

nostics depends on slave
Station ... provides general information on
type
diagnostics the DP slave
ID- ... indicates which module in a
spec. diag. DP slave reports an error
Channel diagnostics ... indicates which channel

of the DP slave reports
an error
Figure 6-1 Diagnostics structure

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-13
6.3 Reading master diagnostics
Definition Master diagnostics consists of 64 bytes structured as follows:

Overview diagnostics (16 bytes): In overview diagnostics, you can check
all DP slaves for which diagnostics data is available. The overview diag-
nostics is updated once every data cycle.
On the basis of the overview diagnostics, you can trace the type of diag-
nostics message by checking the (see section 6.4):
– station status and
– depending on the type of the DP slave, station diagnostics, module
diagnostics and/or channel diagnostics.
Master status (16 bytes): The master status diagnostics byte indicates the
operating mode of the master: RUN, CLEAR, STOP or OFF.
Data-transfer list (16 bytes): The data-transfer list marks those
DP slaves assigned to a DP master with which data has been exchanged
within a time configurable under COM PROFIBUS (response monitor-
ing). The contents of the data-transfer list are updated every third time
after the minimum response monitoring time has elapsed.
The remaining 16 bytes are reserved.
Reading master To request master diagnostics, call the FB IM308C with the function
diagnostics FCT = MD. The values for the other parameters in this call are shown in sec-
tion 7.
Result: The FB IM308C places the diagnostics data in the S5 memory area
specified in the FB IM308C call (data block or bit memory address area).

6-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Meaning of master Master diagnostics is structured as follows:

diagnostics
Table 6-5 Structure of master diagnostics
Byte Meaning
0 to 15 Overview diagnostics: A ”1” means that the corresponding DP slave has reported diagnos-
tics or that the DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP master.
16 to 31 Master status: Information on the operating modes of the IM 308-C and version releases.
32 to 47 Data-transfer list: A ”1” means that data has been exchanged with the station in question
within a time calculated by COM PROFIBUS (minimum response monitoring time).
48 to 63 Reserved

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-15
Structure of This table shows how master diagnostics is structured:

master diagnostics
Table 6-6 Appearance of master diagnostics
Diagnostics
g Byte Bit (corresponds to the DP slave with the PROFIBUS address:) Data for-
mat rec.
rec
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Overview 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – KM
diagnostics
1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 KM
... ... KM
14 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 KM
15 – – – – 123 122 121 120 KM
Byte Value Meaning
Master sta- 16 C0H RUN: The IM 308-C reads the input data of the DP slaves cycli- KH
tus cally and passes output data to the DP slaves. The IM 308-C can
receive the token from another DP master and pass on the token.
80H CLEAR1: The IM 308-C reads the input data cyclically; output KH
data is set to ”0”. The IM 308-C can receive the token from
another DP master and pass on the token.
40H STOP: No data is exchanged between the IM 308-C and the KH
DP slaves. The IM 308-C can receive the token from another
DP master and pass on the token.
00H OFF: No data is exchanged between the IM 308-C and the KH
DP slaves. The IM 308-C can neither receive nor pass on the to-
ken. This means that the OFF status cannot be passed on to other
DP masters.
17 80H Manufacturer ID (high byte) KH
18 1CH Manufacturer ID (low byte) KH
19 __H Hardware version DDLM/user interface (e. g. 21H for V 2.1) KH
20 __H Firmware version DDLM/user interface KH
21 __H Hardware version user KH
22 __H Firmware version user KH
23 to 31 – Reserved –
Byte
y Bit (corresponds to the DP slave with the PROFIBUS address:)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data trans- 32 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 – KM
fer list
33 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 KM
... ... KM
46 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 KM
47 – – – – 123 122 121 120 KM
48 to 63 Reserved –
1 The operating mode goes to CLEAR when the operating-mode selector switch of the IM 308-C is in the RUN
position and the CPU operating mode is STOP (see section 8.2).

6-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
6.4 Reading slave diagnostics
Definition Slave diagnostics comprises a maximum of 244 bytes and is structured as

follows:
Station status 1 through 3 (length: 3 bytes)
Station status 1 through 3 reflects the status of a DP slave.
Master PROFIBUS address (length: 1 byte)
The master PROFIBUS address diagnostics byte contains the PROFIBUS
address of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave.
Manufacturer ID (length: 2 bytes)
The manufacturer ID contains a code indicating the type of the DP slave.
Station diagnostics (length depends on the type of the DP slave)
Station diagnostics provides general information on the DP slave.
Module diagnostics (length depends on the type of the DP slave)
Module diagnostics indicates which module is defective and which slot it
occupies.
Channel diagnostics (length depends on the type of the DP slave)
Channel diagnostics indicates which channel of a DP slave has an error
message.
Reading slave To request slave diagnostics, you must call the FB IM308C with the function
diagnostics FCT = SD. See section 7 for the values of the remaining parameters.
Result: The FB IM308C places the slave-diagnostics data in the S5 memory
area opened in the FB IM308C call (data block or marker area).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-17
Diagnostics of With the exception of the diagnostics messages listed below, shared-input
shared-input slave diagnostics can be analyzed only by the parameterization master:
slaves
The following diagnostics messages are updated cyclically by the shared-in-
put master:
Overview diagnostics (station powerfail only)
Data transfer list
Station status 1: bit 0, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7
Station status 2: bit 0, 3, 7
Master PROFIBUS address of the parameterization master
Manufacturer ID
The status of all other bits in the diagnostics messages is frozen after startup
in the shared-input master.
Static diagnostics If a DP slave sets bit 1 in station status 2 (static diagnostics message), this bit
for shared-input is set only for the parameterization master and not for the shared-input mas-
slaves ter.
This can mean that if for example, an S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP slave in-
terface goes to STOP, the shared-input master cannot recognize this status.
Consequently, the corresponding bits in the overview diagnostics and in the
data transfer list are not updated.
Structure of slave Slave diagnostics is structured as follows:

diagnostics
Table 6-7 Structure of slave diagnostics
Byte Meaning Recommended

data format
0 Station status 1 KM
3 Master PROFIBUS address KF
4 Manufacturer ID (high byte) KH
5 Manufacturer ID (low byte) KH
6 ... Other slave-specific diagnostics (station, module or chan- KH
243 nel diagnostics, depending on the DP slave, see sections
6.4.1 and 6.4.2)

6-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Structure of Station status 1 provides information on the DP slave. The structure is as fol-
station status 1 lows:
Table 6-8 Structure of station status 1
Bit Meaning Remedy

0 1: DP slave not addressable by DP master. Is PROFIBUS address of DP slave correct?
Bus connector correctly seated?
Voltage applied to DP slave?
RS 485 repeater correctly configured?
Reset DP slave
1 1: DP slave not ready for data exchange. Wait, because DP slave is powering up.
2 1: The configuration data sent by the DP master Is correct station type or correct DP slave configuration
to the DP slave does not match the DP slave entered in COM PROFIBUS?
configuration.
3 1: Station, module and/or channel diagnostics You can read the diagnostics data. For notes on the
data is present (depends on type of contents of the diagnostics data, see the manuals on the
DP slave). DP slaves and sections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2.
4 1: Function not supported, e.g. the control com- Check parameterization. Parameterization with
mand FREEZE or SYNC. COM PROFIBUS and the type file.
5 1: DP master cannot interpret response of slave. Check physical bus characteristics.
6 1: DP slave type does not match parameteriza- Parameters entered correctly in COM PROFIBUS?
tion in COM PROFIBUS.
7 1: DP slave parameterized by a DP master other Bit is always 1 if, for example, you are currently acces-
than that currently accessing the DP slave. sing the DP slave from the programmer or another
DP master.
The station number of the parameterization master is in
the ”Master PROFIBUS address” diagnostics byte.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-19
Structure of Station status 2 provides additional information on the DP slave.

station status 2
Table 6-9 Structure of station status 2
Bit Meaning
0 1: DP slave must be re-parameterized.
1 1: A diagnostics message has been received. The DP slave cannot resume until
the error has been rectified (static diagnostics message).
2 1: Bit is always ”1” if there is a DP slave with this PROFIBUS address.
3 1: Response monitoring is activated for this DP slave.
4 1: DP slave has received the ”FREEZE” control command. 1
5 1: DP slave has received the ”SYNC” control command. 1
6 0: Bit is always ”0”.
7 1: DP slave is deactivated, i.e. removed from current processing.
1 Bit is not updated unless a second diagnostics message is modified.
Structure of Bit 7 of station status 3 provides information on whether or not more diag-
station status 3 nostics information is available. The DP slave sets this bit, for example, if
there is more channel-specific diagnostics data than it can enter in its send
buffer. The DP master sets this bit if the DP slave sends more diagnostics in-
formation than the master can store in its diagnostics buffer.
Structure of the The master PROFIBUS address consists of one byte:

master PROFIBUS
address
Table 6-10 Structure of the master PROFIBUS address
Bit Meaning
0 to 7 PROFIBUS address of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave
and which has read and write access to the DP slave.
Structure of the See the manual on the DP slave for details of the manufacturer ID. The
manufacturer ID manufacturer ID consists of two bytes.
Slave diagnostics; This part of slave diagnostics depends on the DP slave

continued
Section Topic Page

6.4.1 Slave-specific diagnostics for DP slaves 6-21
6.4.2 Slave-specific diagnostics for DP Siemens slaves 6-22

6-20 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
6.4.1 Slave diagnostics for DP slaves
Overview On the IM 308-C master interface, the diagnostics data is stored in accor-
dance with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
The slave diagnostics data is stored separately for all slaves that do not com-
ply with the above standard (see section 6.4.2).
Structure of slave The structure of slave diagnostics varies from slave to DP slave. Not every
diagnostics slave diagnostics message is valid for each DP slave.
The header always indicates the type of diagnosis in question. The header
contains the type of slave diagnostics (station, module or channel diagnos-
tics) plus the length of the diagnostics bytes.
The first header is always in byte 6 of the slave diagnostics.
Table 6-11 shows the structure of the header for slave diagnostics:
Table 6-11 Structure of the header for station, module or channel diagnostics
Bit Value Meaning

7, 6 0 0 Code for station diagnostics
0 1 Code for module diagnostics
1 0 Code for channel diagnostics
5 to 0 – Length of diagnostics including header.
Contents of The structure of the station, module and channel diagnostics is always spe-
slave-specific cific to the DP slave. See the manual on the DP slave for the meanings of
diagnostics these diagnostics.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-21
6.4.2 Slave-specific diagnostics for DP Siemens slaves.
Structure The structure of the slave diagnostics for DP Siemens slaves varies from
slave to slave:
Table 6-12 Structure of the slave-specific diagnostics for DP Siemens slaves
Byte ET 200B (6ES5 ...) ET 200C (6ES5 ...) ET 200U (6ES5 ...) ET 200K SPM module
0 Station status 1
1 Station status 2
2 Station status 3
3 Master PROFIBUS address
4 Manufacturer ID (high byte)
5 Manufacturer ID (low byte)
6 Header, station Header, station Header, station Header, station Header, station
diagnostics diagnostics diagnostics diagnostics diagnostics
7 Header, station 0 Header, station 0 0
diagnostics diagnostics
8 0 0 Header, module 0 0
diagnostics
9 0 Channels 7 ... 0 Modules 7 ... 0 Channels 7 ... 0 Channels 7 ... 0
10 0 0 Modules 15 ... 8 Channels 15 ... 8 Channels 15 ... 8

6-22 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
6.5 Sending the FREEZE and SYNC control commands
What is a control The IM 308-C can send simultaneous commands to a group of DP slaves in
command? order to synchronize them.
The FREEZE and SYNC control commands enable you to synchronize
groups of DP slaves in response to events.
What is FREEZE? When it receives the FREEZE control command from the DP master, the
DP standard slave freezes the current status of the inputs and transfers these
inputs cyclically to the DP master.
After every new FREEZE control command, the DP standard slave again
freezes the status of the inputs.
The freeze remains in effect and the input data is not again updated until the
DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.
What is SYNC? When it issues the SYNC control command to a DP standard slave, the
DP master is instructing the DP standard slave to freeze the states of the out-
puts at their current value. When it subsequently receives telegrams, the
DP standard slave stores the most recent output data, but the output status
remains unchanged.
After every new SYNC control command, the DP standard slave sets the out-
puts which it last received.
Cyclic updating of the outputs does not resume until the DP master sends the
UNSYNC control command.
Preconditions The FREEZE and SYNC control commands are not effective unless you have
structured the DP slaves in groups with the aid of COM PROFIBUS. You
must know which DP slave is assigned to which group and you must be in
possession of the group number before you can issue these control com-
mands. You can check these numbers in the ”group membership” listing.
When you send a control command, you must use the FB IM308C to ascer-
tain whether the control command has already been broadcast to all the
DP slaves concerned. Only then can you continue processing the inputs/out-
puts in question.
Issuing control In order to issue control commands to the groups of DP slaves, you must set
commands FCT = GC and the GCGR parameter to suit the control command in question.
See section 7 for the remaining parameters.
Result: In accordance with the parameter settings, the FB IM308C sends the
control commands to the groups of DP slaves.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-23
6.6 Assigning PROFIBUS addresses with FB IM308C
Application For some DP standard slaves you set the PROFIBUS address by means of the
software, e.g. for the ET 200C distributed I/O station or the DP/AS-I link.
Note that the FB IM308C can be used to change the PROFIBUS addresses of
DP standard slaves only.
No application DP slaves whose PROFIBUS addresses can only be set by means of switches
set in the housing, or DP Siemens slaves: you cannot assign the PROFIBUS
addresses by means of the software.
Assigning To assign a PROFIBUS address to a DP slave, proceed as follows:

PROFIBUS
1. Configure the parameterization master IM 308-C and the DP standard
addresses
slave with the new PROFIBUS address using COM PROFIBUS.
Tip: Use the highest possible baud rate for the DP standard slave.
2. Connect the bus to the IM 308-C and to the target DP slave which is to
receive a PROFIBUS address.
3. Connect the programmer to the AS 511 interface of the CPU and set up a
configuration as shown in Fig. 6-2 :
CPU IM 308-C
Figure 6-2 Using the FB IM308C to assign a PROFIBUS address to a DP slave
4. Switch the IM 308-C to STOP.

5. Start the STEP 5 program.

6-24 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
6. Call the FB IM308C with FCT = CS. See chapter 7 for details of all re-
maining parameters.
If you are unaware of the original PROFIBUS address, program the
FB IM308C with all PROFIBUS addresses as a loop.
Result: The IM 308-C attempts to transfer the new PROFIBUS address to
the DP slave. The ”BF” LED goes out when the DP slave accepts the
PROFIBUS address. You should always check the ERR parameter of the
FB IM308C in order to ascertain whether transfer was successful.
7. Evaluate the master diagnostics and check whether the DP standard slave
has been removed from the overview diagnostics and entered in the data-
transfer list.
IM 308-C set to If you want to change the PROFIBUS address of a DP standard slave while
RUN the IM 308-C is set to RUN, note the following:
The new PROFIBUS address of the DP standard slave must be parameter-
ized with COM PROFIBUS
The old PROFIBUS address of the DP standard slave must not be para-
meterized with COM PROFIBUS
No other DP master accessing the DP standard slave.
Example The STEP 5 application program shown below is an example of how you can
assign a PROFIBUS address to a DP slave with the FB IM308C:
STL Explanation
OB 1
SEGMENT 1 0000
:C DB 70 Open data block No. 70
:
:JU FB 192
Name :IM308C
DPAD : KH F800 Default address area of IM 308-C
IMST : KY 0,126 IM No.=0: old PROFIBUS address.=126
FCT : KC CS Function: Change PROFIBUS address
GCGR : KM 00000000 00000000
TYP : KY 0,60 S5-Data block: DB 60
STAD : KF +1 As of data word 1
LENG : KF +4 Minimum length = 4 bytes
ERR : DW 0 Error code placed in DW 0 of the
: current data block
: (here DB 70)
:BE

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-25
6.7 Addressing the ET 200 in multimaster mode and/or multi-

processor mode
Introduction This section describes the meanings of the terms mono-master mode, multi-
master mode and multiprocessor mode. The important points for each mode
are also discussed.
Section Topic Page

6.7.1 Multimaster mode 6-27
6.7.2 Multiprocessor mode 6-28
Definition: Monomaster mode means that there is one master in a host connected to the
mono-master bus. There are no other masters operating on the bus.
mode
Host system 1
IM 308-C No. 1
Master system 1
CPU
Figure 6-3 Monomaster mode

6-26 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
6.7.1 Multimaster mode
Definition Multimaster mode means that there are at least two masters on the bus, for
example an IM 308-C and a CP 5431 or two IM 308-C master interfaces.
If there are two IM 308-C master interfaces on the bus, they may be in the
same host or in two different hosts.
Host system 1
IM 308-C No. 1 IM 308-C No. 2

Master system 1 Master system 2
Slave No. 9 CPU

Figure 6-4 Multimaster mode
Rules COM PROFIBUS supports the generation of multiple IM 308-C master inter-
faces on one bus:
Enter the entire bus configuration before you start exporting the data to
memory card.
If you change the contents of one memory card, you must always re-trans-
fer all the data to each memory card.
You must leave a free PROFIBUS address between the PROFIBUS ad-
dress of one master and that of the next master. This address is only al-
lowed to be used by a slave.
So as not to sacrifice performance, assign the DP masters consecutive
PROFIBUS addresses that are as low as possible, e.g. 1, 3 and 5 for three
DP masters.
The highest PROFIBUS address (Highest Station Address, HSA) in the
”Bus parameters” dialog box should also be as low as possible.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-27
6.7.2 Multiprocessor mode
Definition Multiprocessor mode means that two, three or four CPUs access one or more
IM 308-C master interfaces.
Host system 1
IM 308-C No. 1
Master system 1
CPU
CPU
Slave No. 9 Slave No. 10 Slave No. 11 Slave No. 12
Figure 6-5 Multiprocessor mode
Rules The following rules apply to multiprocessor mode:

Multiprocessor mode is permissible only in conjunction with linear ad-
dressing (P- and Q-areas) or addressing through the FB IM308C.
If you want to use page addressing nevertheless, the CPU accesses to the
IM 308-C master interfaces must be coordinated with semaphores. This
means that at any one time, only one CPU can access a page.
Digital inputs/outputs can be processed by multiple CPUs.
The FB IM308C can be called in multiprocessor mode. The maximum
data consistency ensured is byte-by-byte.
If you address an IM 308-C master interface from multiple CPUs via the
FB IM308C, you must implement semaphore interlocks to ensure that
only one CPU can address the FB IM308C at any given time.
If you address in parallel using pages and via the FB IM308C, you can
use two different semaphores – one for page addressing and one for the
FB IM308C. Within a particular addressing mode, each CPU must pro-
cess the same semaphore.

6-28 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
S5-135U and Note that the following rules apply if you operate a series S5-135U CPU in
S5-155U multiprocessor mode in conjunction with a series S5-155U CPU:
Select the S5-135U as the host type in COM PROFIBUS.
Make sure that there are no entries in the DB1 (digital inputs, digital out-
puts) for the series S5-155U. You must use direct load/transfer commands
to enable the S5-155U CPU to access.
The process image may contain addresses in the case of S5-135U.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 6-29

6-30 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
IM 308-C – Using the standard function
block FB IM308C (FB 192) 7
In this chapter Chapter 7 contains information on:
Section Topic Page

7.1 Functions of the FB IM308C (FB 192) 7-2
7.2 Technical data and installation of the FB IM308C (FB 192) 7-4
7.3 Calling the standard function block FB IM308C and block pa- 7-7
rameters (FB 192)
7.4 Indirect parameterization 7-19
you need in order to carry out the following tasks with the standard function
block FB IM308C (FB 192).
Reading the inputs/outputs of slaves and writing the outputs
Interpreting diagnostics data
Sending control commands
Assigning a slave PROFIBUS address
Parameterizing the FB IM308C indirectly

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-1
IM 308-C – Using the standard function block FB IM308C
7.1 Functions of the FB IM308C (FB 192)
Application The standard function block FB IM308C transfers data between a CPU
memory area (marker area, data-block area) and the IM 308-C master inter-
face. You can use the FB IM308C to:
Read the inputs
Read/write the outputs
Read the diagnostics
Send and monitor the FREEZE and SYNC control commands
Change the PROFIBUS address (e.g. for the ET 200C DP standard slave).
Memory area on The FB IM308C supports the following memory areas, always presuming
the CPU that they are supported by the CPU:
Data blocks DB
Extended data blocks DX (945, 928, 946/947, 948 CPUs only)
Marker area M
Extended marker area S (945, 928B, 946/947, 948 CPUs only)
Control commands You can use the FB IM308C to send a combination of the following control
commands to one or more groups of DP slaves:
FREEZE (freeze inputs of the DP slaves)
UNFREEZE (cancel the FREEZE command)
SYNC (simultaneously output and freeze the output states of the DP
slaves)
UNSYNC (cancel the SYNC command)
Check whether a control command issued beforehand has been completed
Changing You can use the FB IM308C in conjunction with the STEP 5 program to as-
PROFIBUS sign PROFIBUS addresses to DP standard slaves (e.g. for the ET 200C dis-
address tributed I/O station).
Parameterization You can directly or indirectly parameterize the function block FB IM308C. If
you prefer indirect parameterization, you require a parameter data block.

7-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Calling the In the simplest form, the FB IM308C is called in cyclic program processing.
FB IM308C
If you call the FB IM308C in process-alarm or time-alarm processing, you
must make provision in the STEP 5 application program for ensuring that the
FB IM308C does not interrupt itself. To this end, you must block the alarms
for calling the FB IM308C and release them again after the FB IM308C call
has been implemented.
Note
If the FB IM308C accesses a DP slave for which the error-reporting mode is
”QVZ” (time-out), and this DP slave is not available, QVZ is not reported.
Instead, the corresponding error message is placed in the ”ERR” parameter
of the FB IM308C.
FB IM308C in The FB IM308C can be called in multiprocessor mode.

multiprocessor
If you address an IM 308-C master interface from multiple CPUs via the
mode
FB IM308C, you must implement semaphore interlocks to ensure that only
one CPU can address the FB IM308C at any given time.
For notes on multiprocessor operation, see section 6.7.2.
FB IM308C and You can issue read/write jobs to the DP/AS-I link via the FB IM308C. To do
DP/AS-I link so, you must parameterize the FB IM308C indirectly. You can find a descrip-
tion of the FB IM308C for the DP/AS link in section D.1.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-3
7.2 Technical data and installation of the FB IM308C (FB 192)
Form of delivery COM PROFIBUS up to V3.3:

The FB IM308C is shipped together with COM PROFIBUS. The files are
contained in the ”\CSTEP5” directory and have the following designations:
Table 7-1 File designations for FB IM308C
File Valid for Library number

S5ET50ST.S5D CPU 941 to CPU 944 P71200-S5192-A3
S5ET55ST.S5D CPU 945 P71200-S3192-A3
S5ET23ST.S5D CPU 922, 928, CPU 928B P71200-S8192-A3
S5ET60ST.S5D CPU 946/947, CPU 948 P71200-S6192-A3
The diskette also contains a demo program with a description of all the func-
tions of the FB IM308C.
COM PROFIBUS as of V 5.0:
The FB IM308C is no longer shipped with COM PROFIBUS. You can obtain
a current version of the FB IM308C on the Internet or intranet:
On the intranet (Siemens)
German: http://www.m30x.nbg.scn.de/extern/spiegeln/support/html_00
English: http://www.m30x.nbg.scn.de/extern/spiegeln/support/html_76
On the Internet
German: http://www.ad.siemens.de/support/html_00
English: http://www.ad.siemens.de/support/html_76
Versions of You can use the FB IM308C with the library number ...-A3 only with the
FB IM308C IM 308-C (as of release 6).
If you are using an FB IM308C with the library number ...-A2, you cannot
use the functions described in the ET 200 Distributed I/O System manual for
issuing a SYNC or FREEZE command (see Section 6.5) or the functions with
the DP/AS-I Link (see Section D.1).
If you have installed a version of COM PROFIBUS whose installation disk
contains an FB IM308C with the library number ..-A2, you can obtain a cur-
rent update of the FB IM308C with the library number ...-A3 on the Internet
or intranet.

7-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Address space By default, the IM 308-C occupies the address space (F)F800H to (F)F9FFH
occupied by the for addressing distributed I/O. These 512 bytes of address space is the block
FB IM308C also accessed by the FB IM308C. This address space is also required if you
use only linear or page addressing.
Do not change this address space (DP window) unless absolutely necessary,
for example if there is a second IM 308-C in the programmable controller.
You can change the address space in COM PROFIBUS under the options for
master parameters.
Caution
! Danger of double addressing
The IM 308-C uses fully one or more of the address areas shown in
Table 6-2 under DP window (default: (F)F800H to (F)F9FFH).
No part of these address areas may be used by other modules such as CPs,
IPs in the CP area, central I/O in the IM3/IM4 area or the WF 470 position-
sensing module in the central programmable controller.
Technical data Table 7-2 shows the technical data of the FB IM308C:
Table 7-2 Technical data of the FB IM308C
Technical data CPU 941 to CPU 945 CPU 922 CPU 946/947
CPU 944 CPU 928A/B CPU 948
Module number 192
Module name IM 308C
Library number 5192-A3 3192-A3 8192-A3 6192-A3
P71200-S
Call length 10
Module length 1077 918 879 820
Layering depth 0 1 1 1
Assignment in MB 200 to MB 255
marker area
Assignment in Parameter data block (DW 0 to DW 12). The parameter data
data area block is required only for indirect parameterization.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-5
Runtimes Table 7-3 shows the runtimes which occur when the FB IM308C is called.
These runtimes apply when the FB IM308C can access the IM 308-C master
interface when called. If the FB IM308C does not have access, the runtime is
extended by a maximum of 5 milliseconds. This can occur if a function is
repeated at a short interval for a DP slave. If the same function is pending for
another DP slave, the runtime is not increased.
Table 7-3 Runtimes for the FB IM308-C
Function Length
g Runtimes depending on CPU (in ms)
(bytes)
941B 942B 943B 944B 945 922 928A 928B 946/947 948
GC – 4.1 4.1 3.7 0.9 0.17 6.5 2.8 1.1 0.6 0.15
CC, CW, – 2.1 2.1 2.0 0.7 0.10 5.0 2.2 0.7 0.5 0.11
DR
CS 4 5.0 5.0 4.4 1.3 0.20 8.6 4.5 1.7 0.8 0.20
WO, DW 4 4.4 4.4 4.1 0.9 0.16 6.6 2.9 1.3 0.7 0.19
100 8.9 8.9 8.6 1.2 0.35 7.1 3.4 1.8 0.9 0.35
200 13.9 13.9 13.4 1.5 0.54 7.6 3.8 2.2 1.1 0.51
RO, RI, 4 3.4 3.4 2.9 0.8 0.13 5.9 2.8 1.0 0.6 0.15
MD, SD,
MD SD
100 8.3 8.3 7.8 1.1 0.31 6.4 3.2 1.4 0.8 0.33
CR
200 13.5 13.5 13.1 1.4 0.50 7.1 3.6 1.9 1.1 0.50

7-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
7.3 Calling the standard function block FB IM308C and block

parameters (FB 192)
In section 7.3 Section 7.3 contains:
Section Topic Page

7.3.1 FCT parameter: function of the FB IM308C 7-9
7.3.2 GCGR parameter: sending control commands 7-12
7.3.3 ERR parameter: interpreting the response and errors of the 7-14
FB IM308C
Calling the The call for the FB IM308C is as follows:

FB IM308C
:SPA FB 192 FB 192

NAME :IM308 C
DPAD: IM308C
IMST : DPAD ERR
FCT : IMST
GCGR : FCT
TYP : GCGR
STAD : TYP
LENG : STAD
ERR : LENG
Figure 7-1 Appearance of the FB IM308C call in the STL or in KOP/FUP
FB IM308C access While the IM 308-C is carrying out a reset (all four LEDs come on briefly),
to the IM 308-C the FB IM308C cannot access the IM 308-C. A reset is carried out after
during RESET power on, when a downloaded parameter set is activated and when the
IM 308-C is switched to OFF.
Block Parameters The table below shows the meanings of the block parameters which you must
transfer to the FB IM308C in the STEP 5 application program. You can call
the FB IM308C with either directly or indirectly entered parameters.
Note
LENG parameter: Always specify the joker length for the LENG parameter
for ”read slave diagnosis” (FCT = SD).
If the length specified is too great, this can lead to an error message in the
case of a variable device-specific slave diagnosis, for example.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-7
Table 7-4 Meanings of the block parameters of the FB IM308C
Name Mode Type Designation Permissible assignment

DPAD D KH Address area of the KH = F800; (default)1
IM 308-C (DP window,
DP window address)
IMST D KY Number of the KY = x, y;
IM 308
308-C,
C PROFIBUS
x: Number of the IM 308-C (see section 6.1.2)
address of DP slave
x = 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, ..., 240;
y: PROFIBUS address of the DP slave
y = 1 ... 123 (if FCT = WO, RO, RI, SD)
y = 1 ... 126 (if FCT = CS)
y = irrelevant (if FCT = MD, GC, CC)
FCT D KC Function of the WO = Write outputs RO = Read outputs
FB IM308C (for details RI = Read inputs
see Table 7-5) MD = Read master diagnostics SD = Read slave diagnos-
tics
GC = Global control (control command)
CC = Check global control (check control command)
CS = Change station number (change PROFIBUS address)
XX = Switch to indirect parameterization
GCGR D KM Control commands KM = xxxxxxxx yyyyyyyy; (relevant only if FCT = GC, CC)
Control)
(Global Control),
xxxxxxxx: Choice of control command
Group selection (for de-
tails see Table 7-8) yyyyyyyy: Choice of DP slaves as target group for control
commands
TYP D KY Type
yp of STEP 5 KY = x, y;
memory area
x = 0: Data block type DB x = 1: Data block type DX
x = 2: Flag area M x = 3: Flag area S
y = 10 to 255; DB or DX number (relevant only if x = 0 or
x = 1)
STAD D KF Start of STEP 5 memoryy KF = +x;
area (Start Address)
x: Number of the first data word (if TYP: x = 0 or x = 1)
x: First flag byte2 (if TYP: x = 2 or x = 3)
LENG D KF Number of bytes
y to be KF = +x;
transferred (Length)
x: Number of bytes for transfer
if FCT = DW or CR: x = 1 to 240
if FCT CS: x = 1 to 244 3or x = –1 ; joker length4
if FCT = CS: x = 4 to 244
ERR A W Error word (Error) Data, flag or output word 5
1 Do not change the default setting of the ”DPAD” parameter unless you selected ”Multiprocessor mode” in the master
parameters under COM PROFIBUS and changed the address of the DP window to a value other than F800.
2 Do not use scratch flags (MB 200 to MB 255.
3 The area to be transferred must be entirely within the permissible area or data block.
4 For the joker length, the FB IM308C transfers all permissible bytes. If the source or target area is not long enough, the
FB IM308C does not transfer data and outputs an error message in the ERR parameter.
5 The data word is in the data block opened before the FB IM308C was called. If this data block does not exist, the pro-
grammable controller goes to ”STOP”. Only the range from MW 0 to MW 199 is allowed to be used for flags.

7-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
7.3.1 FCT parameter: function of the FB IM308C (FB 192)
Meaning of the Use the ”FCT” parameter to define which function the FB IM308C will
FCT parameter execute. The primary functions are:
WO: Write outputs of a DP slave (up to 244 bytes at once)
RI: Read inputs of a DP slave (up to 244 bytes at once)
MD: Read master diagnostics
SD: Read slave diagnostics
Assignment of the Table 7-5 lists the settings of the FCT parameters and their significance. The
FCT parameter two columns on the right show
which parameters you must set (other relevant parameters) and
which defaults you can leave, because the parameters in question are ir-
relevant.
Table 7-5 Meaning of the FCT parameter for IM 308-C as DP master
FCT = Meaning Description Other relevant Irrelevant

parameters parameters
WO Write Outputs The FB IM308C transfers the number of bytes IMST, TYP, STAD, GCGR
specified in the LENG parameter from the S5 LENG, DPAD
source area to the DP slave.
RI Read Inputs The FB IM308C transfers the number of bytes IMST, TYP, STAD, GCGR
specified in the LENG parameter from the DP LENG, DPAD
slave (inputs) to the S5 target area.
MD Read Master The FB IM308C transfers the master diagnostics IMST, TYP, STAD, GCGR
Diagnostics of the specified IM 308-C to the S5 target area. LENG, DPAD
SD Read Slave The FB IM308C transfers the slave diagnostics of IMST, TYP, STAD, GCGR
Diagnostics the specified DP slave to the S5 target area. LENG, DPAD
RO Read Outputs The FB IM308C transfers the number of bytes IMST, TYP, STAD, GCGR
specified in the LENG parameter from the DP LENG, DPAD
slave (outputs) to the S5 target area.
GC Global Control The FB IM308C triggers the control command IMST, GCGR, TYP,
(Global Control) specified in the GCGR parameter. DPAD STAD,
LENG,
CC Check Global The FB IM308C checks whether the control com- IMST, GCGR, TYP,
Control mand specified in the GCGR parameter is still be- DPAD STAD,
ing processed. LENG
While ERR = DCH is output, the inputs affected
by the control command cannot be read and the
outputs cannot be set.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-9
Table 7-5 Meaning of the FCT parameter for IM 308-C as DP master, continued
FCT = Meaning Description Other relevant Irrelevant

parameters parameters
CS Change Station The FB IM308C transfers a new PROFIBUS ad- IMST, TYP, STAD, GCGR
Number dress to the DP slave specified in the IMST param- LENG, DPAD
eter. The new PROFIBUS address is specified in
the S5 source area.
XX Switch to indi- The FB IM308C fetches the requisite parameter- –
rect parameterization data from the data block opened in the
ization FB IM308C call.
Warning
! Outputs on the DP slaves may be set inadvertently.
If P-page addressing is selected, PROFIBUS addresess 120 to 123 are illegal.
With Q-page addressing, PROFIBUS addresses 108 to 123 are illegal. If
these PROFIBUS addresses do not exist on the bus, they cannot be addressed
through the FB IM308C.
RO function The RO function of the FB IM308C is only possible on slaves configured by

COM PROFIBUS for the IM 308-C. Only output values are read that have
been written with the WO function by means of the FB IM308C. The outputs
are not read directly by the slave.
S5 memory area This table shows how the S5 memory area is structured subsequent to
with WO, RO, RI FCT = WO, RO or RI:
Table 7-6 Structure of the S5 memory area after FCT = WO, RO or RI
DB/DX M/S Content

DL n Byte n Input/output byte 0
DR n Byte (n + 1) Input/output byte 1
DL (n + 1) Byte (n + 2) Input/output byte 2
DR (n + 1) Byte (n + 3) Input/output byte 3
... ... ...
DL (n + 121) Byte (n + 242) Input/output byte 242
DR (n + 121) Byte (n + 243) Input/output byte 243

7-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
S5 memory area This table shows how the S5 memory area must be structured for FCT = CS
with CS (change PROFIBUS address):
Table 7-7 Structure of the S5 memory area for FCT = CS
DB/DX M/S Content

DL n Byte n New PROFIBUS address
DR n Byte (n + 1) free
DL (n + 1) Byte (n + 2) free
DR (n + 1) Byte (n + 3) 00H: Permit PROFIBUS address change 1
DL (n + 2) Byte (n + 4) User-specific data (byte 0)
DR (n + 2) Byte (n + 5) User-specific data (byte 1)
... ...
DL (n + 121) Byte (n + 242) User-specific data (byte 238)
DR (n + 121) Byte (n + 243) User-specific data (byte 239)
1 This parameter indicates whether the PROFIBUS address can be changed again at a
subsequent time. If you select FFH, the PROFIBUS address cannot be changed again
unless the DP slave is removed from the system in the interim.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-11
7.3.2 GCGR parameter: sending control commands
Assignment of the The FB IM308C does not read the GCGR parameter unless a control com-
GCGR parameter mand is sent with FCT = GC or CC. You define the group memberships of
the DP slaves with COM PROFIBUS.
If FREEZE and UNFREEZE are set simultaneously, only UNFREEZE is
executed. The same applies to simultaneous SYNC and UNSYNC.
Note
”00” is not permissible as the group selection byte.
Table 7-8 Assignment of the GCGR parameter
GCGR parameter
Global Control
(control command) Group selection
Bit 15 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 0

Bit Meaning of control command Bit Meaning
(Global Control) (group selection)
15 Reserved 7 1: Group 8 selected.
13 1: SYNC is executed. 5 1: Group 6 selected.
0: No meaning
12 1: UNSYNC is executed. 4 1: Group 5 selected.
0: No meaning
11 1: FREEZE is executed. 3 1: Group 4 selected.
0: No meaning
10 1: UNFREEZE is executed. 2 1: Group 3 selected.
0: No meaning

7-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
GCGR parameter, Bits 15, 14, 9 and 8 are reserved for the GCGR parameter of the FB IM308C.
bits 15, 14, 9 and 8 If one of the bits is set for the GC and CC functions in spite of this, the
IM 308-C may go into IM fault mode. Although the module will restart wi-
thout problems after a subsequent power off and power on, this incorrect pa-
rameter assignment should be avoided in order to prevent system failure.
When is the When the control command is issued with the FB IM308C, it takes approxi-
control command mately one bus cycle (approx. 1TTR, target rotation time; calculated by
valid? COM PROFIBUS in bus parameters) before the control command is broad-
cast to all DP slaves concerned.
You must use FCT = CC to check whether the control command sent in the
GCGR parameter has already been broadcast to all the DP slaves concerned.
While ERR = DCH persists, the inputs affected by the control command can-
not be read or the outputs set.
Caution
! If you process the inputs or outputs affected by a control command before
the command has been broadcast along the bus to the DP slaves, incorrect
values may be read or set.
Consequently, always check beforehand with FCT = CC to ascertain whether
the control command you sent has already been processed by the DP slaves.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-13
7.3.3 ERR parameter: interpreting the response and errors of the

FB IM308C (FB 192)
ERR parameter If an error occurs while the FB IM308C is running, the ERR parameter con-
tains information indicating the cause of the error. If no error occurs, the
group error bit in the ERR parameter is = 0.
Note
The ERR parameter must be re-evaluated after each FB IM308C call.
Table 7-9 Assignment of the ERR parameter
Length byte Error byte

(high byte) (low byte)
Bit: 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 0
ERR parameter
or battery 1
Error number
Number of bytes trans-
ferred when joker length Parameterization error
–1 parameterized
Error in the IM 308-C
Group error
Bits Meaning
15 ... 8 The length byte indicates the number of bytes transferred by the FB IM308C.
The length byte is always updated when the FB IM308C is called with LENG = –1 (joker length).
When the length byte is updated, the group error bit is not set.
7 ... 0 Error byte: Information about an error (see Table 7-10)
The following bits have a special meaning:
Bit 7: Group error1 1: Error
Bit 6: Error in the 1: Error
IM 308-C
Bits 4 and 5: Parameter- 1: Parameterization error (at least one of the parameters for the FB IM308C call
ization error is invalid)
Bits 0 to 3: Error num- See Table 7-10
bers 1 to F
1 If the ”No error occurred” query is displayed, it is sufficient to query bit 7 (group error).

7-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
FB IM308C and If the FB IM308C accesses a DP slave for which the error-reporting mode is
QVZ ”QVZ” and the slave in question is not accessible, ”QVZ” is not reported:
instead, the corresponding error message is placed in the ”ERR” parameter of
the FB IM308C.
Exception: If you switch the IM 308-C from STOP to OFF at this time, the
CPU reports ”QVZ” for a short time.
Error numbers in Table 7-10 shows the meanings of the ERR parameter.
the ERR parameter
Table 7-10 Meanings of the error numbers in the ERR parameter
LOW byte Meaning Remedy

of ERR
Hex. Dec.
01H 1 The previous data has not yet been –
transferred to the slave, or the slave
has not received any new data since
the last time it was read.
02H 2 Slave failed, only in ”None” or –
”PEU” error mode
04H 4 Incorrect mode Switch the master to RUN mode.
A1H 161 Illegal CPU type, FB IM308C not Use the FB IM308C from the S5ETxxST.S5D file which
executable in this CPU belongs to the CPU (see Table 7-1).
A2H 162 Number of the IM 308-C invalid The number of the IM 308-C must be one of the following
(IMST parameter) values: 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176,
192, 208, 224 or 240.
A3H 163 PROFIBUS address of the DP slave The PROFIBUS address must be within the range 1 to 123.
invalid (IMST parameter)
A4H 164 LENG parameter invalid The LENG parameter must be either ”–1” (joker length) or in
the range 0 to 240 or 1 to 244 or 4 to 244, depending on the
function.
A5H 165 TYP parameter invalid The parameter value must be in the range 0 to 3.
A6H 166 GCGR parameter invalid The low byte of the GCGR parameter must be a value not
equal to 0.
A7H 167 TYP parameter invalid; the S marker Select a different memory area, e.g. marker M.
memory area is valid only for the fol-
lowing CPUs:
CPU 945
CPU 928B
CPU 946/947 and CPU 948
A8H 168 TYP parameter invalid; the extended Select a different memory area, e.g. data block DB.
data block area is valid only for the
following CPUs:
CPU 945
CPU 928A, CPU 928B
CPU 946/947 and CPU 948

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-15
Table 7-10 Meanings of the error numbers in the ERR parameter, continued

of ERR
Hex. Dec.
A9H 169 TYP parameter invalid; specified Create the specified source/target data block.
data block DB/DX does not exist.
AAH 170 TYP parameter invalid; specified The specified source/target data block must exist in the ap-
data block DB/DX is too small. plication memory and must be long enough:
LENG 0 –1:
Minimum length (words) = STAD + LENG/2 – 1
LENG = 1:
Minimum length depends on the configuration of the DP
slave;
STAD v Minimum length (words) v STAD + 122
ABH 171 TYP parameter invalid: specified flag The data to be transferred must fit entirely into the following
memory area M/S too short. area:
Valid area for flags:
0 v MB v 199
Valid area for S flags:
0 v SY v 1023 (CPU 928B)
0 v SY v 4095 (CPU 945, CPU 946/947, CPU 948)
ACH 172 FCT parameter invalid; FB IM308C A valid function must be parameterized in KC format.
does not recognize specified function
ADH 173 STAD parameter invalid The validity range of the STAD parameter is as follows:
Valid range for flags:
0 v STAD v 199
Valid range for S flags:
0 v STAD v 1023 (CPU 928B)
0 v STAD v 4095 (CPU 945, CPU 946/947,
CPU 948)
AEH 174 A slave has failed or is not parame- Interpret the slave diagnostics data.
terized, no inputs/outputs have been
parameterized, or
the FB IM308C has gone to STOP
AFH 175 LENG parameter too large. The Reduce LENG or select LENG = –1 (joker length).
IM 308-C does not have the desired
number of data bytes for the speci-
fied DP slave.
B0H 176 QVZ error; IM 308-C does not react. Check the IM 308-C (for reasons for QVZ, see section 8.2).
B1H 177 TYP parameter invalid; the specified Select DB/DX No. w 10.
DB/DX No. is invalid.
B2H 178 DPAD parameter invalid The following are the only permissible addresses for this
parameter: F600, F800, FA00, FC00, FE00.

7-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c

of ERR
Hex. Dec.
C1H 193 Error message from IM 308-C: The Only one CS or two GC commands possible at any given
requested command has already been time.
executed; the IM 308-C is out of re-
sources.
C2H 194 Error message from IM 308-C: The A control command can be executed only with the IM 308-C
IM 308-C is in wrong mode. in the RUN or CLEAR mode.
C3H 195 Error message from IM 308-C: No A control command can be executed only if an appropriate
appropriate group configured. group has been configured with COM PROFIBUS.
Error in the GCGR parameter setting Check syntax and content of the control command.
C5H 197 Error message from IM 308-C: PRO- Before a PROFIBUS address can be changed, the corre-
FIBUS address is not configured. sponding PROFIBUS address must be configured with COM
PROFIBUS.
C6H 198 Error message from IM 308-C: DP The DP slave must be physically present and connected to
slave not responding to PROFIBUS the PROFIBUS-DP bus.
address change. (PROFIBUS address
does not exist).
C7H 199 Error message from IM 308-C: DP DP slave has responded with incorrect data; the CS command
slave not responding correctly to has not been processed by the DP slave.
PROFIBUS address change. Repeat the function FCT = CS. If the error message persists,
check the DP slave.
check the DP slave.
check the DP slave.
CAH 202 Error message from IM 308-C: DP DP slave unable to implement PROFIBUS address change;
slave not responding correctly to corresponding SAP not available to DP slave.
PROFIBUS address change.
DCH 220 Control command still being pro- The control command specified in the GCGR parameter is
cessed. still being processed. Do not process the input/outputs af-
fected by this command.
Repeat the FCT = CC.
DDH 221 The IM 308-C reports that diagnos- If you require consistent diagnostics data, call the
tics message is not consistent. FB IM308C again.
If you do not require consistent diagnostics data, you can
read the inconsistent diagnostics data from the specified tar-
get area.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-17

of ERR
Hex. Dec.
DEH 222 The IM 308-C is busy transferring Repeat the function call.
data to the DP slaves. Requested
function could not be executed.
DFH 223 No feedback from IM 308-C. The IM 308-C failed to send a feedback message to the
FB IM308C after function implementation.
or
IM 308-C did not return a feedback message to the
FB IM308C within 5 ms. Increase the baud rate.

7-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
7.4 Indirect parameterization
Indirect With indirect parameterization (FCT = XX), the FB IM308C takes the para-
parameterization meterization data from a parameterization data block and not from the block
parameters.
You must open the parameter data block before calling the FB IM308C.
If the parameter data block is too short or if none exists, the programmable
controller goes to STOP. All subsequent errors are intercepted by the
FB IM308C and output in the parameter data block.
The parameter data block must be structured as follows: you can find a de-
scription of the block parameters in section 7.3.
Table 7-11 Structure of the parameter data block for the FB IM308C
Data word Parameter Recommended data format

DW 0 Reserved KH
DW 1 DPAD KH
DW 2 IMST KY
DW 3 FCT KC
DW 4 GCGR KM
DW 5 TYP KY
DW 6 STAD KF
DW 7 LENG KF
DW 8 ERR KY
DW 91 – –
DW 101 – –
DW 111 – –
DW 121 – –
1: Data words DW 9 to DW 12 are required for the DP/AS-I link (see Appendix D.1).
Even if you do not address the DP/AS-I link with the FB IM308C, the parameter data
block must always include data words DW 0 to DW 12.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 7-19

7-20 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
IM 308-C – Starting ET 200 8
In this chapter This chapter contains all you need to know about startup, shutdown and fail-
ure of the ET 200 distributed I/O system when the IM 308-C master inter-
faces are in use.
Section Topic Page

8.1 Starting and operating ET 200 8-2
8.2 Response of the ET 200 distributed I/O system 8-4
8.3 Shutting down ET 200 and reaction to power failure 8-15
S5-95U as DP If you use an S5-95U as DP master, skip chapter 8 and proceed to chapter 11.
master
Goal After reading this chapter, you will have all the information you need to start
up the ET 200 distributed I/O system with IM 308-C master interfaces as DP
masters.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-1
IM 308-C – Starting ET 200
8.1 Starting and operating the ET 200
Preconditions We assume:
that you have already inserted the memory card(s) in the corresponding
IM 308-C master interface(s) (see section 5.4)
It is an essential precondition of starting up the CPU that a memory card
with a parameterized master system be inserted. If there is no memory
card with a parameterized master system, the CPU will not boot.
that you have exported the data for each master system to the master (see
section G.11)
that you have checked the configuration of the distributed I/O system.
Note
If the status of the IM 308-C is CLEAR, outputs are set to ”0” but the inputs
are still read.
If the CPU issues BASP (command output lock) while the status of the
IM 308-C is CLEAR, the inputs are updated continuously but data consis-
tency is not ensured for the inputs.
Normal IM 308-C If there is not yet a master system on the memory card of the IM 308-C and
start you want to export the master system online via the PROFIBUS using COM
PROFIBUS, the following default parameters are set on the IM 308-C:
PROFIBUS address: 1
Baud rate: 19.2 kbaud
The ”RN” and ”IF” LEDs light up, i.e. the IM 308-C has started up with an
empty memory card and is now waiting for you to export a master system
with COM PROFIBUS.
Starting the ET 200 When you are ready to start the ET 200 distributed I/O system:
(switching on)
1. Test the wiring to the sensors and actuators of the individual DP slaves
using the ”Status of inputs/outputs” service function of COM PROFIBUS.
Result: After testing the DP slaves, you are sure that each DP slave is
fully operational.

8-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
2. Connect all DP slaves and DP masters with the PROFIBUS bus cable.
3. Switch on the power supply units of the DP slaves.
4. Set the STOP/RUN switches of the DP slaves (if fitted) to RUN.
5. Set the mode selector switches of the IM 308-C from OFF or ST to RN.
6. Switch on the power supply of the hosts.
Result: The IM 308-C powers up (BF (Bus Fault) LED flashes) and loads
the slave parameters entered in COM PROFIBUS to the DP slaves.
After loading the slaves, the IM 308-C compares the configuration para-
meterized with COM PROFIBUS with the actual configuration.
The ”BF” LED on each of the DP slaves connected to the bus must go
out. When data is exchanged between all the parameterized DP slaves and
the IM 308-C, the ”BF” LED on the IM 308-C goes out as well.
7. Use COM PROFIBUS or the FB IM308C to check the diagnostics mes-
sages (FCT = MD). These messages will tell you whether or not data ex-
change with the CP slaves is functioning correctly.
8. Restart the CPU.
9. Via COM PROFIBUS or the AS 511 interface of the programmable con-
troller, you can display the statuses of the inputs/outputs of the DP slaves.
Warning
! If you use the STATUS/CONTROL function to address consistent data areas
via the AS 511 interface, communication on the PROFIBUS may be inter-
rupted (outputs of DP slaves without response monitoring may be frozen).
Remedy: Switch the power supply of the IM 308-C off and then on again.
To avoid this difficulty, do not use the STATUS/CONTROL function to ad-
dress consistent data areas.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-3
8.2 Response of the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Overview The reactions of the distributed I/O system to certain events are described in
this section:
Section Topic Page

8.2.1 Reaction when power supply is switched on 8-5
8.2.2 Reaction when the IM 308-C is switched to OFF, ST or RN 8-7
8.2.3 Reaction when the CPU is switched to STOP or RUN 8-9
8.2.4 Reaction when bus communication is interrupted or the DP slave 8-10
fails
8.2.5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or the DP slave is 8-14
again addressable

8-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
8.2.1 Reaction when power supply is switched on
Switching on the The table below shows you how the ET 200 distributed I/O system responds
power supply when you switch on the power supply to the host.
Table 8-1 Reaction when power supply is switched on
PS
Preconditions Reactions when power supply is switched on

CPU IM 308-C Error- CPU DP slave Diagnostics
reporting
mode
STOP/ OFF – CPU power-up is released. Outputs re- –
RUN You cannot access the inputs/outputs of the dis- tain their sta-
tributed I/O system. tus.
STOP/ ST QVZ1 CPU power-up is released. Outputs re- Only the

RUN You cannot access the inputs/outputs of the dis- tain their sta- master diag-
tributed I/O system. tus. nostics can
be read.
PEU1 CPU power-up is released.
Inputs are set to ”0”, outputs cannot be accessed
for write.
PEU remains set until all DP slaves with error-re-
porting mode = PEU are addressable.
None CPU power-up is released.
You cannot access the inputs/outputs of the dis-
tributed I/O system.
STOP/ RN QVZ1 CPU does not run up until all DP slaves are ad- CPU in Master and
RUN dressable or until power-up delay has expired. STOP: Out- slave diag-
After power-up, all DP slave inputs are set to the puts are set nostics can
current values. to ”0”. be read.
CPU in
PEU1 CPU does not run up until all DP slaves are ad-
RUN: Out-
dressable or until power-up delay has expired.
puts are up-
PEU remains set until all DP slaves with error-re- dated once
porting mode = PEU are addressable. the CPU has
After power-up, all DP slave inputs are set to the powered up.
current values.
None CPU powers up.
The inputs of the DP slaves are set to the current
values.
1: At least one DP slave must be configured for this error-reporting mode.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-5
CPU and IM 308-C Fig. 8-1 illustrates CPU and IM 308-C power-up when the power supply is
power-up switched on. The CPU and IM 308-C switches are already set to RUN/RN
and the error-reporting mode is ”QVZ” (acknowledgment delay).
IM 308-C and CPU power up
Switch on power supply for CPU and IM 308-C
CPU outputs BASP
IM 308-C runs up, enters the parameterized DP

slaves in the overview diagnostics and prevents
the CPU from powering up (CPKLA and PEU)
Station connecting cycle: IM 308-C connects the

DP slaves to the bus
IM 308-C removes addressable DP slaves from

overview diagnostics and enters them in data-
transfer list
Yes Have all DP slaves No

acknowledged?
No
Power-up delay ex-
pired?
Yes
IM 308-C releases CPU power-up

(CPKLA and PEU cleared)
CPU powers up and clears BASP
Data can be exchanged between CPU

and distributed I/O
Figure 8-1 IM 308-C and CPU power-up

8-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
8.2.2 Reaction when IM 308-C is switched to OFF, ST or RN
Operating modes Table 8-2 illustrates the meanings of the various operating modes of the
of the IM 308-C IM 308-C. Table 8-3 references these operating modes.
Note
When the IM 308-C changes its operating mode, there is a possibility that
consistency may be lost in data transferred while the change is in progress.
Table 8-2 Operating modes of the IM 308-C
Operating LEDs of the Meaning for the Meaning for the

mode IM 308-C DP slaves token ring
g
RN OF
RUN1 on off The IM 308-C reads all inputs and sets The IM 308-C can receive the token
the outputs (normal operation). p on
from another DP master and pass
th token.
the t k
CLEAR2 flashing off The IM 308-C reads all inputs, but sets
all outputs to ”0”.
STOP off flashing The IM 308-C does not exchange data
with the DP slaves.
OFF off on The IM 308-C does not exchange data The IM 308-C cannot receive the to-
with the DP slaves. ken or pass it on.
1: The mode selector switch position RN is not identical with the RUN mode.
2: You can access the CLEAR mode when the mode selector switch on the IM 308-C is in the RN position and the CPU
is in STOP.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-7
Reaction of the Table 8-3 indicates the reaction when the mode selector switch of the active
IM 308-C DP master on the bus is set to OFF, ST or RN.
Precondition: It is assumed that all DP slaves connected to the bus are ad-
dressable. If this is not the case, you must also make provision for the reac-
tions occurring when bus communication is interrupted or when a DP slave
fails (see section 8.2.4).
Note
If you have selected ”PEU” as the error-reporting mode and the IM 308-C is
OFF, ”QVZ” (acknowledgment delay) is reported instead of ”PEU” (power-
fail on expansion unit).
Table 8-3 Reaction when IM 308-C is switched to OFF, ST or RN
PS
Preconditions Reactions
CPU IM 308-C Error- CPU IM 308-C1 DP slaves
reporting
mode
STOP / St Off – No access to the inputs/outputs of the dis- OFF Status of outputs
RUN tributed I/O system. is sustained.
STOP / Off St QVZ2 No access to the inputs/outputs of the dis- STOP Status of outputs
RUN tributed I/O system. is sustained.
PEU2/None Inputs are set to ”0”, outputs cannot be set.
STOP / RN ST QVZ2 No access to the inputs/outputs of the dis- STOP Outputs are set to
RUN tributed I/O system. ”0”.
PEU2/ Inputs are set to ”0”, outputs cannot be set.
None
STOP ST RN – Inputs of the DP slave set to current val- CLEAR Outputs are set to
ues. ”0”.
RUN ST RN – Inputs of the DP slave set to current val- RUN Outputs are set to
ues. current values.
1 The modes of the IM 308-C are as defined in Table 8-2.
2 At least one DP slave must be configured for this error-reporting mode.

8-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
8.2.3 Reaction when CPU is switched to STOP or RUN
CPU reaction The table below shows the reactions when the mode selector switch of the
CPU is set to STOP or RUN while the bus is in operation.
Precondition: It is assumed that all DP slaves connected to the bus are ad-
dressable. If this is not the case, you must also make provision for the reac-
tions occurring when bus communication is interrupted or when a DP slave
fails (see section 8.2.4).
Note
If you switch the CPU to STOP or the CPU goes to STOP, the data trans-
ferred while the STOP is in progress is no longer consistent.
Table 8-4 Reaction when CPU is switched to STOP or RUN
PS
CPU IM 308-C Error- CPU IM 308-C 1 DP slaves
reporting
mode
RUN STOP OFF – If you switch the CPU to STOP or the OFF Status of out-
STOP RUN CPU goes to STOP, the data transferred puts is sus
sus-
while the STOP is in progress is no tained.
longer consistent.
RUN STOP ST QVZ2
Q If you
y switch the CPU to STOP or the STOP Status of out-
STOP RUN CPU goes to STOP,
STOP the data transferred puts is sus-
sus
while the STOP is in progress is no tained.
longer consistent.
PEU2/ Inputs are set to ”0”, outputs cannot be set.
None
RUN STOP RN – Inputs of the DP slave set to current CLEAR Outputs are
values set to ”0”.
STOP RUN RN – Inputs of the DP slave set to current RUN Outputs are
values. set to current
values.
1 The modes of the IM 308-C are as defined in Table 8-2.
2 At least one DP slave must be configured for this error-reporting mode.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-9
8.2.4 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of the

DP slave
Overview The reaction to an interruption in bus communication or the failure of one or

more DP slaves depends on the error mode you selected with COM PROFI-
BUS. The various possibilities are shown in the table below.
Note
If bus communication with a DP slave is interrupted, the DP slave fails or,
for example, the bus connector of the IM 308-C is pulled, there is a possibil-
ity of the most recently received data losing its consistency.
The same applies when bus communication is reestablished or the DP slave
is again addressable.
Remedy: If you require consistent data, you must re-address the data.

8-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
QVZ QVZ (acknowledgment delay) occurs when an addressable memory area on

(acknowledgment the IM 308-C fails to return the READY signal (acknowledgment) within a
delay) certain time after being addressed by the CPU.
Table 8-5 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of a DP slave (with QVZ)
Failed
DP slave Remaining DP slaves
Failed DP Reaction Reaction of failed DP slave(s): Reaction of remaining DP slaves:
slave(s)1: of CPU:
The inputs in the CPU are set to ”0”. The inputs in the CPU are updated as
Response moni-
The outputs of the DP slaves are ... before. The outputs on the DP slaves
toring
are ...
No RUN2 frozen. updated as before
Yes RUN2 set to ”0” when response time expires. updated as before.
No STOP frozen. set to ”0”.
Exception: If the CPU belongs to the
S5-115 7UB.. series, the outputs in the
process image up to byte 79 are set to ”0”
and frozen as of byte 80.
Yes STOP set to ”0” when response time expires. set to ”0”.
1 QVZ (acknowledgment delay) is triggered by default for the CPU. The reaction of the CPU to QVZ depends, for
example, on whether OBs 23 and 24 have been programmed and on the setting selected in the DX0 for the S5-135U
CPUs.
2 The ”QVZ” LED lights up.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-11
PEU (powerfail in The I/O system reacts by issuing the PEU signal (powerfail in expansion
expansion unit) unit),
if a power failure occurs in an expansion unit
if a DP slave fails and PEU was selected as the error-reporting mode in
COM PROFIBUS.
Table 8-6 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of a DP slave (with PEU)
Failed
Failed DP Reaction of CPU Reaction of failed DP Reaction of the remain-

slave(s): slave(s): ing DP slaves:
moni-
Response moni The inputs in the CPU The inputs in the CPU
toring are set to ”0”. The out- are updated as before.
puts of the DP slaves are The outputs on the DP
... slaves are ...
No S5-115U:
No OB 35 programmed: CPU frozen. set to ”0”.
goes to and remains in STOP.
OB 35 programmed (applicable frozen. frozen.
to 945 CPUs only): CPU re-
mains in RUN and performs
OB 35 while PEU is pending.
S5 135U, S5-155U:
S5-135U, S5 155U: CPU goes to frozen. set to ”0”.
0 .
STOP 1
Yes S5-115U:
No OB 35 programmed: CPU set to ”0” when response set to ”0”.
goes and remains in STOP. monitoring time expires.
OB 35 programmed (applicable set to ”0” when response frozen.
to 945 CPUs only): CPU re- monitoring time expires.
mains in RUN and performs
OB 35 while PEU is pending.
S5 135U, S5-155U:
S5-135U, S5 155U: CPU goes to set to ”0”
0 when response set to ”0”.
0 .
STOP 1 monitoring time expires.
1 Once PEU is cleared, the CPU powers up again via OB 22 (automatic restart).

8-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Error-reporting If you selected ”none” as the error-reporting mode in COM PROFIBUS,

mode ”none” ET 200 responds as follows:
Caution
! If you selected ”none” as the error-reporting mode, you can only detect an
error in the distributed I/O in the application program by means of diagnos-
tics analysis with the IM308C.
Consequently, we strongly recommend that ”none” be selected as the error-
reporting mode only for initial operation.
Table 8-7 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of a DP slave (error-reporting mode ”none”)
Failed
Failed DP Reaction of CPU Reaction of failed DP slave(s): Reaction of remaining DP slaves:

slave(s): Re-
Re
Inputs in the CPU are set to ”0”, The inputs in the CPU are up-
sponse monitor-
outputs on the DP slave are ... dated as before. The outputs on
ing
the DP slaves are ...
No CPU remains in frozen. updated as before.
RUN
Yes CPU remains in set to ”0” when response monitor- updated as before.
RUN ing time expires.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-13
8.2.5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or DP slave is again

addressable
Reaction The table below shows the reactions when bus communication is reestab-
lished or a failed DP slave is again addressable. The reactions depend on the
error-reporting mode selected.
Note
If bus communication with a DP slave is interrupted, the DP slave fails or,
for example, the bus connector of the IM 308-C is pulled, there is a possibil-
ity of the most recently received data losing its consistency.
The same applies when bus communication is reestablished or the DP slave
is again addressable.
Remedy: If you require consistent data, you must re-address the data.
Table 8-8 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or DP slave is again addressable
Failed
DP slave Remaining DP slave
Failed Reaction of failed DP slave(s): Reaction of remaining
DP slave(s): DP slaves:
Response Error- The inputs in the CPU are set to ”0”. The outputs of the The inputs in the CPU
moni- reporting
p g DP slaves are ... are updated
p as before.
toring mode o tp ts on the DP
The outputs
Response monitoring Response monitoring time not yet
slaves are ...
time expired: expired:
No QVZ1/ ... set to the last value prior to the interruption and then up- ... updated as before.
None dated.
No PEU1 ... set to the last value prior to the interruption and then up- ... updated as again.
dated.
Yes QVZ1/ ... updated as again. ... set to the last value prior to the ... updated as before.
None interruption and then updated.
Yes PEU1 ... updated as again. ... set to the last value prior to the ... updated as again.
interruption and then updated.
1: At least one DP slave must be configured for this error-reporting mode.

8-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
8.3 Switching off ET 200 and reaction to power failure
Switching off the The procedure for shutting down the ET 200 distributed I/O system is always
ET 200 as follows:
1. Set the STOP/RUN switch of the CPU to STOP.
2. Set the mode selector switch of the IM 308-C from RN to ST or OFF.
3. Switch off the power supply of the host.
4. Switch off the power supply to the DP slaves and
5. Set the STOP/RUN switch on each DP slave (if fitted) to STOP.
Warning
! If response monitoring for DP slaves is deactivated and only the power sup-
ply for the host is switched off, outputs may be inadvertently set.
In this case, set the IM 308-C to ST before switching off the power supply of
the host, or always proceed in accordance with the shutdown sequence out-
lined above.
What do I do if the If you selected ”QVZ = Yes” as the error-reporting mode in COM PROFI-
power supply BUS, the CPU may refuse to restart when power is reapplied after a total
fails? power failure. The reasons are as follows:
If the power supply to the slaves fails just before that of the DP master,
the CPU with QVZ goes to STOP.
When mains power is reapplied, the CPU remains in STOP on account of
QVZ.
Remedy: Your options are as follows:
Restart the CPU
or
program the appropriate OBs for QVZ, e.g. OB 23/24
or
select ”PEU” as the error-reporting mode instead of ”QVZ”
or
buffer the power supplies to the DP slaves in such a way that the CPU
always goes down before the DP slaves if a total power failure occurs.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 8-15

8-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Design and method of operation of the
S5-95U with DP master interface 9
Section Topic Page

9.1 Design of the S5-95U 9-2
9.2 Pin assignment of the DP master interface 9-5
9.3 Data exchange between S5-95U and DP slaves 9-6
9.4 Technical data of the S5-95U 9-8
9.5 Installing S5-95U and 32 K EEPROM 9-10
9.6 Saving to 32 K EEPROM in the S5-95U (File Export 9-11
DP master)
Goal After reading this chapter you will have basic knowledge of the design and
method of operation of the S5-95U with DP master interface.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 9-1
Design and method of operation of the S5-95U with DP master interface
9.1 Design of the S5-95U
Front view of the This is a front view of the S5-95U, showing all the indicators, controls and
S5-95U interfaces.
Figure 9-1 Front view of the S5-95U with DP master interface
Indicators, The table below explains the indicators, controls and interfaces of the
controls S5-95U with DP master interface.
and interfaces
Table 9-1 The indicators, controls and interfaces of the S5-95U
Callout Designation Purpose

in Fig.
9-1
1 Battery compart- Receives the backup battery
ment
The backup battery keeps the internal memory retentive when there is
a power failure or when the S5-95U is switched off.
2 Front connector The front connector is the terminal block for the signal lines of the digital
inputs (I 32.0 to I 33.7) and outputs (O 32.0 to O 33.7) and it establishes
the connection to the S5-95U.
3 Battery low indi- If this LED lights up, the backup battery is discharged.
cator
4 ON/OFF switch Switches the S5-95U on or off.

9-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table 9-1 The indicators, controls and interfaces of the S5-95U, continued
Callout Designation Purpose

in Fig.
9-1
5 LEDs for digital LED lights up when the signal state of the digital input/output is ”1”.
inputs/outputs
6 Terminals for These terminals connect the S5-95U to the power supply unit.
power supply
7 Jack for I/O mod- If you want to add I/O modules to the S5-95U, connect the ribbon
ules cable of a bus module to this jack.
8 Port for analog in- Port for the D-sub connector with the signal lines of the analog inputs
puts and analog (IW 40 to IW 54) and the analog output (OW 40).
output
9 PROFIBUS-DP The PROFIBUS-DP interface connects the field bus to the S5-95U by
interface means of a bus connector.
10 LED ”BF” See Table 9-2.
11 Mode indicator Green LED on: S5-95U is in RUN
Red LED on: S5-95U is in STOP
For details, see Table 9-2
12 Mode selector Meaning for PROFIBUS-DP
switch
RUN: normal operation; S5-95U cyclically reads the input data of the
DP slaves and sends output data to the DP slaves. The S5-95U can re-
ceive the token from another DP master and pass on the token.
STOP: The S5-95U cannot exchange data with the DP slaves, but it
can receive the token (send authorization) from another DP master on
the bus and pass on the token. All outputs of the DP slaves are set to
”0”. The inputs of the S5-95U are reset.
For a detailed description of the mode selector switch in the S5-95U
without PROFIBUS-DP, see the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U
Programmable Controller.
13 Slot for memory Accommodates the memory module (32 K EEPROM)
module
All important configuration data for the bus layout and the STEP 5
application program is stored on the 32 K EEPROM.
14 Interface for pro- This interface enables you to connect a programmer, TD, OP or the
grammer, PC, OP S5-95U as a slave to the SINEC-L1 bus.
or SINEC L1
15 Port for alarm and Port for the D-sub connector with the signal lines of the alarm inputs
counter inputs (I 34.1 to I 34.3) and counter inputs (IW 36, IW 38).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 9-3
Significance of the The significance of the ”BF”, ”RUN” and ”STOP” LEDs is as follows:
LEDs
Table 9-2 Significance of the ”BF”, ”RUN” and ”STOP” LEDs of the S5-95U
BF RUN STOP Meaning Remedy

LED LED LED
Off On Off All parameterized DP slaves are –
addressable
Flashes On Off At least one DP slave cannot be Check the DP slaves and analyze
addressed the slave diagnostics.
On Off On Bus short-circuit or Check the bus cable and the bus
configuration or
terminating resistors missing or
Check whether the DP master re-
parameterization error (invalid
ceives the token (highest station
HSA)
address not correct in the bus pa-
rameters; the HSA is lower than
the PROFIBUS address of a DP
master).
After rectifying the error, switch
the power supply to the S5-95U
off and then on again.
Off On On Power-up delay (see sec- –
tion G.8.2) or OB 21/OB 22
Off Off Flicker- DP parameters being transferred –
ing in S5-95U between control and
communications processors or
STEP 5 application program be-
ing saved or read (Copy button
pressed)

9-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
9.2 Pin assignment of the DP master interface
Purpose of the The DP master interface enables you to connect distributed I/Os to the
interface S5-95U via the PROFIBUS-DP bus.
Assignment The DP master interface is a 9-pole D-sub port in compliance with the PRO-
FIBUS-DP draft standard.
Table 9-3 Pin assignment of the DP master interface on the S5-95U

1 – Function ground
2 – –
5 3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
4
8 5 M5V2 Data reference potential (from sta-
3
7 tion)
6
1 7 – –
9 – Internal assignment
Parallel operation Parallel operation of the DP master interface and programmer interface (e.g.
SINEC L1 on programmer interface) is possible.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 9-5
9.3 Exchange of data between S5-95U and DP slaves
Exchange of data The S5-95U and the DP slaves exchange data through the agency of the con-
trol and communications processors in the S5-95U.
The link to PROFIBUS-DP is established via the DP master interface.
Functions of the The functions discharged by the control processor of the S5-95U with regard
control processor to communication via PROFIBUS-DP are as follows:
Load DP parameter set from 32 K EEPROM/ save to 32 K EEPROM
Ready output data for the DP slaves in the STEP 5 application program
Process the master and slave diagnostics in the STEP 5 application pro-
gram (diagnostics fetched by FB 230)
Process input data in the STEP 5 application program and pass on to the
I/O of the S5-95U
Functions of the The communications processor of the S5-95U handles the data traffic via the
communications PROFIBUS-DP parallel to the control processor. Its functions are as follows:
processor
Accept the token (send authorization) from a DP master and pass on the
token to another DP master
Parameterize DP slaves (send parameterization data to DP slaves)
Copy input data from the receive buffer of the communications processor
to the address space in the S5-95U (control processor)
Copy output data from the address space of the S5-95U (control proces-
sor) to the send buffer of the communications processor

9-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Operating This illustration shows the principle of data exchange as implemented in the
principle S5-95U.
DP master: S5-95U DP slave: e. g. ET 200B

Control Communication
processor processor
Application program

Send buffer Address spaces:
Outputs
Inputs
SINEC L2-DP
Receive Outputs
Inputs
buffer
PLC cycle DP cycle
Figure 9-2 Principle of data exchange between S5-95U and DP slave
PLC cycle The application program writes the output data into the appropriate address
space of the S5-95U .
The exchange of data between the control processor and the control processor
takes place at the cycle checkpoint of the S5-95U.
At the cycle checkpoint, the communications processor copies:
the output data from the address space to its send buffer
and simultaneously
the input data to the corresponding address space of the S5-95U .
The input data can be processed in the application program .
DP cycle The S5-95U receives data from the DP slaves. This data is written to the re-
ceive buffer of the communications processor . At the same time, the out-
put data is sent to the DP slaves .
The exchange of data between the DP master and DP slaves takes place cy-
clically and is independent of the cycle checkpoint of the S5-95U.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 9-7
9.4 Technical data of the S5-95U
Technical data The technical data of the S5-95U with DP master interface is listed in the
table below. General technical data applicable to all versions of the S5-95U is
to be found in the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller.
Table 9-4 Technical data of the S5-95U with DP master interface
Technical data
Extension of alarm reaction time 0.5 ms
Maximum PLC cycle load time 0.5 ms
in PROFIBUS-DP operation (per
program cycle)
Internal power supply
Input voltage rated: DC 24 V
permissible range: 20 to 30 V
Current consumption at 24 V for the PLC: typ. 280 mA
full config. ext. I/O: typ. 1.2 mA
Output voltage U1 (for ext. I/O): + 9 V
U2 (for programmer/PROFIBUS-DP
interface): + 5.2 V
Output current from U1: 1 A

from U2 total: 0.65 A
from U2 for PROFIBUS interface:
0.1 A
Short-circuit protection for U1, yes, electronic

U2 (programmer)
Short-circuit/overvoltage protec- yes, fuse
tion
for U2 (PROFIBUS-DP inter- 250 mA, fast-blow
face)
Potential isolation no
Protection class I

9-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table 9-4 Technical data of the S5-95U with DP master interface, continued
Technical data
Special PROFIBUS-DP data
Number of S5-95Us as DP mas- max. 124 DP masters
ters on the PROFIBUS-DP
Number of DP slaves per S5-95U max. 16 DP slaves
as DP master
Baud rates 9.6 kbaud to 1.5 Mbaud
Address volume for PROFIBUS- 128 bytes for outputs
DP
128 bytes for inputs
2 bytes overview diagnostics
Integrated organization blocks OB 1, OB 3, OB 13, OB 21, OB 22,
OB 31, OB 34, OB 251
Integrated function blocks FB 230, FB 240, FB 241, FB 242,
FB 243, FB 250, FB 251

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 9-9
9.5 Installing S5-95U and 32 K EEPROM
Installing S5-95U You install the S5-95U with DP master interface in just the same way as any
other S5-95U version. The installation procedure for the S5-95U is described
in detail in the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller,
Chapter 3.
32 K EEPROM for If you use the S5-95U as DP master, you need a special memory module, an
S5-95U EEPROM with 32 Kbytes capacity, included in the scope of supply of the
S5-95U with DP master interface.
On the 32 K EEPROM, 19.9 Kbytes are reserved for the STEP 5 application
program and 12 Kbytes are reserved for the configuration data (compressed
data).
In case you have to re-order the 32 K EEPROM, you will find the order num-
ber in Appendix G.
Purpose of the The 32 K EEPROM is used as the storage medium for:

32 K EEPROM
the configuration data parameterized beforehand with COM PROFIBUS
the STEP 5 application program (including block headers of the inte-
grated FBs)
Installing/ The procedure for installing/replacing the 32 K EEPROM is as follows:

changing the
1. Set the S5-95U to STOP.
32 K EEPROM
2. Set the ON/OFF switch on the S5-95U to ”O”.
3. Remove the original EEPROM, if applicable.
4. Insert the new EEPROM.
5. Set the ON/OFF switch on the S5-95U to ”I”.
6. Reset the S5-95U to RUN.

9-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
9.6 Saving to 32 K EEPROM in the S5-95U (File " Export " DP master)
32 K EEPROM for If you have the S5-95U as DP master, you use a special memory module, an
S5-95U EEPROM with a capacity of 32 Kbytes, supplied with the S5-95U with DP
master interface.
ber in Appendix G.
Preconditions To export data directly to the S5-95U:

S The online functions of COM PROFIBUS must be installed (see
COM PROFIBUS manual)
S The programmer/PC must be connected either to the PROFIBUS or di-
rectly to the DP master
S The 32 K EEPROM must be installed on the S5-95U (see section 9.5)
Note
The data of a master system cannot be saved by inserting the 32 K EEPROM
in the EEPROM slot of the programmer or an external programming unit.
You can only save the data of a master system in the S5-95U when the 32 K
EEPROM is inserted in the S5-95U.
Saving data to You can only export the data you have parameterized with COM PROFIBUS
S5-95U to the S5-95U via the PROFIBUS-DP. The S5-95U automatically sets the
baud rate to 19.2 kbaud and the PROFIBUS address to ”1” after a general
reset (battery removed and POWER DOWN/POWER UP or programmer
command).
Tip: Save the application program on the 32 K EEPROM before you carry
out a general reset. In this case, the S5-95U will load the application program
after the POWER DOWN/POWER UP.
Saving The procedure for saving the configuration data to the 32 K EEPROM is as
configuration data follows:
to 32 K EEPROM
2. In COM PROFIBUS, select File " Export " DP Master.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 9-11
3. Enter the current baud rate of the DP master (default after general reset =
19.2 kbaud). The current baud rate is available in EB 63 (value 05H is not
used):
Table 9-5 Contents of EB 63 (baud rate)
EB 63 Baud rate
00H 9.6 kbaud
01H 19.2 kbaud
02H 93.75 kbaud
03H 187.5 kbaud
04H 500 kbaud
06H 1,500 kbaud
4. Enter the current station number of the DP master (default after general
reset = STN1). The current station number is available as a hexadecimal
value in EB 62.
Result: COM PROFIBUS exports the configuration data to the S5-95U. It
then asks whether you want to activate the exported configuration data
immediately in the S5-95U.
5. If there is only one S5-95U on the PROFIBUS, activate the exported con-
figuration data immediately.
If there are two or more DP masters on the PROFIBUS, answer ”No” to
the prompt instead. Export all the parameterization data to the DP masters
first, then activate it with Service Activate Parameters.
Result: If the configuration data is exported successfully, it is stored in
compressed form in the 32 K EEPROM (STOP LED flickers).
If the configuration data is not exported successfully, the S5-95U resumes
with the old bus parameters of the 32 K EEPROM. If the 32 K EEPROM
is blank, the default values are used.
If the export of the configuration data to the S5-95U is interrupted – e.g.
if the bus connector is withdrawn or an error occurs on the bus – you must
POWER DOWN/POWER UP.
6. Reset the S5-95U from STOP to RUN. After a STOP-RUN transition, the
S5-95U operates with the new configuration data.
General reset of If you perform a general reset (with a programmer command or by removing
the 32 K EEPROM the backup battery and using DB 1 parameter ”LNPG n”; see section 10.3),
only the configuration data on the 32 K EEPROM is deleted. The STEP 5
application program is deleted from the 32 K EEPROM if you then press the
”Copy” button.

9-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
S5-95U – addressing, accessing the dis-
tributed I/O and diagnostics with STEP 5 10
Section Topic Page

10.1 Address areas and options for addressing 10-2
10.2 Accessing the distributed I/O 10-3
10.3 Parameterizing the S5-95U (DP master) in DB 1 10-4
10.4 Diagnostics in the STEP 5 application program of the S5-95U 10-6
10.5 Monomaster and multimaster modes with S5-95U as DP master 10-13
IM 308-C as DP If you have an IM 308-C as DP master, skip chapter 10 and read chapter 6
master instead.
you need in order to write the STEP 5 application program.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 10-1
S5-95U – addressing, accessing the distributed I/O and diagnostics with STEP 5
10.1 Address areas and options for addressing
Address areas Table 10-1 shows which address areas can be used in the S5-95U for distrib-
uted I/O, how access is implemented in the STEP 5 application program and
how many inputs/outputs are available.
Table 10-1 Addressing with S5-95U as DP master
Address area Access by ... Max.

(absolute address) inputs/outputs
6338H to 6339H PY 56 to PY 57 2-byte overview diagnostics
6340H to 637FH PY 64 to PY 127 64 bytes for inputs
5700H to 573FH PY 128 to PY 191 64 bytes for inputs
63C0H to 63FFH PY 64 to PY 127 64 bytes for outputs
5780H to 57BFH PY 128 to PY 191 64 bytes for outputs
Caution
! Danger of double address assignments.
Input/output bytes 64 to 127 are used by the local I/O (e.g. analog input/out-
put modules, slots 0 to 7) as well as the distributed I/O (DP slaves).
If you use local I/O (e.g. analog input/output modules), you must reserve the
address areas with COM PROFIBUS in the host parameters (see Table G-8,
section G.8.2).
Addressing If you use the S5-95U as DP master, linear addressing is the only option. You
options must assign one and only one address to each input/output of a DP slave.
Defining ”Linear” is predefined as a master parameter in COM PROFIBUS. This

addressing mode applies to all DP slaves assigned to the DP master.

10-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
10.2 Accessing the distributed I/O
Access to Once you have assigned the inputs and outputs of the distributed I/O with
addresses COM PROFIBUS, you can use the STEP 5 application program to access the
inputs and outputs of the distributed I/O:
access addresses v 127 via the process image
access addresses w 128 via load and transfer operations
Access operations The P-area is at your disposal for linear addressing. Table 10-2 shows the
operations you can use.
Table 10-2 Linear addressing with S5-95U as DP master
P area I/O address Address for direct access Access operations

Inputs 56 to 57 6338H to 6339H U E x.y / UN E x.y
O E x.y / ON E x.y
L EB x L EW x
64 to 127 6340H to 637FH U E x.y / UN E x.y
O E x.y / ON E x.y
L EB x L EW x
128 to 191 5700H to 573FH L PY x L PW x
LIR TNB
Outputs 64 to 127 63C0H to 63FFH S A x.y R A x.y
= A x.y
T AB x T AW x
128 to 191 5780H to 57BFH T PY x T PW x
TIR TNB
Data consistency There are two consistent areas, I/O address 64 to 127 and 128 to 191. If these
areas overlap in a DP slave the result is data inconsistency: overlap must
therefore be avoided. The S5-95U recognizes data consistency for a DP
slave. If you specify module-granular consistency for a DP slave, the S5-95U
still treats the data consistently for the DP slave as such.
Nesting depth If you exceed the maximum nesting depth (8) for the S5-95U, the CPU goes
to STOP with STUEB. At the same time, the data transfer via the PROFI-
BUS-DP master interface is terminated; the S5-95U is removed from the to-
ken ring.
Remedy: Modify the STEP 5 application program and then POWER
DOWN/POWER UP the system.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 10-3
10.3 Parameterizing the S5-95U (DP master) in DB 1
Parameters in DB 1 You must set the ”LNPG” parameter (= general reset with programmer only)
in DB 1 for the S5-95U as DP master (release 3 and later versions).
0: KC =’DB1 OBA: AI 0 ; OBI: ’;

12: KC =’ ; OBC: CAP N CBP ’
24: KC =’N ;#SL1: SLN 1 SF ’
36: KC =’DB2 DW0 EF DB3 DW0 ’
48: KC =’ KBE MB100 KBS MB1’
60: KC =’01 PGN 1 ;# SDP: N’ You can find the meanings of these default
72: KC =’T 128 PBUS N ; TFB: OB13’ parameters in the system manual
84: KC =’ 100 ; #CLP: STW MW10’ S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controllers
96: KC =’2 CLK D85 DW0 ’
108: KC =’ SET 3 01.10.91 12:00:’
120: KC =’00 OHS 000000:00:00 ’
132: KC =’ TIS 3 01.10. 12:00:00 ’
144: KC =’ STP Y SAV Y CF 00 ’
156: KC =’ ; # DPM: LNPG n ; END ’
168:
Parameter for S5-95U as DP master
Figure 10-1 DB 1 with default parameters
Meaning of You can use the ”LNPG” parameter (= general reset with programmer only)
”LNPG” to specify whether or not the S5-95U – and thus also the master system trans-
ferred with COM PROFIBUS – is completely reset if the power supply fails
and is subsequently restored, but there is no battery.
Note: The general reset does not affect the STEP 5 application program on
the EEPROM.
Table 10-3 Meaning of the ”LNPG” parameter in DB 1 of the S5-95U
Param- Argu- Meaning

eter ment
LNPG n = No; if the power supply fails and is subsequently
restored, but there is no battery, the S5-95U is com-
pletely reset.
(default)
y = Yes; if the power supply fails and is subsequently
restored, but there is no battery, the S5-95U is not
completely reset, i.e. a general reset of the S5-95U is
only possible in conjunction with the programmer. The
parameters entered in the master system remain stored.
DB 1 must be copied to the EEPROM with the COPY
key before the ”LNPG” parameter takes effect.

10-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Procedure A default DB 1 is integrated in the operating system of the S5-95U. To edit

this DB 1, proceed as follows:
1. Load the default DB 1 onto your programmer (transfer function, source:
programmable controller, destination: FD (programmer)).
2. Search for the ”LNPG” parameter and overwrite the ”n” with a ”y” if nec-
essary.
When you edit DB 1, it is essential to follow the rules for parameterizing
this data block as described in the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Pro-
grammable Controllers, section 9.4.
3. Transfer the new DB 1 to the S5-95U. In doing so, you overwrite the de-
fault DB 1.
4. Trigger a STOP-RUN transition. The S5-95U thus accepts the changed
parameters.
5. Copy DB 1 to the EEPROM by means of the COPY key. Not until you do
this does the ”LNPG” parameter take effect.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 10-5
10.4 Diagnostics in the STEP 5 application program of the

S5-95U
Overview Diagnostics means identifying and pinpointing errors. You require the inte-
grated function block FB 230 of the S5-95U to read the diagnostics data.
Section Topic Page

10.4.1 Requesting overview diagnostics 10-7
10.4.2 Requesting slave diagnostics 10-8
10.4.3 Standard function block FB 230 10-10
Structure of Diagnostics consists of overview diagnostics and slave diagnostics.

diagnostics
Overview
... indicates which DP slaves reports diagnostics (EW 56)
diagnostics
... current station number (EB 62) and baud rate (EB 63), see
STN / baud rate
section G.11.2
Slave diagnostics
Station ... provides an overview of the diagnostics of a

Slave diagnostics (via FB 230)
status DP slave
Master stat. No. ... indicates which DP master parameterized
the DP slave
Manufacturer ID ... indicates the type of DP slave
Slave-specific diagnostics
The scope of the slave-spe-

cific diagnostics depends on
type of slave Dev.- ... provides general information on
spec. diag. the DP slave
ID- ... indicates which module in a
specific diag. DP slave reports an error
Channel diagnostics ... indicates which chan-

nel in the DP slave re-
ports an error
Figure 10-2 Structure of diagnostics

10-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
10.4.1 Requesting overview diagnostics
Overview In diagnostics word EW 56, each bit is assigned to a DP slave. A ”1” means
diagnostics that the DP slave in question has reported diagnostics or that the DP slave
cannot be addressed by the DP master.
Structure of The table below shows the structure of overview diagnostics:

overview
diagnostics
Table 10-4 Overview diagnostics
Diagnos- Input Bits correspond to the DP slaves with lowest to highest PROFIBUS Format of
tics byte addresses: data re-
(lowest PROFIBUS address: E 56.0 ceived
highest PROFIBUS address with 16 DP slaves: E 57.7)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Over- 56 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 KM
view
i
diagnos- 57 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 KM
tics
Interpreting Query the EW 56 in the STEP 5 application program and call the FB 230.
overview When you call the FB 230, the bits in EW 56 are reset.
diagnostics
In order to avoid resetting the bits in EW 56, you can start an additional FB
in each cycle which updates the slave diagnostics data, even if EW 56 is reset
by the FB 230 (see section D.2).
Example The STEP 5 application program below shows how overview diagnostics can
be interpreted.
AWL Explanation
.
. custom application program
.
: L KM 00000000 00000000
: L EW 56 load diagnostics word EW 56
: !=F no station with errors?
: BEB
: SPB FB230 if errors, then request station diag-
nostics with FB 230
What to do next On the basis of the overview diagnostics, you can see what kind of diagnos-
tics message you have to deal with. You should now analyze the slave diag-
nostics.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 10-7
10.4.2 Requesting slave diagnostics
Definition Slave diagnostics comprises a maximum of 34 bytes and is structured as fol-

lows:
Number of the slave station that has submitted diagnostics data (1 byte)
Number of diagnostics bytes (1 byte)
Station status 1 to 3 (length: 3 bytes)
Station status 1 to 3 reflects the status of a DP slave.
Master-PROFIBUS address (length: 1 byte)
The diagnostics byte for the master PROFIBUS address contains the
PROFIBUS address of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave.
Manufacturer ID (length: 2 bytes)
The manufacturer ID contains a code with describes the type of the DP
slave.
Device-specific diagnostics (length depends on the type of DP slave)
The device-specific diagnostics provides general information on the DP
slave.
ID-specific diagnostics (length depends on the type of DP slave)
The ID-specific diagnostics indicates which module in which slot is
faulty.
Channel diagnostics (length depends on the type of DP slave)
Channel diagnostics indicates which channel of a DP slave has an error
message.
Requesting slave To request slave diagnostics, you must call the FB 230 in the STEP 5 applica-
diagnostics tion program.
Result: The FB 230 places the slave diagnostics data in a data block that you
created beforehand in the STEP 5 application program.

10-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Structure of slave Slave diagnostics is structured as follows:

diagnostics
Table 10-5 Structure of slave diagnostics (S5-95U)
DW Meaning, DL Meaning, DR
0 Number of the slave station, which Number of diagnostics bytes
submitted diagnostics data
1 Station status 1 Station status 2
2 Station status 3 Master PROFIBUS address
3 Manufacturer ID
4 to 16 Other slave-specific diagnostics
(device-specific, ID-specific or channel diagnostics,
always depending on the DP slave, see sections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2)
Station status and The structure of the bytes for station statuses 1 to 3 and the master
master PROFIBUS PROFIBUS address is based on EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS and is
address independent of the DP master used.
The meanings of the bits are explained in section 6.4, Tables 6-8, 6-9 and
6-10.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 10-9
10.4.3 Standard function block FB 230
Function of the You must call the FB 230 in the STEP 5 application program in order to re-
FB 230 quest slave diagnostics.
Calling the FB 230 resets EW 56 (overview diagnostics). In order to avoid
resetting the bits in EW 56, you can start an additional FB in each cycle
which updates the slave diagnostics data, even if EW 56 is reset by the
FB 230 (see section D.2).
Calling the FB 230 In the simplest case, the FB 230 is called in cyclic program processing.
If you call the FB 230 in the process alarm or the time alarm processing, you
must implement measures in the STEP 5 application program to ensure that
the FB 230 does not interrupt itself. You do this by disabling the alarms be-
fore each FB 230 call and enabling the alarms again once the FB 230 has
been called.
Creating the DB Before you call the FB 230 in the STEP 5 application program, you must
create the data block for the diagnostics data: note that this data block must
be at least 17 data words in length.
See sections 10.4.2 and 6.4 for details of the structure of slave diagnostics.

10-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Block parameters The table below shows the meanings of the block parameters which you must
send to the FB 230 in the STEP 5 application program. You can call the
FB 230 with direct or indirect parameterization.
Table 10-6 Meanings of the block parameters of the FB 230
Name Mode Type Designation Valid assignment

S_NR D KY PROFIBUS address KY = x, y
of the DP slave from x = 0: Direct parameterization
which you request y = 0 to 15: STN acc. to Table 10-4
diagnostics data y > 15 Lowest station that has reported diagnosis
or
x<>0: Indirect parameterization
y: Irrelevant if parameterization is indirect
DB_NR D KY Target data block for KY = x, y
storing the diagnos- If parameterization is direct:
tics data
x = 2 to 255 DB No.
y = 0 to 255 DW No.
Diagnostics data is written to the data block starting at the
DW you specify.
If parameterization is indirect:
x = 2 to 255 DB No.
y = 0 to 255 DW No.
The PROFIBUS address and the DB No. of the target data
block for the diagnostics data are written, starting at the DW
you specify. The high byte of the PROFIBUS address param-
eter must have the value ”0”.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 10-11
Example of an This STEP 5 application program is an example illustrating how you can re-
FB 230 call quest slave diagnostics with the FB 230 for the following DP slaves: STN 5,
STN 20, STN 110, STN 123.
STL Explanation
: U E 56.0 If station with lowest number (here STN 5) is errored,
: SPB FB230 then call the FB 230
Name : S_DIAG
S_NR : KY0,0 Direct parameterization, station with lowest
PROFIBUS address (here STN 5) on the PROFIBUS-DP
DBNR : KY230,0 Slave diagnostics data (18 DW) is written to DB 230 starting
at DW 0
: U E 56.2 If station with 3rd lowest PROFIBUS address (here STN 110) is
errored,
: SPB FB230 then call the FB 230
Name : S_DIAG
S_NR : KY1,y 1 = indirect parameterization, y = irrelevant
DBNR : KY11,10 Parameters stored in DB 11 starting at DW 10
Contents of DB 11
DW 10 = 0002H --> 02H = 3rd lowest station

must be 00H!
DW 11 = 0C0AH --> 0CH = 12 ––> DB 12
0AH = 10 ––> DW 10
--> slave diagnostics data of station 110

(= 3rd lowest station) stored in DB 12 starting at DW 10
Technical data The technical data of the FB 230 is listed in the table below:
Table 10-7 Technical data of the FB 230
Technical data FB 230

Library number P71200-S 1230-A1
Length of call 4 data words
Block length 17 data words
Nesting depth 1
Runtime in ms < 6.5 ms

10-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
10.5 Monomaster and multimaster modes with S5-95U as DP master
Monomaster mode Monomaster mode means that there is one DP master on the bus. No other
DP master is operating elsewhere on the bus.
DP master
Master system 1
S5-95U
Figure 10-3 S5-95U – monomaster mode
Multimaster mode Multimaster mode means that there are at least two masters on the bus, for
example an S5-95U and an IM 308-C, or two S5-95Us.
DP master 1 DP master 2
Master system 1 Master system 2
S5-95U S5-95U
Slave No. 10 Slave No. 11 Slave No. 12 Slave No. 13
Figure 10-4 S5-95U – multimaster mode
Rules COM PROFIBUS supports you in multimaster mode:

Enter the entire bus configuration before you start exporting the data to an
S5-95U (see section G.11.2).
You must leave a free PROFIBUS address between the PROFIBUS ad-
dress of one master and that of the next master. This address is only al-
lowed to be used by a slave.
If you change the bus parameters in one program file, you must always
re-transfer all bus parameters to each DP master.
If you operate the S5-95U with DP master interface on the bus with sev-
eral masters (multimaster mode), you are not allowed to connect the
S5-95U to the PROFIBUS-DP bus until all the bus parameters (e.g. the
baud rate) match the existing bus. The functionality of the PROFIBUS
interface may otherwise be restricted (reduced performance or failure of
the bus system).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 10-13

10-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
S5-95U – Starting ET 200 11
In this chapter This chapter contains all you need to know about startup, shutdown and fail-
ure of the ET 200 distributed I/O system when the S5-95U programmable
controllers are in use as DP masters.
Section Topic Page

11.1 Starting and operating ET 200 11-2
11.2 S5-95U power-up on the bus 11-3
11.3 Response of the ET 200 distributed I/O system 11-6
11.4 Shutting down ET 200 11-12
11.5 Reaction of the S5-95U to failure 11-13
IM 308-C as DP If you use the IM 308-C as DP master, skip chapter 11 and read chapter 8
master instead.
Goal After reading this chapter, you will have all the information you need to start
up the ET 200 distributed I/O system with S5-95U as DP masters.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 11-1
S5-95U – Starting ET 200
11.1 Starting and operating the ET 200
Preconditions We assume:
that you have installed a backup battery in each S5-95U with DP master
interface or parameterized ”LNPG y” in DB 1 (see section 10.3).
that you have inserted the 32 K EEPROM(s) in the S5-95Us with DP mas-
ter interface (see section 9.5).
that you have used COM PROFIBUS to transfer the data of each master
system to the appropriate DP master.
that you have checked the configuration of the distributed I/O system.
Starting the ET 200 When you are ready to start the ET 200 distributed I/O system:
(switching on)
1. Test the wiring to the sensors and actuators of the individual DP slaves
using COM PROFIBUS and the ”Status” service function.
Result: After testing the DP slaves, you are sure that each DP slave is
fully operational.
2. Connect all DP slaves and DP masters with the PROFIBUS bus cable.
3. Switch on the power supply units of the DP slaves.
4. Set the STOP/RUN switches of the DP slaves (if fitted) to RUN.
5. Switch on the power supply of the S5-95U with DP master interface.
6. Set the ON/OFF switch on the S5-95U to ”I”.
7. Switch the S5-95U programmable controllers with DP master interface
from STOP to RUN.
Result: The S5-95Us power up. On the S5-95Us and the connected DP
slaves the ”BF” LEDs go out. Data exchange is possible between all para-
meterized DP slaves and the S5-95U.
Fig. 11-1 is a flowchart illustrating the power-up sequence of the S5-95U
on the bus.
8. Use the FB 230 or COM PROFIBUS to check the diagnostics messages.
These messages will tell you whether or not data exchange with the DP
slaves is functioning correctly.
9. Via the programmer interface of the S5-95U, you can execute the status/
control function for all DP slaves the addresses of which are contained in
the process image, or you can display the statuses of the inputs/outputs of
the DP slaves with COM PROFIBUS.

11-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
11.2 Power-up of the S5-95U on the bus
Preconditions for We assume:

power-up
that you have started the S5-95U without using the DP master interface
(see system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller, Chap-
ter 4).
that you have correctly wired the DP slaves.
that you have connected all DP slaves and DP masters with the PROFI-
BUS bus cable.
that you have switched on the power supply of the DP slaves.
that – where applicable – you have already set the DP slaves to RUN.
that you have installed a battery in the S5-95U or selected ”LNPG y” in
DB 1 of the S5-95U. If you have not installed a battery and if you have
parameterized ”LNPG n” in DB 1 of the S5-95U, a general reset of the
S5-95U will be initiated after a power failure.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 11-3
Power-up of the Fig. 11-1 is a flowchart explaining how the S5-95U with DP master interface
S5-95U powers up.
Switch on power supply for

Power restored after failure
S5-95U
Set mode selector switch to STOP. Set ON/OFF

switch on S5-95U to ”I” and
No
Backup battery OK?
Yes
Copy STEP 5 application program from 32 K
EEPROM to the S5-95U
DB 1: ”LNPG y” param- No
eter set?
Yes
Is DP parameter set No
available on 32 K EE-
PROM?
Yes
DP parameter set is imported to S5-95U (”BF” Default parameter set is selected

LED flickers); parameterized DP slaves are (see next page)
entered in overview diagnostics
Change mode selector switch from STOP to

Change mode selector switch from STOP to RUN (restart of progr. controller)
RUN (restart of progr. controller)
Deletion of process image, DP data, non-

Deletion of process image, DP data, non- retentive times, counters, flags in the S5-95U
retentive times, counters, flags in the S5-95U
”BF” LED goes out

See flowchart in (no DP master operation)
Fig. 11-2
Figure 11-1 Power-up of the S5-95U with DP master interface (1)

11-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Continued from flowchart in

Fig. 11-1
S5-95U registers DP slaves on the bus
S5-95U deletes addressable DP slaves from

overview diagnostics
No
Have all DP slaves ac-
knowledged?
No
Yes Power-up delay timed
out?
Yes
”BF” LED goes out; data can be exchanged

between S5-95U and distributed I/O system
Figure 11-2 Power-up of the S5-95U with DP master interface (2)
Default parameter The S5-95U uses the default parameter set if it fails to find a DP parameter
set set on the 32 K EEPROM (see Fig. 11-1). The settings in the default parame-
ter set are as follows:
PROFIBUS address = 1
Baud rate = 19.2 kbaud
No DP slave parameterized
Highest active PROFIBUS address = 126
The baud rate and the PROFIBUS address of the station are stored in EW 62
(see section G.11.2).
Message in Operating system datum 17 of the S5-95U (absolute address 5D22H) contains
operating the following information on the DP parameter set:
system datum
00H = Default parameter set is valid
01H = DP parameter set loaded from 32 K EEPROM is valid
For more information on other system data in the S5-95U, see the system
manual S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 11-5
11.3 Response of the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Overview The reactions of the distributed I/O system with S5-95U as DP master to cer-
tain events are described in this section:
Section Topic Page

11.3.1 Reaction to switching the S5-95U for the first time from STOP to 11-7
RUN (programmable controller startup)
11.3.2 Reaction after power failure in the S5-95U (restoration of mains 11-8
power)
11.3.3 Reaction when, with the bus running, you switch the S5-95U to 11-9
STOP or RUN
11.3.4 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of the 11-10
DP slave
11.3.5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or when the DP slave 11-11
is again addressable

11-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
11.3.1 Reaction to switching the S5-95U for the first time from STOP to
RUN (programmable controller startup)
Switching on The table below shows you how the ET 200 distributed I/O system responds
power supply and when you switch on the power supply of the S5-95U and the S5-95U for the
S5-95U first time.
Table 11-1 Reaction to switching the S5-95U for the first time from STOP to RUN
PS S5-95U
S5-95U as DP S5-95U as DP master DP slaves
master
STOP You cannot access the inputs/outputs
p p of the distributed I/O system.
y Outputs
p are set to
”0”
”0”.
STOP RUN Diagnostics data, DP inputs and outputs are cleared. Inputs are read
Diagnostics data and DP inputs are updated. Outputs are up-
written
DP outputs are written. dated
DP outputs are set to defaults (if you programmed the startup OB 21).
You can access the inputs/outputs of the distributed I/O system.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 11-7
11.3.2 Reaction after power failure in the S5-95U (restoration of mains

power)
Restoration of The status of the S5-95U when mains power failed was RUN and when mains
mains power power is restored the status is again RUN.
Response of bus The table below shows you how the ET 200 distributed I/O system responds
system to the restoration of mains power.
Table 11-2 Reaction after power failure in the S5-95U (restoration of mains power)
PS S5-95U
S5-95U as DP Master S5-95U as DP Master DP Slaves
Restoration of Backup battery present, Diagnostics data, DP inputs and outputs are clea- Inputs are read
mains power or DB 1 parameter red. Outputs are upda-
”LNPG y” Diagnostics data and DP inputs are updated. ted
DP outputs are written.
You can access the inputs/outputs of the distribu-
ted I/O system.
No backup battery, and Distributed I/O system configuration is lost (for –
DB 1 parameter selection of default parameter set see sec-
”LNPG n” tion 11.2).

11-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
11.3.3 Reaction when, with the bus running, you switch the S5-95U to
STOP or RUN
Precondition All DP slaves on the bus are addressable. If not, you must make provision for
the reactions to interruption of bus communication and failure of a DP slave
(see section 11.3.4).
Response of bus The table below shows you how the system responds if, with the bus running,
system the mode selector switch of the S5-95U is actuated to switch to STOP or
RUN.
Table 11-3 Reaction when, with the bus running, you switch the S5-95U to STOP or RUN
PS S5-95U
S5-95U as DP S5-95U as DP master DP slaves
master
RUN STOP You cannot access the inputs/outputs of the distributed I/O system. Outputs are set to
”0”.
STOP RUN You can access the inputs/outputs of the distributed I/O system. Inputs are read
Outputs are up-
dated

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 11-9
11.3.4 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or DP slave

failure
Error-reporting Unlike the IM 308-C, the S5-95U as DP master does not support an error-re-
mode ”none” porting mode (neither PEU nor QVZ).
Caution
! In the application program, you can detect an error in the distributed I/O
system only by analyzing the overview diagnostics or the slave diagnostics
with the FB 230.
Response of bus This table shows the reaction to an interruption in bus communication or the
system failure of one or more DP slaves.
Table 11-4 Reaction to interruption of bus communication or failure of a DP slave
S5-95U
Failed
Failed Reaction of the Reaction of the S5-95U and Reaction of the S5-95U and
DP slave(s): S5-95U as DP mas- the failed DP slave(s): the remaining DP slaves:
Response monitoring ter
No S5-95U remains in S5-95U: S5-95U:
RUN Inputs in the S5-95U are set to Inputs and outputs in the
”0” S5-95U are updated as before.
Outputs in the S5-95U are up- DP slaves:
dated internally Outputs are updated as before.
DP slave:
Outputs are frozen
Yes S5-95U remains in S5-95U: S5-95U:
RUN Inputs in the S5-95U are set to Inputs and outputs in the
”0” S5-95U are updated as before.
Outputs in the S5-95U are up- DP slaves:
dated internally Outputs are updated as before.
DP slave:
Outputs are set to ”0” when the
response monitoring time times
out.

11-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
11.3.5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or the DP slave is

again addressable
Reaction The table below shows the reactions when bus communication is reestab-
lished or a failed DP slave is again addressable.
Table 11-5 Reaction when bus interruption is rectified or DP slave is again addressable
S5-95U
Failed
Failed DP slave(s): Reaction of the failed DP slave(s): The inputs in the S5-95U are up-
dated as before.
Response monitoring Reaction of the remaining DP

slaves:
Yes DP slave is re-parameterized and configured, Outputs on the DP slaves are updated
then outputs on the DP slaves are updated as before

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 11-11
11.4 Switching off ET 200
Switching off The procedure for shutting down the ET 200 distributed I/O system is always
ET 200 as follows:
1. SET the STOP/RUN switch of the S5-95U with DP master interface to
STOP.
2. Set the ON/OFF switch on the S5-95U to ”O”.
3. Switch off the power supply of the S5-95U.
4. Switch off the power supply to the DP slaves and
5. Set the STOP/RUN switch on each DP slave (if fitted) to STOP.

11-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
11.5 Failure response of the S5-95U
Monitoring The S5-95U has an integral failure-monitoring system which notifies the
mechanism communication processor of:
cycle monitoring time overshoot
control processor failure
Monitoring time When the DP master interface runs up, the communication processor in the
for control S5-95U starts a monitoring time of 0.5 s.
processor
When this monitoring time times out, the communication processor recog-
nizes a failure of the control processor. The S5-95U goes to STOP.
Monitoring time The monitoring time is cleared when the S5-95U goes from RUN to STOP.
characteristics
The monitoring time is started when the S5-95U goes from STOP to RUN.
The monitoring time is retriggered at the cycle checkpoint of the S5-95U and
when the OB 31 is called.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 11-13

11-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
COM PROFIBUS manual (placeholder for
manual on CD-ROM) 12
COM PROFIBUS There is an integrated online help system in COM PROFIBUS that contains
documentation all the information you require in order to work with COM PROFIBUS.
If you are carrying out configuration with COM PROFIBUS as of version 5.0
for the first time, and if you want to familiarize yourself with how to work
with COM PROFIBUS, we recommend that you refer to the COM PROFI-
BUS manual.
The COM PROFIBUS manual explains the most important functions of
COM PROFIBUS V 5.0 or higher and includes complete configuration exam-
ples to illustrate them.
Accessing the The COM PROFIBUS manual is available only in electronic from (PDF) on
manual the COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM.
You can read the electronic manual on screen or print it out from the
COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM and insert it in Chapter 12 of this manual.
You will find the order number of the COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM in Appen-
dix G.
COM PROFIBUS For a limited transitional period COM PROFIBUS V 3.3 will be supplied in
V 3.3 parallel with the new version V 5.0. You will still find the description of
COM PROFIBUS V 3.3 in Appendix G of this manual.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 12-1
COM PROFIBUS manual (placeholder for manual

12-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
General technical data A
In this chapter This chapter contains the general technical data for the bus connectors and
the RS 485 repeaters with order numbers 6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0 as de-
scribed in this manual.
Section Topic Page

A.1 Standards and certifications A-2
A.2 Electromagnetic compatibility A-4
A.3 Transport and storage conditions A-6
A.4 Mechanical and climatic conditions for operation A-7
A.5 Insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection A-9
The standards complied with by the above-mentioned components and the

values the components achieve in testing are listed in the general technical
data, along with the criteria for testing.
Not in this chapter This chapter does not contain the general technical data relating to
the IM 308-C master interface,
the S5-95U with DP master interface
the PROFIBUS card
The IM 308-C is in compliance with the general technical data for the
S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers.
The general technical data for the S5-95U is in the system manual
S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller. This information is applicable to
all versions of the S5-95U.
The PROFIBUS card is in compliance with the general technical data for the
programmers/PCs.
Goal After reading this chapter, you will be familiar with the environmental condi-
tions in which the ET 200 can be used.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c A-1
General technical data
A.1 Standards and certifications
Introduction This chapter contains the following information about the ET 200:
The most important standards for which the ET 200 satisfies the criteria
The certifications available for the ET 200.
PROFIBUS stan- The ET 200 distributed I/O system is based on the EN 50 170, Volume 2,
dard PROFIBUS standard.
IEC 1131 The ET 200 distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements and criteria of the
IEC 1131, Part 2 standard.
CE mark Our products meet the requirements and protection objectives of the follow-
ing EC Directives and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN)
that have been published in the Official Gazettes of the European Community
for programmable logic controllers:
89/336/EEC ”Electromagnetic compatibility” (EMC Directive)
72/23/EEC ”Electrical Equipment for Use Within Fixed Voltage Ranges”
(Low-Voltage Directive)
The EC declarations of conformity are being kept available for the cognizant
authorities at:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungstechnik
A&D AS E4
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
EMC Directive SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments.
SIMATIC products issued with an individual approval can also be used in
residential environments (private housing or small-scale trades and commer-
cial premises). You must obtain this special approval from an appropriate
authority or certificate-issuing agency, for example in Germany from the
Federal Office of Posts and Telecommunications or one of its branches.
Operating environment Requirement

Emitted interference Interference
immunity
Industrial EN 50081-2 : 1993 EN 50082-2 : 1995
Residential Individual approval EN 50082-1 : 1992

A-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
UL certification UL Recognition Mark

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) in accordance with
Standard UL 508, File No. 116536
CSA certification CSA Certification Mark

Canadian Standard Association (CSA) in accordance with
Standard C 22.2 No. 142, File No. LR 48323
FM approval Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, D.
Warning
! Personal injury and material damage may be incurred.
Personal injury and material damage may be incurred in hazardous areas if
you disconnect plug and socket connections while the ET 200 is operating.
Always deenergize the ET 200 in hazardous areas before disconnecting plug
and socket connections.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c A-3
A.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Definition Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device to

function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without affecting
this environment.
The bus connectors and the RS 485 repeaters described in this manual com-
ply with the statutory requirements for EMC.
The details of interference immunity and RFI suppression are listed below.
Pulse interference Table A-1 lists the details of electromagnetic compatibility with regard to
pulse interference.
Table A-1 Electromagnetic compatibility with regard to pulse interference
Pulse interference Tested with Corresponding to

severity
Electrostatic discharge
g to 8 kV 3 (air discharge)
IEC 801-2
801 2 (DIN VDE 0843,0843 P
Partt 2)
4 kV 2 (contact discharge)
Burst pulses 2 kV (feeder line) 3
(rapid, transient interference) to
2 kV (signal line)
IEC 801-4 (DIN VDE 0843, Part 4)
Single high-energy pulse (surge) to
IEC 801-5
(DIN VDE 0839, Part 10)
Asymmetric link 2 kV (feeder line) 3
2 kV (signal line/data line)
Symmetric link 1 kV (feeder line)
1 kV (signal line/data line)

A-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Sinusoidal RF radiation onto the device to ENV 50140 (corresponds to IEC 801-3):
interference
Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated
– from 80 to 1000 MHz
– 10 V/m
– 80 % AM (1 kHz)
Electromagnetic RF field, pulse-modulated
– 900 5 MHz
– 10 V/m
– 50 % ED
– 200 Hz repetition frequency
RF coupling on signal and data lines, etc. to ENV 50141 (corresponds to
IEC 801-6), radio frequency, asymmetrical, amplitude-modulated
– from 0.15 to 80 MHz
– 10 V rms, unmodulated
– 80 % AM (1 kHz)
– 150 Ω source impedance
RF emissions RFI suppression to EN 55011: Limit class A, Group 1.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c A-5
A.3 Transport and storage conditions
Transport and The bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters described in this manual comply
storage conditions with the requirements of IEC 1131, Part 2. The figures below are applicable
to modules transported and stored in their original packaging.
Condition Permissible range

Free fall 1m
Temperature from –40 C to +70 C
Barometric pressure from 1080 to 660 hPa
(corresponding to altitudes from
–1000 to 3000 m)
Relative humidity from 5 to 95 %, without condensation
Bus connectors The storage temperature for the bus connectors is determined by other condi-
tions. They are specified in Table 3-7 in section 3.4.

A-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
A.4 Mechanical and climatic conditions for operation
Ambient operating The bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters described in this manual are de-
conditions signed for stationary use in sheltered locations. Ambient operating conditions
to IEC 1131-2.
Where the Unless additional protective measures are implemented, the bus connectors
modules should and RS 485 repeaters should not be used:
not be used
S where they would be exposed to a high proportion of ionizing radiation
S where operating conditions are harsh, for example due to:
– dust
– aggressive vapors or gases
S in systems which require special monitoring, for example:
– elevators
– electrical systems in high-risk zones
Installation in cabinets counts as an additional protective measure.
Climatic The bus connectors and RS 485 repeaters are suitable for use under the fol-
conditions lowing climatic conditions:
Ambient Ranges Remarks

conditions
Temperature from 0 to 60 _C –
from 0 to 55 _C for bus connectors with Order
No. 6ES7 972-0B.20-0XA0
Relative from 5 to 95 % without condensation, corre-
humidity sponds to relative humidity
(RH) category 2 to IEC 1131-2
Barometric from 1080 to 795 hPa corresponds to an altitude from
pressure -1000 to 2000 m
Pollutant SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test:
concentration
Relative humidity (RH) 10 ppm; 4 days
< 60 %, no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test:
Relative humidity (RH) 1 ppm; 4 days
< 60 %, no condensation

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c A-7
Mechanical The mechanical conditions are listed in the table below as sinusoidal vibra-
conditions tions.
Frequency range (Hz) Continuous Occasional

10 v f t 57 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude
57 v f v 150 0.5 g constant accelera- 1 g constant accelera-
tion tion
Reducing vibration If the modules are subjected to severe shocks or vibrations, you must imple-
ment suitable measures to reduce the acceleration or amplitude.
We recommend installation on suitable dampers (e.g. rubber-metal elements).
Tests for Table A-2 lists the nature and scope of the tests to establish the mechanical
mechanical conditions.
conditions
Table A-2 Tests of mechanical conditions
Test of ... Standard Remarks

Vibrations Vibration testing to Type of vibration: frequency
IEC 68, Part 2-6 transients with a rate of change
(sinusoidal) of 1 octave/minute.
10 Hz v f t 57 Hz, const. am-
plitude 0.075 mm
57 Hz v f v150 Hz, const. ac-
celeration 1 g
Duration: 10 frequency tran-
sients per axis in each of the
3 normal axes
Shock Shock testing to Nature of shock: semi-sinusoi-
IEC 68, Part 2-27 dal
Severity of shock: 15 g peak,
11 ms duration
Direction: 2 shocks along each
of the 3 normal axes

A-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
A.5 Insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection
Test voltages The insulation strength was verified by application of the following test volt-
ages to VDE 0160:
Circuits with nominal voltage Ue to other Nominal voltage

circuits and earth (test voltage)
0 V t Ue v 50 V AC 350 V
50 V t Ue v 100 V AC 700 V
100 V t Ue v 150 V AC 1,300 V
150 V t Ue v 300 V AC 2,200 V
Protection class Class I to IEC 536 (VDE 0106, Part 1), i.e. requires connection of protective
conductor to busbar.
Ingress of foreign Degree of protection IP 20 to IEC 529, i.e. proof against contact with stan-
matter and water dard test fingers.
In addition: Proof against ingress of foreign matter of diameter in excess of
12.5 mm.
Not specially protected against the ingress of water.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c A-9

A-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Access commands for the S5-115U,
S5-135U and S5-155U programmable
controllers B
In this chapter This chapter details the various access commands. The commands are listed
separately for each programmable controller and cover:
linear addressing
P-page addressing and
Q-page addressing
Section Topic Page

B.1 General information about addressing consistent data B-2
B.2 Access commands for the CPUs 941 to 943 (S5-115U) B-3
B.3 Access commands for the CPU 944 B-5
B.4 Access commands for the CPU 945 B-7
B.5 Access commands for the S5-135U B-9
B.6 Access commands for the S5-155U B-11
B.7 Structure of the consistent data areas for the S5-115U, S5-135U B-13
and S5-155U programmable controllers
Goal This is a ready-reference chapter. It tells you which access commands are
available for which CPUs and what you must bear in mind with regard to the
individual commands.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-1
Access commands for the S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers
B.1 General information about addressing consistent data
What is The term ”consistent data” refers to all areas containing more than one byte
consistency? of data that belongs together, e.g. a single word constitutes a consistent area
of 2 bytes.
Consistent data is processed, for example, by analog modules, CPs, IPs in an
ET 200U, or by the S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP interface.
Example: The following are consistent on account of their contents:
the high byte and the low byte of an analog value (word consistency)
the job number and the associated parameters of this job, e.g. in a CPU
job addressing a CP (consistency across 4 words)
Rules Observe these rules for consistent data handling:
Note
If you process consistent data, define the addresses in the range from
PY 128 to PY 255 or in the Q area.
Access byte-consistent areas using byte commands, and word-consistent
areas using word commands.
If the addresses are located in the range from PY 128 to PY 255 or in the
Q area, you should always access the consistent area decrementally, e.g.
first PY 5 and then PY 4, PY 3 and PY 2.
Always access all the bytes or words in a consistent area.
Always try to create consistent data areas that are as small as possible. If
you have two digital bytes, for example, you should address them as indi-
vidual bytes and not as a word.
If you want to access any address in the P or Q area from an alarm pro-
cessing level, you must disable the alarms and then enable them again
prior to each consistent data access.

B-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
B.2 Access commands for the CPUs 941 to 943
Linear addressing When you use linear addressing for the 941 to 944 CPUs, you can access the
P area and – via FB 196/197 – the Q area:
The FB 196/197 requires the IM 308-C release 2 or higher.
Table B-1 Linear addressing with 941 to 943 CPUs
Inputs
I/O address Address for direct Access commands
access
941 CPU (P area): A I x.y / AN I x.y
0 to 63 F000H to F03FH O I x.y / ON I x.y
L IB x
942 to 944 CPUs L IW x
(P area): L PY x
0 to 127 F000H to F07FH
941 to 944 CPUs: L PY x
(P area) L PW x*
128 to 255 F080H to F0FFH
0 to 255 F100H to F1FFH FB 196/197
(Q area)
Outputs
access
941 CPU (P area): S Q x.y R Q x.y
0 to 63 F000H to F03FH = Q x.y
T QB x T QW x
942 to 944 CPUs T PY x
(P area):
0 to 127 F000H to F07FH
941 to 944 CPUs: T PY x
(P area) T PW x*
128 to 255 F080H to F0FFH
0 to 255 F100H to F1FFH FB 196/197
(Q area)
*: Word-consistent data only

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-3
P-page addressing If you choose P-page addressing, you must use PY 255 (F0FFH) as the page
selection address.
Table B-2 P-page addressing with the 941 to 943 CPUs
Inputs Pn, Pn+1 ,... , Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
192 to 254 F0C0H to F0FEH L PY x L PW x*
Outputs Pn, Pn+1 , ... , Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
192 to 254 F0C0H to F0FEH T PY x T PW x*
Q-page addressing If you choose Q-page addressing, you must use QB 255 (F1FFH) as the page
selection address and then address the Q area via the FB 196/197.
The FB 196/197 requires IM 308-C release 2 or higher.
Other access Other access commands can be used only under certain conditions. These
commands conditions are listed in section B.7.1.

B-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
B.3 Access commands for the 944 CPU
Linear addressing When you use linear addressing for the 944 CPU, you can access the P area
and – via FB 196/197 – the Q area:
Table B-3 Linear addressing with 944 CPU
Inputs
access
CPU 941 (P area): U E x.y / UN E x.y
0 to 63 F000H to F03FH O E x.y / ON E x.y
L EB x
CPU 942 to 944 L EW x
(P area): L PY x
L PW x
0 to 127 F000H to F07FH
LIR TNB
CPU 941 to 944: L PY x
(P area) L PW x
128 to 255 F080H to F0FFH LIR TNB
0 to 255 F100H to F1FFH FB 196/197

(Q area)
Outputs
access
CPU 941 (P area): S A x.y R A x.y
0 to 63 F000H to F03FH = A x.y
T AB x T AW x
CPU 942 to 944 T PY x
(P area): T PW x
0 to 127 F000H to F07FH TIR TNB
CPU 941 to 944: T PY x
(P area) T PW x
128 to 255 F080H to F0FFH TIR TNB
0 to 255 F100H to F1FFH FB 196/197

(Q area)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-5
selection address.
Table B-4 P-page addressing with the 944 CPU
Inputs Pn, Pn+1 ,... , Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
192 to 254 F0C0H to F0FEH L PY x
L PW x
LIR
TNB
Outputs Pn, Pn+1 , ... , Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)
access
192 to 254 F0C0H to F0FEH T PY x
T PW x
TIR
TNB
selection address and then address the Q area via the FB 196/197.
The FB 196/197 requires IM 308-C release 2 or higher.

B-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
B.4 Access commands for the 945 CPU
Linear addressing When you use linear addressing for the 945 CPU, you can access both the P
area and the Q area:
Table B-5 Linear addressing with the 945 CPU
Inputs
access
0 to 127 0F000H to 0F07FH A I x.y / AN I x.y
(P area) O I x.y / ON I x.y
L IB x L IW x
L ID x L PY x
128 to 255 0F080H to 0F0FFH L PY x L PW x*
(P area)
0 to 255 (Q area) 0F100H to 0F1FFH L QB x L QW x*
Outputs
access
0 to 127 0F000H to 0F07FH S Q x.y R Q x.y
(P area) = Q x.y
T QB x T QW x
T QD x T PY x
128 to 255 0F080H to 0F0FFH T PY x T PW x*
(P area)
0 to 255 (Q area) 0F100H to 0F1FFH T QB x T QW x*
selection address.
Table B-6 P-page addressing with the 945 CPU
Inputs Pn, Pn+1 , ..., Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

I/O address Address for direct access Access commands
Outputs Pn, Pn+1 , ..., Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)
I/O address Address for direct access Access commands

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-7
selection address.
Table B-7 Q-page addressing with the 945 CPU
Inputs Qn, Qn+1 , ..., Qn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
0 to 254 0F100H to 0F1FEH L QB x L QW x*
Outputs Qn, Qn+1 , ..., Qn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)
access
0 to 254 0F100H to 0F1FEH T QB x T QW x*

B-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
B.5 Access commands for the S5-135U
Linear addressing When you use linear addressing, you can access both the P area and the Q
area.
Table B-8 Linear addressing with the S5-135U
Inputs
access
L IB x L IW x
L ID x
L PY x
(P area)
0 to 255 0F100H to 0F1FFH L QB x L QW x*
(Q area)
Outputs
access
0 to 127 0F000H to 0F07FH S Q x.y
(P area) R Q x.y
= Q x.y
T QB x T QW x
T QD x
T PY x
(P area)
0 to 255 0F100H to 0F1FFH T QB x T QW x*
(Q area)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-9
selection address.
Table B-9 P-page addressing with the S5-135U
Inputs Pn, Pn+1 , ..., Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
Outputs Pn, Pn+1 , ..., Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
selection address.
Table B-10 Q-page addressing with the S5-135U
Inputs Qn, Qn+1 , ..., Qn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32 , ..., 240)

access
Outputs Qn, Qn+1 , ..., Qn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
commands conditions are listed in section B.7.4 for the 922 CPU and in section B.7.5 for
the 928 CPU.

B-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
B.6 Access commands for the S5-155U
Linear addressing When you use linear addressing, you can access both the P area and
the Q area:
Table B-11 Linear addressing with the S5-155U
Inputs
access
L IB x L IW x
L ID x
L PY x
(P area)
0 to 255 0F100H to 0F1FFH L QB x L QW x*
(Q area)
Outputs
access
0 to 127 0F000H to 0F07FH S Q x.y R Q x.y
(P area) = Q x.y
T QB x T QW x
T QD x
T PY x
(P area)
0 to 255 0F100H to 0F1FFH T QB x T QW x*
(Q area)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-11
P-page addressing Use PY 255 as the page selection address.
Table B-12 P-page addressing with the S5-155U
Inputs Pn, Pn+1 , ..., Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
Outputs Pn, Pn+1 , ..., Pn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
Q-page addressing Use QB 255 as the page selection address.
Table B-13 Q-page addressing with the S5-155U
Inputs Qn, Qn+1 , ..., Qn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access
Outputs Qn, Qn+1 , ..., Qn+15 (n = 0, 16, 32, ..., 240)

access

B-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
B.7 Structure of the consistent data areas for the S5-115U,

S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers
Overview This section describes the rules you must observe in order to maintain data
consistency in direct access to the distributed I/O system.
Section Topic Page

B.7.1 S5-115U: CPUs 941, 942, 943, B-16
B.7.2 S5-115U: CPU 944 B-18
B.7.3 S5-115U: CPU 945 B-20
B.7.4 S5-135U: CPU 922 B-22
B.7.5 S5-135U: CPU 928 B-24
B.7.6 S5-155U: CPUs 946/947, 948 B-26

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-13
Structure of the ID COM PROFIBUS enables you to define IDs to select the consistency for a
module.
When parameterizing a DP slave such as the ET 200U or the S5-95U, enter
the ID in COM PROFIBUS by selecting Configure " Slave Parame-
ters " Configure" ID.
The ”ID” dialog box is opened:
ID
OK
Type: Inputs
Length: 1 Cancel
Format: Byte
Help
Module consistency
Associated ID: 144
Figure B-1 ID
Sections B.7.1 to B.7.6 refer to this ”ID” dialog box in COM PROFIBUS.
What is important Observe these rules for consistent data access:

with regard to
consistency?
Note
S Data consistency is switched on and off on the IM 308-C.
S Data consistency is switched off only by a certain byte (switch-off byte,
indicated by gray hatching in the illustrations below).
S Data consistency is switched on by any other byte in the consistent area
(switch-on byte, no hatching in the illustrations below).
S If data consistency is switched on when one or more bytes in a consistent
area are read or written, the IM 308-C waits until data consistency is
switched off again (switch-off byte).
If, for example, you do not write consistently to a consistent output area,
it is possible that these outputs will not be set.
S If you want to read or write only one byte in the consistent area and this
byte is not the switch-off byte, you must always read or write the switch-
off byte as well to ensure that data consistency is switched off again.
S During access to a consistent area (input or output area), no other I/O
address outside this area may be accessed because if it were, the
IM 308-C could no longer process the data consistently.

B-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Word-by-word The following rules apply to word-by-word access to consistent areas:

access to
consistent data
area Note
If you access these modules only through the process image (PII, PIO),
the data is always consistent.
If you use load/transfer commands for direct access to consistent areas,
observe the following access rules:
– Access consistent data only word-by-word (address must be an even
number)
– Always read or write the job number or control word (CPs and IPs)
last, in other words read the parameters first and then the job num-
ber. This means you should always start by accessing the word which
contains the switch-off byte.
Byte-by-byte The following rules apply to byte-by-byte access to consistent areas:

access to
consistent data
area Note
If you access these modules only through the process image (PII, PIO),
the data is always consistent.
If you use load/transfer commands for direct access to consistent areas,
you must always access the ”switch-off byte” last. You will find the cor-
rect ”switch-off byte” in Sections B.7.1 to B.7.3. This depends on the
type of the CPU, the type of consistency and the address area (0 to 127 in
the P area or addresses outside this area).
Sections B.7.1 to In these sections:

B.7.6
n is always an even number, e. g. 0, 2, 4, 6, ...
m/2 is always an integer, e. g. 1, 2, 3, ...
Switch-on and Bytes with which you switch on consistency (switch-on bytes) are always
switch-off bytes shown as white fields below. Bytes with which you switch off consistency
(switch-off bytes) are shown as gray-hatched fields.
With this byte consistency is switched on.
With this byte consistency is switched off.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-15
B.7.1 S5-115U: CPUs 941, 942, 943
Word consistency The following is based on the ”ID” dialog box in COM PROFIBUS:
over one word
Table B-14 Word consistency over one word
Format: Word
Module consistency
Byte P area: 0 to 127 P area: 128 to 255 Q area: 0 to 255
n
n+1
access L PW x/T PW x L PW x/T PW x FB 196/197
commands
Byte consistency The following is based on the ”ID” dialog box in COM PROFIBUS:
over module
Table B-15 Byte consistency over m bytes (total length)
Length: [m]
Format: Byte
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11
access L PY x/T PY x TNB FB 196/197
commands
1 m corresponds to the length in bytes you defined in the ”ID” dialog box.

B-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
over module
Table B-16 Word consistency over m/2 words (total length)
Length: [m/2]
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11
commands

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-17
B.7.2 S5-115U: 944 CPU
over one word
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
commands TNB TNB TNB
over module
Length: [m]
Format: Byte
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11
access TNB TNB FB 196/197
commands TNB

B-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
over module
Length: [m/2]
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11
commands TNB TNB TNB

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-19
B.7.3 S5-115U: CPU 945
over one word
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
access L PW x/T PW x L PW x/T PW x L QW x/T QW x
commands TNW TNW TNW
over module
Length: [m]
Format: Byte
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11
access L PY x/T PY x TNB TNB
commands

B-20 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
over module
Length: [m/2]
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11
commands TNW TNW

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-21
B.7.4 S5-135U: CPU 922
over one word
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
over module
Length: [m]
Format: Byte
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11

B-22 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
over module
Length: [m/2]
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-23
B.7.5 S5-135U: CPU 928
over one word
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
over module
Length: [m]
Format: Byte
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11

B-24 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
over module
Length: [m/2]
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-25
B.7.6 S5-155U: CPUs 946/947, 948
over one word
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
commands
over module
Length: [m]
Format: Byte
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–1 1
access L PY x/T PY x TNB TNB
commands

B-26 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
over module
Length: [m/2]
Format: Word
Module consistency
n
n+1
...
n + m–11
commands

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c B-27

B-28 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed
I/O system C
Reaction time COM PROFIBUS automatically calculates the average reaction time when
calculation you parameterize the ET 200. If you have not installed COM PROFIBUS, the
information contained in this chapter provides a summary of the reaction
times and tells you how to determine them.
In this chapter This chapter contains information on the following:
Section Topic Page

C.1 Reaction times with IM 308-C as DP master C-2
C.2 Reaction times with S5-95U as DP master C-5
C.3 Reaction time tDP C-8
C.4 Reaction time tslave C-9
C.5 Example illustrating how to calculate C-11
reaction times for the ET 200 distributed I/O system
C.6 Special cases which may prolong reaction time tR C-20
Basis The information in this section is based on the ”PROFIBUS-DP” bus profile.
The computations of reaction times do not take delays such as those caused
by diagnostics telegrams into account.
Goal After reading this chapter, you will be familiar with the reaction times and
mechanisms of the ET 200 distributed I/O system.
You will also be in a position to dimension time-critical bus segments.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-1
Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
C.1 Reaction times with IM 308-C as DP master
Reaction times in Fig. C-1 shows the reaction times of the ET 200 distributed I/O system. The
ET 200 aggregate reaction time is the mean reaction time which elapses between the
switching of an input and the associated switching of an output:
tcons
tprog
tslave tslave
tDP tDP
Figure C-1 Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Importance Table C-1 shows the relative importance of the reaction times introduced in
the above illustration. The individual reaction times are described in detail
below.
Table C-1 Importance of reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Ser. Reaction time Abbreviation Importance

No.
1 ... of application pro- tprog Important for access to process
gram in the CPU image, otherwise negligible
2 ... between IM 308-C tcons Depends on length of application
and CPU program
3 ... on the PROFIBUS- tDP Important if bus configuration is
DP bus large, baud rate is low and/or
data telegrams are extensive
4 ... within the slave tslave ET 200U, S5-95U: very impor-
tant
ET 200B, ET 200C: less impor-
tant

C-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.1.1 Reaction time tprog
Definition tp rog is the reaction time of the application program in the CPU. There are
two cases for tprog:
Table C-2 Reaction time tprog
Reaction time Caused by Importance

tprog for accessing CPU IM 308-C Very important
process image
Application program Input Dual-port RAM
data
PII
OB 1
Input data
Output data
Output
data
PIO
At the start of the application program cycle, the process image of the in-
puts is transferred from the IM 308-C to the PII.
At the end of the application program cycle, the process image of the out-
puts is transferred from the PIO to the IM 308-C.
If you access the process image, tprog equals the duration of the application
program.
tprog for direct access CPU IM 308-C Negligible
(load/transfer com-
mands) Application program Dual-port RAM
PII
OB 1 Input
data
L PY 30 Input data
:
: Output
: data
T PY 30 Output data
PIO
If you access the dual-port RAM of the IM 308-C directly using load/trans-
fer commands, reaction time tprog is negligible.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-3
C.1.2 Reaction time tcons
Definition tcons is the reaction time for data transfer between CPU and IM 308-C. tcons
can be up to 0.08 ms long.
tcons
Figure C-2 Reaction time tcons

C-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.2 Reaction times with S5-95U as DP master
Reaction times in Fig. C-1 shows the reaction times of the ET 200 distributed I/O system. The
ET 200 aggregate reaction time is the mean reaction time which elapses between the
switching of an input and the associated switching of an output:
tprog + tinter
tslave tslave
tDP tDP
Figure C-3 Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system (S5-95U)
Importance Table C-1 shows the relative importance of the reaction times introduced in
the above illustration. The individual reaction times are described in detail
below.
Table C-3 Importance of reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
(S5-95U)
Ser. Reaction time Ab- Importance

No. brevi-
ation
1 ... of application program in tprog Important for access to process
the CPU image, otherwise negligible
2 ... between control processor tinter Occurs in every DP data transfer
and communication processor between the processors in the
in the S5-95U S5-95U
3 ... on the PROFIBUS-DP bus tDP Important if bus configuration is
large, baud rate is low and/or
data telegrams are extensive
4 ... within the slave tslave ET 200U, S5-95U: very impor-
tant
ET 200B, ET 200C: less impor-
tant

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-5
C.2.1 Reaction time tprog
Definition tprog is the reaction time of the application program in the CPU. tprog is negli-
gible if you access directly (load/transfer commands).
Table C-4 Reaction time tprog (S5-95U)
Reaction time Caused by Importance

tprog for accessing S5-95U very important
process image
Application program Input
data
PII
Address areas:
OB 1
Inputs
Outputs
Output
data
PIO
At the start of the application program cycle, the process image of the in-
puts is transferred to the PII.
At the end of the application program cycle, the process image of the out-
puts is transferred from the PIO to the outputs address area.
If you access the process image, tprog equals the duration of the application
program.
For calculating cycle time and reaction time, see the system manual
S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Controller, chapter 6)

C-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.2.2 Reaction time tinter
Definition tinter is the interrupt delay time for the DP data transfer between the control
processor and the communication processor in the S5-95U. tinter has a
constant value of 0.5 ms and occurs in every data transfer between the con-
trol processor and the communication processor.
tinter
Figure C-4 Reaction time tinter (S5-95U)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-7
C.3 Reaction time tDP
Definition tDP is the reaction time on the PROFIBUS-DP bus between master and slave.
tDP tDP
Figure C-5 Reaction time tDP
Importance tDP depends on the following factors:
Table C-5 Factors influencing reaction time tDP
Factor Reaction time tDP is low:

Baud rate High baud rate, e.g. > 500 kbaud
Number of DP slaves Few DP slaves assigned to a master

C-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.4 Reaction time tslave
Definition tslave is the reaction time within the DP slave.
tslave tslave
Figure C-6 Reaction time tslave
Negligible ... tslave is negligible for the DP slaves:

ET 200B (with low input/output delay) and
ET 200C (with low input/output delay).
Important ... tslave is very important for the DP slaves:

ET 200U and
S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP interface
ET 200B and ET 200C with high input/output delay
Table C-6 Factors which favor reaction time tslave
Factor favoring a low reaction time tslave in ET 200U and S5-95U:

Configura- Uniform distribution of inputs and outputs on a DP slave
tion of All DP slaves of similar configuration; if necessary, divide the I/O
DP slaves modules of an ET 200U to two ET 200Us
tslave for The delay tslave for the IM 308-C as DP slave (see section C.1) is:
IM 308-C/DP slave tslave = tprog + tcons
tslave for S5-95U tslave is the reaction time in the DP slave. The way in which this reaction time
affects the S5-95U programmable controller with PROFIBUS-DP interface is
described in detail in the system manual S5-90U/S5-95U Programmable Con-
troller, chapter 6 (”Calculating the cycle and reaction times”).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-9
tslave for ET 200U tslave is the reaction time in the DP slave. As regards the ET 200U distributed
I/O stations, three different reaction times must be taken into account:
Table C-7 Reaction times in the ET 200U
Reaction times in the Caused by: Importance

ET 200U
tIM 318 of a data telegram in When the IM 318 receives a data telegram from the DP mas- tIM 318 is short when
the ET 200U ter, it must interrupt serial data transfer on the I/O bus. Dur- baud rate is high
ing the interrupt, the IM 318 processes the data telegram.
output bytes are
Telegram incoming few, and
from PROFIBUS-DP input bytes are few
(only at baud rates
> 187.5 kbaud)
IM 318 transfers
data on I/O bus
IM 318 processes an
incoming data
telegram
Time
tI/Obus between IM 318 and Data is transferred between the input/output modules and the Important as number
I/O modules IM 318 on the serial I/O bus. of I/O modules in-
The length of this reaction time t depends on the num- creases
I/Obus
ber of I/O modules inserted (or more precisely on the number
of ”bytes inserted”).
IM
318
tI/O The input/output modules have specific reaction times. Important for analog
For input modules, tI/O is the time between a signal change at modules
the input and the status change on the I/O bus.
For output modules, tI/O is the time between a status change
on the I/O bus and the signal change at the output.
For details of the reaction times of the input/output modules,
see the manual ET 200U Distributed I/O Station.

C-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.5 Example illustrating how to calculate reaction times for

the ET 200 distributed I/O system
Overview This section contains a worked example illustrating how to calculate the
reaction times tprog, tcons, tDP and tslave in the ET 200 distributed I/O system
with IM 308-C as DP master.
Section Topic Page

C.5.1 Calculating tprog and tcons C-13
C.5.2 Calculating tDP C-14
C.5.3 Calculating tslave C-15
C.5.4 Calculating reaction time tR C-17
Sample The illustration below shows a sample configuration with an IM 308-C as DP

configuration master and a variety of DP slaves:
DP master CPU IM
308-C
Slave 1
ET
200U
8DA 8DE
Slave 2
ET 200B-8DI
Slave 3
ET 200B-8DO
Slave 4
ET 200C-8DI
Figure C-7 Example of a bus configuration

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-11
An input of the ET 200B-8DI must set an output on the ET 200U. The baud
rate is 500 kbaud.

C-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.5.1 Calculating tprog and tcons
tprog tprog is dependent on the STEP 5 application program.

Let us suppose that the process image only is accessed and that the length of
the application program is 100 ms:
tprog = 100 ms
tcons Only the process image is accessed (see above, ”Calculating tprog”), so tcons
is negligible.
tcons = 0 ms

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-13
C.5.2 Calculating tDP
Components of tDP The reaction time tDP comprises the following components. The constants A,
B and Tbyte depend on the baud rate (see Table C-8).
tDP = constant A
+ (constant B + (number of I/O bytes Tbyte)) [slave 1]
+ ...
+ (constant B + (number of I/O bytes Tbyte)) [slave n]
Table C-8 Constants for various baud rates
Baud rate Constant A Constant B Tbyte (ms)

(in ms) (in ms)
9.6 kbaud 64.5 25.6 1.15
19.2 kbaud 32.3 12.8 0.573
93.75 kbaud 6.6 2.62 0.118
187.5 kbaud 3.3 1.31 0.059
500 kbaud 1.6 0.49 0.022
1.5 Mbaud 0.67 0.164 0.00733
3 Mbaud 0.436 0.085 0.00367
6 Mbaud 0.27 0.044 0.00183
12 Mbaud 0.191 0.024 0.00092
Calculating tDP The reaction time tDP comprises the following components:
tDP = 1.6 ms
+ (0.49 ms + 2 0.022 ms) [slave 1]
+ (0.49 ms + 1 0.022 ms) [slave 2]
+ (0.49 ms + 1 0.022 ms) [slave 3]
+ (0.49 ms + 1 0.022 ms) [slave 4]
tDP = 3.67 ms
Note
If there is at least one ET 200U distributed I/O station or S5-95U with DP
slave interface on the PROFIBUS-DP bus, tDP is at least 2 ms. Consequently,
you must substitute 2 ms for any calculated result that is less than 2 ms.

C-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.5.3 Calculating tslave
Calculating tslave The configuration includes three different slaves:
Slave tslave
ET 200B 0 ms
ET 200C 0 ms
ET 200U tIM 318 + tI/Obus + tI/O
IM 308-C/DP-Slave tprog + tcons
Let us calculate tslave for the ET 200U. tslave for the ET 200U is the sum of
three different reaction times, namely tIM 318, tI/O bus and tI/O:
Calculating tIM 318 tIM 318 is the reaction time in the ET 200U caused by a data telegram.
Table C-9 Basic values at different baud rates for calculating the reaction
time tIM 318 of the ET 200U
Baud rate Basic value TbyteO (ms) TbyteI (ms)

(ms)
9.6 kbaud 2.3 1.16 0.0036
19.2 kbaud 1.18 0.58 0.0036
93.75 kbaud 0.273 0.122 0.0036
187.5 kbaud 0.154 0.063 0.0036
500.0 kbaud 0.081 0.026 0.0036
1.5 Mbaud (0 output byte) 0.0594 0.0 0.0036
1.5 Mbaud (1 output byte) 0.069 0.0 0.0036
1.5 Mbaud (2 output bytes) 0.073 0.0 0.0036
1.5 Mbaud (> 2 output bytes) 0.043 0.011 0.0036
Insert the values from Table C-9 to calculate tIM 318:
Basic value = 0.081 ms

+
1 0.026 ms = 0.026 ms
(Number of output bytes) (TbyteO) +
1 0.0036 ms = 0.0036 ms
(Number of input bytes) (TbyteI) =
tIM 318 ^ 0.03 ms

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-15
Calculating tI/Obus tI/Obus is the duration of the transfer between the IM 318 and the I/O modules
via the I/O bus.
Table C-10 Constants for calculating tI/Obus for ET 200U
Reaction time constant (ms) Constant (”bytes inserted”) (ms)

ET 200U ET 200U ET 200U ET 200U
(Siemens DP) (standard DP) (Siemens DP) (standard DP)
0.151 0.251 0.089 0.120
Calculate tI/Obus by inserting the values from the table above:
Reaction time constant = 0.151 ms

+
0 0.014 ms = 0.0 ms
(Number of analog modules, (constant)
CPs, IPs) +
2 0.089 ms = 0.178 ms
(”Number of bytes inserted”) (”bytes inserted”
constant) +
0 0.039 ms = 0.0 ms
(Number of empty slots) (constant)
=
tI/Obus ^ 0.33 ms
Calculating tI/O The manual ET 200U Distributed I/O Station provides us with an average
figure of 5 ms:
tI/O = 5 ms
Final calculation The figures already obtained can now be used to calculate tslave for the
ET 200U:
tslave, ET 200U = tIM 318 + tI/Obus + tI/O = 0.03 ms + 0.33 ms + 5 ms
tslave, ET 200U = 5.36 ms

C-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.5.4 Calculating reaction time tR
What is reaction The reaction time tR is the time which elapses between the switching of an
time tR? input on a DP slave and the corresponding switching of an output.
Components of the The reaction time tR is calculated on the basis of the reaction times deter-
reaction time tR mined beforehand. The ET 200 distributed I/O system operates on the basis
of an asynchronous communication mechanism, so two cases can be distin-
guished:
Typical reaction time and
Worst-case reaction time
Table C-11 lists the multiplication factors for the reaction times:
Table C-11 Multiplication factors for the reaction times
Reaction time Factor Factor

Medium
(typical) (worst case)
tI/O 1 1
DP slave ((input)
p ) tslave tI/Obus 1 1
tIM 318 1 (1+tI/O bus/tDP)
tDP 0.5 1
DP master and PROFIBUS- tcons 1 2

DP bus tprog 1.5 2
tDP 0.5 1
tIM 318 1 (1+tI/O bus/tDP)
DP slave (output)
( p ) tslave tI/Obus 1 2
tI/O 1 1
tR =

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-17
Calculating the The reaction time tR for a typical situation is calculated below. The values
typical reaction used are those calculated in the worked example in the preceding section.
time tR
Table C-12 Calculating the typical reaction time
Reaction time Time (ms) Factor Final value

Medium
(typical) (ms)
tI/O 0.0 1 0.0
DP slave
l (i
(input)) tI/Obus 0.0 1 0.0
tslave
tIM 318 0.0 1 0.0
tDP 3.67 0.5 1.835
DP master and tcons 0.0 2 0.0
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS-DP
bus tprog 100.0 1.5 150.0
tDP 3.67 0.5 1.835
tIM 318 0.03 1 0.03
DP slave
l ((out- tI/Obus 0.33 1 0.33
put) tslave
tI/O 5.0 1 5.0
tR = 159.03
Calculating the The worst-case reaction time tR is calculated below:

worst-case
reaction time tR
Table C-13 Calculating the worst-case reaction time tR
Reaction time Time (ms) Factor (typical) Final value

Medium
(ms)
tI/O 0.0 1 0.0
DP slave
l (i
(in- tI/Obus 0.0 1 0.0
put) tslave
tIM 318 0.0 (1+tI/O bus/tDP) 0.0
tDP 3.67 1 3.67
DP master and tcons 0.0 2 0.0
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS-
DP bus tprog 100.0 2 200.0
tDP 3.67 1 3.67
tIM 318 0.03 (1+tI/O bus/tDP) 0.03
DP slave
l ((out- tI/Obus 0.33 2 0.66
put) tslave
tI/O 5.0 1 5.0
tR = 213.03

C-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Result of reaction When an input on the ET 200B-8DI sets an output on the ET 200U, the typi-
time tR cal reaction time is approx. 159 ms. The worst-case reaction time is approx.
213 ms.
Fig. C-8 shows how the PROFIBUS-DP field bus contributes to the reaction
time.
Delay of PROFIBUS-
2.3 % DP 3.4 %
3.4 % ET 200U 2.7 %
94.3 % Application program 93.9 %
Typical reaction time tR Worst-case reaction time tR
Figure C-8 Contribution of PROFIBUS-DP to the reaction time

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-19
C.6 Special cases which may prolong the reaction time tR
Overview The preceding section dealt with the principles of calculating reaction time tR
under normal circumstances (mono-master mode, ET 200U not in slow
mode, steady-state operation).
This section shows how the reaction time tR changes when:
the bus configuration is loaded (station connecting cycle)
diagnostic data is transferred from the slave (diagnostics cycle)
there is more than one DP master on the PROFIBUS-DP bus
(token-passing cycle)
or
the ET 200U is operating in slow mode.
Section Topic Page

C.6.1 How is data exchanged? C-21
C.6.2 ET 200U operating in slow mode C-25

C-20 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.6.1 How is data exchanged?
Overview of data Fig. C-9 illustrates how the DP master and the DP slaves exchange data. In
exchange the station connecting cycle, the DP master ascertains which stations are
available on the bus. If a station has failed, the IM 308-C detects this state in
the station connecting cycle.
In the data cycle, the IM 308-C sends output data to the slaves and receives
input data.
In the diagnostics cycle, the DP slaves that have experienced a change in
their diagnostic message report this change to the IM 308-C.
The DP master then passes the token (send authorization) to the next DP
master (if there is more than one in the system) = token passing.
Start
Station connecting cycle
Steady-state operation
Data cycle
Slave xxx yes

has diagnostic Diagnostics cycle
report?
no
Token passing
Figure C-9 Block diagram illustrating exchange of data between DP master and DP
slave

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-21
Power-up phase/ As regards the exchange of data between DP master and DP slave, a
steady-state distinction is drawn between the power-up phase and steady-state opera-
operation tion.
Power-up phase: The DP master runs the program shown in Fig. C-10
once, starting with the station connecting cycle. This is followed by
steady-state operation.
Steady-state operation: The DP master runs the program repeatedly, the
only change being the station connecting cycle. The station connecting
cycle is repeated only in the event of an error.
The individual program parts are described below, along with the effects they
have on the reaction time tR.
Contribution of the Table C-14 lists the events which cause the DP master to run the station con-
station connecting necting cycle. The table also shows how this response affects the reaction
cycle to tR time.
Table C-14 Reaction times in the station connecting cycle
Event Response of IM 308-C in

station connecting cycle
The DP master The DP master checks whether all DP slaves configured with
runs up (pow- COM PROFIBUS are addressable (= power-up phase).
er-up phase) In the subsequent data cycle, the DP master takes into account only
those DP slaves which it identified as addressable.
The DP master If a DP slave is not accessible or could not be addressed in the pow-
is in steady-state er-up phase, the DP master runs the station connecting cycle for the
operation. non-addressable DP slave.
Data cycle In the data cycle the DP master sends output data to the DP slaves and re-
ceives their input data.
Only those DP slaves which were identified as addressable in the station con-
necting cycle are taken into account in the data cycle.
The reaction time tR corresponds to the actual reaction time (see section C.5)
when only the data cycle is run (in error-free operation).
Conditions for A diagnostics cycle takes place only if the diagnostic report of at least one
diagnostics cycle DP slave has changed.
What is a token? If there is more than one DP master on the PROFIBUS-DP bus (i.e. two or
more DP masters), at any given time only one DP master can have permis-
sion to access the bus.
Access permission (the token) is passed to each DP master in turn. In the pe-
riods in which it does not have the token, a DP master cannot address its DP
slaves.

C-22 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
How does token Fig. C-10 illustrates how the token is passed from one master to another
passing work? (Steps 1 to 4 are repeated again and again). The same principle applies for
any multimaster configuration.
Token
1. Master No. 1 has the token and Master No. 1 Master No. 2
thus can address its slaves. Mas- AG AG
ter No. 2 cannot access its slaves.
Slave Slave Slave Slave
Token
2. Master No. 1 passes the token to
Master No. 1 Master No. 2
master No. 2. At this point neither
master can access its slaves. AG AG
Token
3. Master No. 2 has the token and Master No. 1 Master No. 2
thus can address its slaves. Mas- AG AG
ter No. 1 cannot access its slaves.
Token
4. Master No. 2 passes the token to Master No. 1 Master No. 2
master No. 1. At this point neither AG AG
master can access its slaves.
Figure C-10 Token passing between two masters

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-23
Contribution of In a multimaster configuration, the reaction time is prolonged by

token passing to
tR(token) = tR(master 1) + tR(master 2) + ... + tR(master n) where:
tR
tR master 1 Reaction time of DP master 1

tR master 2 Reaction time of DP master 2
tR master n Reaction time of DP master having the highest PROFIBUS
address
tR(token) Reaction time for the entire ET 200 distributed I/O system
Note: The upper limit for tR(token) is set by COM PROFI-
BUS. tR(token) corresponds to the target rotation time Ttr in
COM PROFIBUS
The reaction time tR is calculated in a worked example in section C.5.4. Bear

in mind that the reaction time of a master does not include the reaction time
of its slaves. The only components which make up the reaction time of the
master are tDP, tcons and tprog.

C-24 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
C.6.2 ET 200U operating in slow mode
When does the If, for example, the IP 265 is inserted in the ET 200U, the ET 200U must
ET 200U operate in operate in slow mode. The reaction time tI/Obus is prolonged accordingly.
slow mode?
Worked example This example refers to section C.5. Let us assume that the ET 200U contains
an IP 265 instead of an 8DI.
tI/Obus is calculated as follows:
Reaction time constant = 1.064 ms

+
1 0.014 ms = 0.014 ms
(Number of analog modules, +
CPs, IPs)
9 0.186 ms = 1.674 ms
(”Number of bytes inserted”) =
0 0.087 ms = 0 ms
(Number of empty slots) =
tI/O bus (slow mode) ^ 2.75 ms

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c C-25
Demo programs D
In this chapter This chapter contains demo programs that would otherwise interrupt the flow
of the manual if they were included in the sections to which they actually
belong:
Section Topic Page

D.1 Accessing the DP/AS-I link with FB IM 308-C (FB 192) D-2
D.2 S5-95U: demo FB 30 for saving the overview diagnostics D-12

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-1
Demo programs
D.1 Accessing the DP/AS-I link with FB IM 308-C (FB 192)
In section D.1 Section D.1contains:
Section Topic Page

D.1.1 Calling FB IM308C (FB 192) (DP/AS-I link only) D-3
D.1.2 Interpreting the error messages of FB IM308C (FB 192) D-10
Preconditions You require the following functions of FB IM308C for the DP/AS-I link only
(release 3 and later versions).
Important note Please note the following special feature of the CPU 945:
Note
If FB IM308C is used with the CPU 945, the first job to be processed is not
run. The error flag 00B0H (QVZ) entered in DW 8 must be ignored.
All subsequent jobs are of course processed and run in the normal way.

D-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
D.1.1 Calling FB IM308C (FB 192) (DP/AS-I link only)
Calling FB IM308C With FB IM308C you can access the DP/AS-I link via the IM 308-C. You
must parameterize FB IM308C indirectly in order to do so, i.e. all the re-
quired parameters must be saved in a data block (y).
The call for FB IM308C is shown below. You can find a detailed description
of the block parameters in section 7.3.
STL Meaning
:A DB y Opens data block y
:SPA FB 192 Calls FB 192
Name :IM308C
DPAD : KH0000
IMST : KY0,0
FCT : KCXX XX: Indirect parameterization
GCGR : KM 00000000 00000000
TYP : KY0,0
STAD : KF+0
LEN : KF+0
ERR : DW 0
Data block (y) If FB IM308C is parameterized indirectly (FCT = XX), DB y has the follow-
ing structure, starting at data word 0:
Table D-1 Data block (y)
Data word Parameter DL DR

DW 0 --- Reserved
DW 1 DPAD Address range of IM 308-C (e.g. F800H)
DW 2 IMST Number of IM 308-C PROFIBUS address of DP slave
DW 3 FCT Function of FB IM308C
DW 4 GCGR Reserved
DW 5 TYP Type of STEP 5 memory area
DW 6 STAD Start of STEP 5 memory area
DW 7 LENG No. of bytes transferred
DW 8 ERR Error word of FB IM308C
DW 9 --- Slot number of DP/AS-I link Data record number
DW 10 --- Reserved
DW 11 --- Error code 1 Error code 2
DW 12 --- Reserved

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-3
Demo programs
FCT parameter The functions of the DP/AS-I link can only be activated by indirect parame-
terization. The FCT parameter (DW 3) entered in the data block is used to
activate them.
Table D-2 FCT parameter
FCT Description
DW Initiates a write job and writes data (Data_Write)
CW Reads the acknowledgment for the previously initiated write job
(Check_Write)
DR Initiates a read job (Data_Read)
CR Reads the data and acknowledgment of the previously initiated read
job (Check_Read)
Note
You should observe the following rules in order to ensure that the read and
write jobs are processed correctly.
A check job (CW) is necessary after every write job (DW).
A check job (CR) is necessary after every read job (DR).

D-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
FCT = DW You can use this function to change the address of an AS-I slave or to write
parameter parameters to the AS-I slaves. The FCT = DW function can only be activated
by indirect parameterization. The data block which is used has the following
structure:
Table D-3 FCT = DW parameter

DW 0 --- Not relevant
Range 1 ... 123 (not checked at present)
DW 3 FCT Function of FB IM308C: in this case DW
DW 4 GCGR Not relevant
DW 5 TYP Type of S5 memory area
DW 6 STAD Not relevant
DW 7 LENG Length of S5 memory area in bytes: in this case 03H
DW 9 --- Slot number: in this case 04H Data record number: in this case 84H
DW 11 --- Error code 1 Error code 2
Allocation of S5 If you have selected FCT = DW, you must allocate the S5 memory area as
memory area follows:
Table D-4 Allocation of the S5 memory area if FCT = DW
DB/DX M/S Change operating address Write parameters

DL (n) Bytes (n) OPCODE: 02H OPCODE: 03H
DR (n) Bytes PARAMETER1: 00 to 1FH PARAMETER1: 01 to 1FH
(n + 1) Source address Slave address
DL (n + 1) Bytes PARAMETER2: 00 to 1FH PARAMETER2: 0 to 0FH
(n + 2) Destination address Parameter for AS-I slave

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-5
Demo programs
FCT = CW This function reads the acknowledgments for the previously initiated FCT =
parameter DW function. The acknowledgments indicate how the FCT = DW function
was terminated (DW 8: ERR parameter of FB IM308C; DW 11: error codes 1
and 2).
The FCT = CW function can only be activated by indirect parameterization.
The data block which is used has the following structure:
Table D-5 FCT = CW parameter

DW 3 FCT Function of FB IM308C: in this case CW
DW 5 TYP Not relevant
DW 7 LENG Not relevant
DW 8 ERR Acknowledgment: error word of FB IM308C
DW 11 --- Acknowledgment: error code 1 Acknowledgment: error code 2
Note
If you change the address of an AS-I slave with the FCT = CW function, the
original data of the AS-I slave remains valid (i.e. it is not reset).

D-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
FCT = DR This function reads the parameters of the DP/AS-I link. The FCT = DR func-
parameter tion can only be activated by indirect parameterization. The data block which
is used has the following structure:
Table D-6 FCT = DR parameter

DW 3 FCT Function of FB IM308C: in this case DR
DW 5 TYP Not relevant
DW 9 --- Slot number: in this case 04H Data record number: in this case 84H

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-7
Demo programs
FCT = CR This function shows the parameter echo, the version ID and the acknowledg-
parameter ments for the DP/AS-I link following the previously initiated FCT = DR
function. The acknowledgments indicate how the FCT = DR function was
terminated (DW 8: ERR parameter of FB IM308C; DW 11: error codes 1 and
2).
The FCT = CR function can only be activated by indirect parameterization.
The data block which is used has the following structure:
Table D-7 FCT = CR parameter

Note: 00H or 123 causes an error message
(see DW8)
DW 3 FCT Function of FB IM308C: in this case CR
DW 4 GCGR Reserved
DW 5 TYP Type of STEP 5 memory area
DW 6 STAD Start of STEP 5 memory area
DW 8 ERR Acknowledgment: error word of FB IM308C
DW 12 --- Reserved

D-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
Data in S5 memory The table below shows the allocation of the S5 memory area. The first 16
area bytes represent the parameter echo; each nibble corresponds to one slave. In
the following nine bytes firmware version and the release date of the DP/
AS-I Link are specified in ASCII code.
Table D-8 Allocation of the S5 memory area if FCT = CR
DB/DX M/S Parameter echo of AS-I slaves (4 bits each)

DW n Bytes n / n+1 Irrelevant / slave 1 / slave 2 / slave 3
DW n+1 Bytes n+2 / n+3 Slave 4 / slave 5 / slave 6 / slave 7
: : :
Version and release of DP/AS-I link
DW n+8 Bytes n+17 / n+18 5A30H = Z0 (firmware Z02 of 31.07.96)
DW n+9 Bytes n+19 / n+20 3233H = 23 (firmware Z02 of 31.07.96)
DW n+10 Bytes n+21 / n+22 3130H = 10 (FW Z02 of 31.07.96)
DW n+11 Bytes n+23 / n+24 3739H = 79 (FW Z02 of 31.07.96)
DL n+12 Bytes n+25 36H = 6 (FW Z02 of 31.07.96)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-9
Demo programs
D.1.2 Interpreting the error messages of FBIM308C (FB 192) (DP/AS-I

link only)
ERR parameter If an error occurs when FB IM308C is processed, information about its cause
can be found in DW 8. Please refer to section 7.3.3 for a detailed description
of the ERR parameter and the associated error numbers.
If you use the functions of the FB IM308C with the DP-AS-I link, the mea-
nings of the subsequent error numbers of the ERR parameter differ from
those specified in Section 7.3.3.
ERR error Meaning What to do

byte
Hex. Dec.
C1H 193 At least one of the addi- Check the error codes 1 and 2 in DW 11
tionally required parame- of the parameter DB in the table in Sec-
ters (DW 9 of the parame- tion D.1.2. There you will find detailed
ter DB or the OPCODE in information on the incorrect parameter.
the S5 memory area) is im-
permissible.
C3H 195 The DP slave has failed. Use the ”read slave diagnosis” (SD) func-
tion of the FB IM308C to read the diag-
nosis of the DP slave.
C6H 198 The desired function could Check the error codes 1 and 2 in DW 11
not be executed. of the parameter DB in the table in Sec-
tion D.1.2. There you will find detailed
information on the error.
Error code 1 The left byte of data word DW 11 contains error code 1. Here you can find
parameter general information about any read or write errors that have occurred. The
following error numbers are output:
DFH: An error has occurred during a write job (Data_Write)
DEH: An error has occurred during a read job (Data_Read)
01H: A previous job is still running; repeat the last job

D-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
Error code 2 The right byte of data word DW 11 contains error code 2. You can find more
parameter detailed information about any errors that have occurred here.
Table D-9 Meaning of the error code 2 parameter
Byte 0 Meaningg Remedy

y
Hex. Dec.
01H 001 AS-I slave not activated ---
02H 002 No source slave Input error; enter correct value
03H 003 AS-I slave with address 0 already exists ---
04H 004 Destination slave already exists ---
05H 005 Cannot delete source address ---
06H 006 Cannot pprogram
g source address with new address ---
07H 007
08H 008 Cannot write new parameters Input error; enter correct value
09H 009 No meaning ---
0AH 010 No meaning ---
0BH 011 Job number unknown Input error; enter correct value
0CH 012 Data record unknown Input error; enter correct value
0DH 013 Opcode of AS-I Manager unknown Input error; enter correct value
0EH 014 Telegram too long or too short Enter correct number of bytes
0FH 015 Automatic programming active Repeat job
10H 016 Argument too long; source address = destination Input error; enter correct argument
address

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-11
Demo programs
D.2 S5-95U: demo FB 30 for saving the overview diagnostics
Demo FB: When FB 30 is called, the bits in EW 56 (overview diagnostics) are reset.
application You thus cannot tell from EW 56 whether the slave is functioning again (see
section 10.4.1).
The demo FB 30 shown below (”SLAVEINF”) can be used instead of EW 56
to determine a possible slave failure.
Purpose of the If a slave can no longer be addressed, the corresponding bit in the ”INF”
demo FB 30 parameter is set in accordance with the overview diagnostics (EW 56). As
soon as the slave can be addressed again, the corresponding bit in the ”INF”
parameter is reset.
Sequence of the The demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”) is described below. Proceed as follows:

demo FB 30
1. Call FB 230 during cyclic program processing (see Table D-10).
Result: The slave diagnostics of all slaves are contained in DB 230 (see
Table D-11).
2. Now call the demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”) (see Table D-12). The contents
of the demo FB 30 are shown in Table D-13.
Result: The overview diagnostics are contained in MW 230 (”INF” pa-
rameter) and have the same structure as in EW 56.

D-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
Calling FB 230 FB 230 is called during cyclic program processing. The following STEP 5
application program shows how FB 230 is called with four DP slaves:
Table D-10 FB 230 call for the demo FB (”SLAVEINF”)
STL Description
: U E 56.0 Lowest station
: SPB FB230
S_NR : KY0,0
DBNR : KY230,0 Slave diagnostics saved in DB 230,
starting at DW 0
: U E 56.1 2nd lowest station

: SPB FB230
S_NR : KY0,1
starting at DW 20
: U E 56.2 3rd lowest station

: SPB FB230
S_NR : KY0,2
starting at DW 40
: U E 56.3 4th lowest station

: SPB FB230
S_NR : KY0,3
starting at DW 60

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-13
Demo programs
Contents of DB DB 230 contains the slave diagnostics of the slaves you fetched via FB 230.
230 230 In this case it has the following contents:
Table D-11 Contents of DB 230
Data word DL DR
DW 0 PROFIBUS address of DP slave Number of diagnostic bytes
(lowest DP slave)
DW 1 Station status 1 Station status 2
DW 2 ... ...
... ... ...
(2nd lowest DP slave)
DW 22 ... ...
... ... ...
(3rd lowest DP slave)
DW 42 ... ...
... ... ...
(4th lowest DP slave)
DW 62 ... ...
... ... ...
Calling the demo The following example shows how the demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”) is called
FB 30 during cyclic program processing.
(”SLAVEINF”)
Table D-12 Call for the demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF” )
STL Meaning
OB 1
: L KF 230 Loads DB number
: TMB 10 Saves DB number in MB 10
: SPA FB 30 Branches to FB 30 SLAVEINF
DBNR : MB 10 MB 10 ––> KF 230

INF : MW 230 Overview diagnostics contained in MW 230; compare EW 56
ST01 : DL 1 Station status 1 of lowest station
ST02 : DL 21 Station status 1 of 2nd lowest station
ST03 : DL 41 Station status 1 of 3rd lowest station
ST04 : DL 61 Station status 1 of 4th lowest station

D-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
Contents of the The following demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”) was written for four slaves, but
demo FB 30 can be adapted if necessary for any other number of slaves.
(”SLAVEINF”)
Table D-13 Contents of the demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”)
STL Meaning
Network 1 0000
Name :SLAVEINF
Des :DBNR E/A/D/B/T/Z: B
Des :INF E/A/D/B/T/Z: E BI/BY/W/D: W
Des :ST01 E/A/D/B/T/Z: E I/BY/W/D: BY
Des :ST02 E/A/D/B/T/Z: E BI/BY/W/D: BY
Des :ST03 E/A/D/B/T/Z: E BI/BY/W/D: BY
Des :ST04 E/A/D/B/T/Z: EI/BY/W/D: BY
:
:
:B =DBNR A DBxx (xx => number)
: Check for lowest slave
:L =ST01 Station status 1 of lowest slave (see
: E 56.0)
:L KH 0001 corresponds to => slave cannot be ad-
: dressed (=> slave failure)
:!=F If slave failure => branch
:SPB =M001
:L =INF If no slave failure => reset
:L KH FEFF bit 0 of INF parameter
:UW via UW link
:T =INF
:
:L =ST02 Check for 2nd lowest slave (see E
:L KH 0001 56.1)
:!=F
:SPB =M002
:L =INF
:L KH FDFF
:UW
:T =INF
:
:L =ST03 Check for 3rd lowest slave
:L KH 0001
:!=F
:SPB =M003
:L =INF
:L KH FBFF
:UW
:T =INF
:
:L =ST04 Check for 4th lowest slave
:L KH 0001
:!=F
:SPB =M004
:L =INF
:L KH F7FF
:UW
:T =INF
:
:
:BEA etc. for all other slaves
:

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-15
Demo programs
Table D-13 Contents of the demo FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”), continued
M001 :L =INF Failure: lowest slave

:L KH 0100 Set bit 8 of INF parameter via OW
:OW link
:T =INF
:BEA
M002 :L =INF Failure: 2nd lowest slave
:OW link
:T =INF
:BEA
M003 :L =INF Failure: 3rd lowest slave
:OW link
:T =INF
:BEA
M004 :L =INF Failure: 4th lowest slave
:OW link
:T =INF
:BE etc. for all other slaves

D-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Demo programs
Example The interpretation with FB 30 (”SLAVEINF”) is shown below with the aid of
an example.
Assumptions:
Four stations with the following PROFIBUS addresses: 5, 20, 110, 123.
Station 110 has failed.
The overview diagnostics (EW 56) thus have the following appearance:
Table D-14 Overview diagnostics
Input
p byte
y Bit position
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
56 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
57 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 Bits correspond to the DP slaves ranging from the lowest to the highest PROFIBUS ad-
dress: (lowest PROFIBUS address: EB 56.0; highest PROFIBUS address with
16 slaves: EB 57.7).
1. You can fetch the slave diagnostics via FB 230 and save them in DB 230,
starting at DW 40, for station 110 (--> EB 56 = 00H).
2. You can evaluate the slave diagnostics with the aid of FB 30 (”SLA-
VEINF”)and set the corresponding bits in the ”INF” parameter (MW
230).
Result: MW 230 now has the following appearance (cf. Table 10-4, EW 56):
Table D-15 MW 230
Flagg word Bit position

230
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MB 230 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
MB 231 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This tells you that the 3rd lowest station (station 110) has failed.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c D-17
Demo programs

D-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Dimensional drawings E
In this chapter This chapter contains dimensional drawings of all the components described
in this manual.
Section Topic Page

E.1 Dimensional drawing of the IM 308-C master interface E-2
E.2 Dimensional drawings of the bus connectors E-3
E.3 Dimensional drawings of the RS 485 repeater E-5
E.4 Dimensional drawing of the PROFIBUS Terminator E-6
The dimensional drawing of the S5-95U programmable controller is in the

system manual S5-95U Programmable Controller.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c E-1
Dimensional drawings
E.1 Dimensional drawing of the IM 308-C master interface
192.7
160
5.5
234
243
182
192
25
48
45
189.4 20
Figure E-1 Dimensional drawing of the IM 308-C master interface

E-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
E.2 Dimensional drawings of the bus connector
Contact sur- Contact sur-

face of D-sub face of D-sub
15.8 34 connector 15.8 34 connector
8-0.2 8-0.2
5

25
25
64
64
10 10
on on
off off
without programmer socket with programmer socket
Figure E-2 IP 20 bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.11-0XA0)
15 4 Contact sur-
34
face of D-sub
connector
25
35
58
10
30°
Figure E-3 IP 20 bus connector (6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0)

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c E-3
Contact surface of Contact surface of D-

D-sub connector sub connector
15,8 38 15,8 38
8-0.1 8-0.1
5
25
25
54
54
10 10
35° 35°
without programmer socket with programmer socket
Figure E-4 IP 20 bus connector (6ES7 972-0B.40-0XA0)

E-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
E.3 Dimensional drawings of the RS 485 repeater
45 73
128
125
Figure E-5 RS 485 repeater on standard-section busbar
45 70
125
Figure E-6 RS 485 repeater on busbar for S7-300

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c E-5
E.4 Dimensional drawing of the PROFIBUS Terminator
SIEMENS
PROFIBUS
TERMINATOR
DC
24 V
70
L+ M PE A1 B1
29.6
6ES7 972–0DA00–0AA0
40.3
60 44.5
Figure E-7 PROFIBUS Terminator

E-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Order numbers F
Order numbers Table F-1 lists all the components, complete with order numbers, that you
can order as options for the ET 200 distributed I/O system.
Note
You can find additional order numbers in Catalog ST PI, PROFIBUS & AS
Interface, Components on the Field Bus. Your SIEMENS partner will be
glad to help you.
Table F-1 Order numbers
Part Order number Com-

ment
COM PROFIBUS, as of V 5.0 6ES5 895-6SE03 –
(including the COM PROFIBUS manual
(PDF))
COM PROFIBUS V 3.3 6ES5 895-6SE.2 –
IM 308-C (including memory card) 6ES5 308-3UC11 –
Memory card for IM 308-C (flash EPROM)
256 KB 6ES5 374-1FH21 No
longer
available
256 KB 6ES5 374-1KH21* –
512 KB 6ES5 374-1FJ21 No
longer
available
1 MB 6ES5 374-1KK21* –
Programming adapter for the memory card 6ES5 985-2MC11 –
S5-95U programmable controller with DP ma- 6ES5 095-8ME01 –
ster interface (including 32 K-EEPROM)
32 K-EEPROM for S5-95U with DP master 6ES5 375-0LC61 –
interface

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c F-1
Order numbers
Table F-1 Order numbers, continued

ment
Bus connector
S Up to 12 Mbps 6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0 Without
program-
ming
port
S Up to 12 Mbps 6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0 With pro-
gram-
ming
port
S Up to 12 Mbps, 30_ outgoing cable unit 6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0 Without
program-
ming
port
S Up to 12 Mbps, 35_ outgoing cable unit 6ES7 972-0BA40-0XA0 Without
program-
ming
port
S Up to 12 Mbps, 35_ outgoing cable unit 6ES7 972-0BB40-0XA0 With pro-
gram-
ming
port
RS 485 repeater in IP 20 6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0 –
PROFIBUS Terminator 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0 –
Bus cable –
S Bus line 6XV1 830-0AH10
S Bus line with PE sheath 6XV1 830-0BH10
S Direct-buried cable 6XV1 830-3AH10
S Trailing cable 6XV1 830-3BH10
S Bus line with festoon attachment 6XV1 830-3CH10
E(E)PROM programming device for parallel –
interface (LPT1)
S E(E)PROM programming device 6ES5 696-3AA11
S STEP 5/ST PC package, external PROM S79200-A0567-F088
programmer
S Connecting cable (1.5 m in length) C79195-A3863-H150

F-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Order numbers
Table F-1 Order numbers, continued

ment
Manuals –
System Manual S5-90U/S5-95U Program- 6ES5 998-8MA.2
mable Controller
SINEC CP 5412 (A2) 6GK1 971-5CA00-0AA.
SINEC L2-DP Interface of the S5-95U 6ES5 998-8MD.1
Programmable Controller (DP slave)
ET 200B Distributed I/O Device 6ES5 998-4ET.1
ET 200C Distributed I/O Device 6ES5 998-3EC.1
ET 200L Distributed I/O Device 6ES7 130-1AA00-8.A0
ET 200M Distributed I/O Device 6ES7 153-1AA00-8.A0
ET 200U Distributed I/O Device 6ES5 998-5ET.1
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device 6ES7 151-1AA00-8.A0
ET 200X Distributed I/O Device 6ES7 198-8FA00-8.A0
DP/AS-I Link 6ES7-156-0AA00-8.A0
ET 200 Handheld 6ES5 998-7ET.1
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks 6GK1 970-5CA10-0AA.
Repeater adapter 6GK1 510-1AA00 –
PROFIBUS RS 485 bus terminal 6GK1 500-0A.00 –
Optical link modules for fiber-optic cables 6GK1 502-3AB00 –
6GK1 502-4AB00
* This memory card is also shipped with the IM 308-C (6ES5 308-3UC11).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c F-3
Order numbers

F-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
COM PROFIBUS V3.3 or lower G
In this chapter You only need to read this chapter if you are working with COM PROFIBUS
V3.0 to V3.3. You will find the documentation for COM PROFIBUS V 5.0
on the COM PROFIBUS CD-ROM (see also Section 12).
For a limited transitional period, COM PROFIBUS V3.3 will be shipped in
parallel with the new COM PROFIBUS V 5.0.
This chapter contains a full description for COM PROFIBUS V3.0 to V3.3.
Section Topic Page

G.1 Differences between COM PROFIBUS V3.0 to V3.3 and impor- G-2
tant information on the online functions
G.2 Scope of applications and preconditions for using the COM G-10
PROFIBUS parameterization software
G.3 Starting COM PROFIBUS G-12
G.4 Graphical user interface of COM PROFIBUS G-14
G.5 Example of how to parameterize a DP configuration with G-17
COM PROFIBUS
G.6 Example of how to parameterize an FMS configuration with G-24
COM PROFIBUS
G.7 Creating and opening a program file; importing data G-30
G.8 Parameterizing the configuration of a master system with G-33
COM PROFIBUS
G.9 Making provision for masters other than those entered with G-53
COM PROFIBUS
G.10 Device master files G-54
G.11 Saving and exporting the configuration parameterized with G-55
COM PROFIBUS
G.12 Documenting and printing the parameterized configuration G-64
G.13 PROFIBUS-DP: service functions with COM PROFIBUS G-65
Purpose of the Once you have read this chapter:

chapter
You will know how to install COM PROFIBUS on your programming
device or PC and how to work with COM PROFIBUS.
You will be able to enter the entire configuration of an ET 200 distributed
I/O system in COM PROFIBUS.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-1
COM PROFIBUS V3.3 or lower
G.1 Differences between COM PROFIBUS V3.0 to V3.3 and

important information on the online functions
COM PROFIBUS: COM PROFIBUS V3.3 has the following new functions and features that
from V3.2 to V3.3 were not available in V3.2:
S The “control” function is now available for the station type ET 200L-SC,
ET 200L-SC IM-SC.
S You can use the Help " Info via DP card menu command to check the
installed DP card and any associated ressources.
S The CP 5412 (A2) now supports automatic transmission rate detection.
S The CP 5412 (A2) as DP master supports the “Overview diagnostics” on-
line function.
COM PROFIBUS: COM PROFIBUS V3.2 has the following new functions and features that
S Under the Windows 95 operating system, the online functions are also
possible using the CP5611 adapter (PCI). This adapter handles all PROFI-
BUS transmission rates up to 12 Mbps.
S Before each online function is started, COM PROFIBUS determines the
current transmission rate on the PROFIBUS and sets it. You no longer
need to know in advance the current transmission rate of a bus system you
want to diagnose using the programming device/PC.
Restrictions:
– The CP 5412 (A2) does not support automatic transmission rate detec-
tion.
– The MPI cards can detect transmission rates of up to 1.5 Mbps, but
note that under COM PROFIBUS the MPI cards can only be run up to
a maximum of 500 kbps.
S Stations of the type ET 200L-SC IM-SC can also be configured.
S If you have started one of the online functions (overview diagnosis, slave
diagnosis, status of the DP slave inputs/outputs), you can use the F1 key
to obtain context-sensitive help.
S In the ”Master parameters” dialog box, you can activate the AUTO-
CLEAR functionality for SIMATIC NET PC modules. In AUTOCLEAR
mode, the CP 5412 (A2) or Softnet DP automatically switches to CLEAR
mode (the DP system is powered down) if a malfunction occurs in one or
more DP slaves during the productive phase.
In CLEAR mode, the DP master sends data with a value of 0h to the DP
slaves in the output direction. The DP master does not exit this mode in-
dependently; the user has to explicitly initiate a return to OPERATE
mode.

G-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
COM PROFIBUS: COM PROFIBUS V3.1 has the following new functions and featuresthat
– Brief Overview –
S The full functionality of the online status and error diagnostic functions
(overview diagnostics, slave diagnostics, status of the DP slave inputs/
outputs) can be used.
S The new online function “Control” allows you to set the outputs of the DP
slaves (see next page).
S The File " Export " ASCII file and File " Import " ASCII file menu
commands allow the configuration of a master system to be saved and
loaded in ASCII format.
S Device master files can be created for connecting DP slaves of the ET 200
family to DP masters that are not configured using COM PROFIBUS (see
next page).
S Additional parameters are offered in the “Bus parameters” dialog box for
optimizing bus and response times: “Number of repeaters”, “Number of
OLMs” (optical link modules), “Line length (CU)” and “Line length
(FO)”.
S A baud rate of 45.45 kbaud can be parameterized for PROFIBUS-PA (DP/
PQ coupler).
S All online functions are also supported for the CP 5412 (A2) in DP mode.
S When working with the CP 5412 (A2), you can use the “Overview” but-
ton in the “Master parameters” dialog box to display an overview of all
the configured FMS connections together with the most important param-
eters.
S When working with the CP 5412 (A2), you can use the “Cyclical frames”
button in the “Groups and their properties” dialog box to configure the
cyclical sending of the FREEZE and SYNC control commands.
S S5 function blocks for the analog modules of an ET 200M are shipped
with this version of COM PROFIBUS. After installation you will find the
S5 functions together with a detailed description (readme.doc) in the
COM PROFIBUS directory ...\ANALOG.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-3
Controlling the As of version 3.1 of COM PROFIBUS you can control the outputs of the DP
Outputs slaves on the PROFIBUS-DP from the programming device/PC.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the DP slave in the graphical editing window.
2. Choose the Service Status/control menu command or the Status/con-
trol command from the pop-up menu for the slave (by clicking the slave
with the right mouse button).
3. Suppress the status display of the slave inputs/outputs by clicking on

the COM PROFIBUS toolbar.
4. Specify new control values in the white fields of the ”Outputs” column in
the table.
5. Start the control of the outputs with the new control values by clicking
. Communication between the slave and the master (class 1) is inter-

rupted. The programming device/PC (master class 2) with COM PROFI-
BUS is the master for this period.
6. You click to switch from control back to the current status display of
the inputs/outputs. The connection to the master (class 1) is re-estab-
lished.
Note: If there is no master (class 1) on the bus, “Status” is not possible.
Note: The “Control” function is not available for the PROFIBUS card
“MPI_ISA_Karte” and for the station types DP/AS-I Link and ET 200L-SC.
Creating a Device- As of version 3.1 of COM PROFIBUS, you can create device master files for
Master File connecting DP slaves of the ET 200 family to DP masters of other manufac-
turers.
Principle: You use COM PROFIBUS to configure the DP slave in the usual
way. COM PROFIBUS creates a device master file on the basis of the config-
uration data. The device master file contains the configuration data of the
DP slave optionally in the form of a compact station or a modular station.
You copy the device master file to the device master directory of the other
manufacturer’s configuration tool. This gives the configuration tool a DP
slave with fixed parameterization; the only thing left to do is address assign-
ment.

G-4 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Proceed as follows:
1. Choose the File New menu command.
2. Select ”Default master” as the master station type in the “Master host
selection” dialog box.
Result: The graphical editing window appears with a default as the mas-
ter.
3. Configure the DP slaves in this window in the same way as you do for a
full configuration with COM PROFIBUS (except for addressing).
4. Select a DP slave in the window.
5. Choose the File Create device master file menu command.
6. In the ”Create device master file” dialog box, specify the device name,
the identifier format type and the modularity of the station and then con-
firm you entries.
Note
Select only an identifier format type and station modularity that can be inter-
preted by the non-Siemens configuration tool or DP master (non-Siemens
master).
7. In the ”Save as” dialog box, specify the directory and name of the device
master file and then confirm your entries.
Result: COM PROFIBUS stores the device master files in the ...\PROGDAT
directory.
”Create GSD File” Two check boxes in the ”Create GSD File” dialog box (below) allow you to
Dialog and specify the identifier format type and modularity in which the configuration
Examples is entered in the device master file.
Figure G-1 ”Create GSD File” Dialog Box

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-5
Variant 1: Configuration in normal identifier format and compact station

Create device master file with normal identifier format only
Create device master file with modular station structure
Example of entry in device master file (ET 200M (IM153-1) with 16DE and
4AA):
...
Module=”Cfg–Data” 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, S7 header (3 bytes),
0x11, 0x63 16DI, 4AO
EndModule
...
Variant 2: Configuration in special identifier format and compact station

4AA):
...
Module=”Cfg–Data” 0x04, 0x00, 0x00, S7 header (15 bytes),
0xAD, 0xC4, 0x04, 0x00, 0x00, 0x8B,
0x41, 0x04, 0x00, 0x00, 0x8F, 0xC0,
0x43, 0x01, 0x00, 0x9F, 0xC2, 16DI,
0x83, 0x43, 0x00, 0x25, 0xE0 4AO
EndModule
...
Variant 3: Configuration in normal identifier format and modular sta-

tion
4AA):
...
Module=”Module 1” 0x00 S7 header
EndModule
EndModule
EndModule
Module=”Module 4” 0x11 16DI
EndModule
Module=”Module 5” 0x63 4AO
EndModule
...

G-6 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Variant 4: Configuration in special identifier format and modular station

4AA):
...
Module=”Module 1” 0x04, 0x00, 0x00, 0xAD, 0xC4 S header
EndModule
Module=”Module 2” 0x04, 0x00, 0x00, 0x8B, 0x41 S7 header
EndModule
Module=”Module 3” 0x04, 0x00, 0x00, 0x8F, 0xC0 S7 header
EndModule
Module=”Module 4” 0x43, 0x01, 0x00, 0x9F, 0xC2 16DI
EndModule
Module=”Module 5” 0x83, 0x43, 0x00, 0x25, 0xE0 4AO
EndModule
...
PROFIBUS Monitor PROFIBUS Monitor is also shipped with COM PROFIBUS. PROFIBUS Mo-
nitor appears after installation in the COM PROFIBUS program group. It is
supplied free of charge, and no claims can therefore be made if it is not bug-
free.
There is no description of PROFIBUS Monitor in the ET 200 Distributed I/O
Device manual. There is a detailed description of its functions in the Moni-
tor.wri file, which you will find next to the PROFIBUS Monitor icon in the
program group.
The CP 5412 (A2) does not support the PROFIBUS Monitor shipped with
COM PROFIBUS.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-7
COM PROFIBUS, When you enter the DP parameters, please note the following in connection
online functions with the online functions of COM PROFIBUS:
S The online functions are not supported by COM PROFIBUS under
MS Windows NT. They can be run under MS Windows 3.x or MS Win-
dows 95 on the basis of the CP 5411, the CP 5412 (A2), the CP 5511 and
the MPI cards (integrated MPI interface for Siemens programmers,
MPI_ISO card).
S The CP 5511 cannot be withdrawn during online operation.
S All open MS-DOS applications must be closed before you activate an
online function in Windows 95. Otherwise, there is a danger that inter-
rupts will be lost and COM PROFIBUS will crash.
S When you select the overview diagnostics, the set program file must coin-
cide with the current master parameters. If not, the information which is
displayed will not match the actual bus configuration.
S When you select the Import " DP master function, the bus profile you
have defined and the baud rate of the DP card must coincide with the ac-
tual bus parameters. If not, you will not be able to set up a connection to
the selected station.
If you encounter any errors in connection with the baud rate or the bus
profile, the reaction times on the programmer/PC may be as much as sev-
eral minutes.
Tip: You can shorten this time by disconnecting the PROFIBUS cable
from the programmer/PC.
S If a sequence error is indicated for the Export " DP master or Import "
DP master function, you must wait for a standard period of at least 65 s
before attempting to activate the function again.
S You must close all online applications before you exit COM PROFIBUS.
S Permanent virus checks may impair the online functions.

G-8 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Creating program If you use COM PROFIBUS V3.3 to edit a program file created using
files with COM PROFIBUS < V3.2, the following host type errors occur when the pro-
COM PROFIBUS < gram file is read in:
V3.2
Setting in V3.0 Corruption in V3.1 Corruption in V3.2/3.3

CPU 928A CPU 928 CPU 928
CPU 928B CPU 946/947 CPU 946/947
CPU 946/947 CPU 948 CPU 948
CPU 948 CPU 948 SINUMERIK 840C
In this case, proceed as follows:

1. Open the program file in COM PROFIBUS V3.3.
2. Choose the Configure Host parameters menu command.
3. Click the ”Host type” button in the “Host parameters” dialog box.
4. Select the correct host type, and then click “OK”.
5. If your bus configuration consists of a number of masters on different
hosts, carry out steps 2. to 4. for each host.
Program files created using V3.1 are no longer corrupted as of V3.2.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-9
G.2 Scope of applications and preconditions for using the

COM PROFIBUS parameterization software
Why you need You need the COM PROFIBUS parameterization software:
COM PROFIBUS
to parameterize the bus configuration, the hosts, the masters and the
slaves
to read the data from a memory card/master or write data to a memory
card/master, and
to start up the bus configuration
to generate detailed system documentation
Preconditions for COM PROFIBUS runs under the MS-Windows GUI. We assume that you are
working with familiar with MS-Windows.
COM PROFIBUS
Preconditions for in order to use the full functionality of COM PROFIBUS, you require:
using
The MS-DOS operating system, V 5.0 or higher
COM PROFIBUS
The MS-Windows GUI (V 3.1x or higher) or Windows 95
At least 8 Mbytes free RAM
Approx. 10 Mbytes free space on hard disk
386 CPU or faster
DP online You can use your PC or programmer online on the PROFIBUS with COM
functions of the PROFIBUS V3.0 or higher, in other words the PC/programmer takes part in
PC/programmer data communication on the PROFIBUS as an active bus station with PROFI-
BUS address 0.
You need the online functions for the service functions of COM PROFIBUS
(e.g. diagnostics) as well as for transferring a master system directly to the
master via PROFIBUS.

G-10 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Preconditions for You require one of the PROFIBUS cards for PCs/programmers shown in
using the DP on- Table G-1 in order to use the online functions of COM PROFIBUS or the
line functions diagnostic functions.
Detailed installation instructions are enclosed with the PROFIBUS cards.
You must use the programming adapter with order number
6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0, for example, to connect the programmer/PC to the
PROFIBUS. You do not need to take account of any spur capacitances with
this programming adapter (see section 3.5).
In the majority of situations, the PROFIBUS cards work correctly with the
default setups. If this is not the case, please check the following setups, to
make sure there are no conflicts with other plug-in cards.
Table G-1 Possible setups on the PROFIBUS card for the online functions of COM PROFIBUS
Card type Card setups Permissible in- Required ad- Memory area Memory area which
for COM terrupts (IRQ) dress range which must be ex- must be excluded in
stored in the in the cluded with Windows system.ini
following sec- memory area emm386.exe in file in [386enh] sec-
tion of the below 1 config.sys file tion
<...\ker- Mbyte:
nel\comet.ini>
file:
Integrated MPI [MPI_1] Possible IRQs: Length 100h Occupied memory Occupied memory
interface (Sie- 5, 10, 11, 12, 15 area area
mens program-
Default: 11 Default Default: Default: EMMEX-
mers only)
address: X=CC00-CCFF CLUDE=
0xCC000 1 CC00-CCFF
MPI_ISA card [MP1_1] Possible IRQs: Length 100h Occupied memory Occupied memory
5, 10, 11, 12, 15 area area
Default: 11 Default Default: Default: EMMEX-
address: X=DC00-DCFF CLUDE=
0xDC000 DC00-DCFF
CP5411 card [DPI_1] Possible IRQs: No No No
5, 10, 11, 12, 15
Default: 11
CP5511 card [DPP_1] This card is started up automatically when the Card and Socket Services are
(PCMCIA) 2 installed.
1 The set address can be checked and altered if necessary using the BIOS Setup program.
2 The Card and Socket Services, which are essential for operation, do not form part of the scope of supply of COM
PROFIBUS. Please call the hotline to order the Card and Socket Services for Siemens programmers.
You can find more information about the CP5511 card in the file called ”\kernel\online.wri” in the COM PROFI-
BUS directory, providing you have installed the online functions with the CP5511 card.
Note
Please note that with COM PROFIBUS the MPI cards (integrated MPI inter-
face, MPI-ISA card) can only be operated up to a transmission rate of
500 kbaud.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-11
G.3 Starting COM PROFIBUS
Making a backup Before you install COM PROFIBUS, you should use MS-DOS, the File Man-
copy ager under MS-Windows or the Explorer under Windows 95 to create a
backup copy of the system disks.
Thereafter, you use only the backup copy.
Installing To install COM PROFIBUS:

COM PROFIBUS
1. Insert the first disk of the COM PROFIBUS set in a disk drive, e.g.
drive A.
2. Start the File Manager under MS-Windows or the Explorer under Win-
dows 95.
3. Select the ”SETUP.EXE” command on the COM PROFIBUS disk, e.g. on
drive A.
Result: The COM PROFIBUS installation program is started.
4. Choose another directory if you do not want to use the default directory,
then click ”Install”.
5. Select the program components that you require and confirm them by
clicking ”OK”.
6. Specify the program group in which you want to install COM PROFI-
BUS, e.g. ”Siemens COM PROFIBUS”.
7. Follow the instructions provided by COM PROFIBUS to install the soft-
ware.
Result: COM PROFIBUS is installed on your PC or programmer.
8. Check that the pointer to the STEP7/S7BIN directory has been written
correctly into your ”AUTOEXEC.BAT”. If the entry is not correct, add
the following line to your ”AUTOEXEC.BAT”:
path = [drive]:\STEP7\S7BIN ;
e.g. for drive C:
path = C:\STEP7\S7BIN
9. Reboot your programmer or PC.
10. If you intend using the memory card functions, make sure that the
memory card driver is loaded when MS-WINDOWS starts
(WINSTART.BAT).

G-12 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Installing the DP Pay attention to the following points when you install the online functions of
online functions COM PROFIBUS:
If you forget to install the online functions, you can also load them later
on without having to repeat the complete installation procedure. To do so,
simply select the ”Add Online Functions” option.
The online functions take up a lot of space in your RAM. Do not install
them unless you actually need them!
If you install the online functions by mistake, you can uninstall them
again without having to repeat the complete procedure. To do so, simply
start the <setup.exe> program and mark ”Add Online Functions” under
Options. You can then specify ”Application Without Online Functions”
during the installation procedure.
Please also read the additional information about using your particular
PROFIBUS card in the programmer/PC which is contained in section G.2.
Starting To start COM PROFIBUS:

COM PROFIBUS
1. Select the ”Siemens COM PROFIBUS” group in the Program Manager
(default name), and
2. Double-click on the icon for COM PROFIBUS.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-13
G.4 Graphical user interface of COM PROFIBUS
Overview The COM PROFIBUS GUI incorporates the following standard elements (for
example):
Title bar COM PROFIBUS
Menu bar File Edit

ÅÅ
Configure Service Documentation Window Help
Toolbar
ÅÅ

Master System: PROFIBUS Address 1
Bus Description: PROFIBUS-DP
Host Description: SIMADYN D host system Slaves
Station Type: SIMADYN D SS5

PROFIBUS Address: 1 ET 200
Station Description: Master system
SIMATIC
Workplace DRIVES
SWITCHG.
C+M
VALVES
Application CONTROL
window IDENT
ENCODERS
Others
Status bar I: 0% O: 0% Offline
Pop-up window for selecting Address range used for inputs and
slaves for configuration outputs in P area
Figure G-2 Screen elements of COM PROFIBUS
Title bar The title bar always contains the name of the application, in this case
”COM PROFIBUS”.
Status bar The status bar contains outline information indicating the currently active
command, the current activity of COM PROFIBUS or notes referring to oper-
ator inputs.
The status bar also indicates the amount of address space already assigned for
inputs and outputs.

G-14 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Menu bar The menu bar contains the names of the various pull-down menus. By open-
ing a pull-down menu, you can call certain functions:
Table G-2 The functions in the pull-down menus
Menu Commands in menu

File Open, save and close program files
Read (import) master systems from a memory card, a DP master
or a binary file
Save (export) master systems to a memory card, a DP master, a
binary file or an NCM file
Export the operating system file to a memory card for IM 308-C
Re-import device master files and type files
Print system documentation
Edit Cut, copy, paste and delete selected DP slaves or FMS stations
Configure Enter bus, host, master and DP slave parameters or FMS station
parameters
Generate a new master system, a new DP slave or a new FMS
station
Change from DP parameterization to FMS parameterization and
vice versa
Arrange DP slaves in groups
Service Display the overview and slave diagnostics
Status of the slave inputs/outputs
Change the PROFIBUS address of a slave using PROFIBUS
Activate a parameter record after exporting it to the DP master
Set the parameters on the PROFIBUS card
Display the data cycle times
Switch the programmer/PC offline from PROFIBUS
Delete memory cards
Documentation Print system documentation
Window Change to a different window
Help Online help
Mouse The mouse buttons have the following functions in COM PROFIBUS:
Table G-3 Functions of the mouse buttons
Function Meaning
Click left mouse button once Select
Click left mouse button twice Open window for selection
Click right mouse button and hold Pop-up menu with most important
down functions

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-15
Toolbar The toolbar contains icons that you can use to select commands without
working through the menus:
Table G-4 Meanings of icons
Icon Menu command Description Icon Menu command Description

File New Creates a new file Edit Copy Copies the selected DP
slave(s)/FMS station(s)
without S5 addresses
File Open Opens an existing pro- Configure New Opens a new master sys-
gram file of COM PRO- master system tem with PROFIBUS ad-
FIBUS dress query for the mas-
ter
File Save Saves the configuration File Export Exports the current pro-
in the current program Memory card gram file to a memory
file card
Print Prints system documen- File Export DP Exports master system to
tation for the open docu- master DP master
mentation window
Edit Cut Cuts out the selected DP File Import DP Imports master systems
slave(s)/FMS station(s) master from the DP master to
ÅÅ
the open program file
Edit Copy Help Contents
ÅÅ
Copies the selected DP Opens online help
slave(s)/FMS station(s)
with S5 addresses
Application Working in an application window, you construct the bus using icons. Each
window application window contains a master to which you assign slaves graphically.
By double-clicking on the icon or designation, you automatically switch to
the dialog box for entering the individual parameters. The gray highlighting
in Fig. G-3 indicates the active areas:
Bus Description: Variable / S5-95U

Host Description: S5-95U host system 1
Station Type: S5-95U DP / Master

PROFIBUS Address: 1
Station Description: Master System 1
Station Type: B-32DI DP

PROFIBUS Address: 3
Station Description:
Figure G-3 Example of an application window

G-16 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.5 Example of how to parameterize a DP configuration with

COM PROFIBUS
Overview This section contains a short example showing how to parameterize a config-
uration with COM PROFIBUS:
Start COM PROFIBUS
Enter the bus parameters
Enter the host parameters
Enter the master parameters
Enter the slave parameters for the ET 200B and the ET 200M
Print the system documentation
Save the configuration and export it to the DP master
and
Display the status of the inputs/outputs.
Parameterization You can find a similar parameterization example for an FMS configuration in
example for an section G.6.
FMS configuration
Sample Fig. G-4 contains an example showing how a configuration is parameterized

configuration with COM PROFIBUS:
Host: CPU 945
Station type (DP master): IM 308-C

PROFIBUS address: 1
Station type: ET 200B-16DO DP

Order number: 6ES7 132-0BH00-0XB0
PROFIBUS address: 3
Station type: ET 200M

Order number: 6ES7 153-1AA01-0XB0
PROFIBUS address: 4
Figure G-4 Sample configuration

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-17
Starting To work with COM PROFIBUS:

COM PROFIBUS
1. Start MS-Windows and
Result: COM PROFIBUS starts.
3. Select File New and
4. Select the master and the associated host.
Master Host Selection
Address Master Station Type Host Station Type

1 IM 308-C S5–115U / CPU 944B OK
2 S5-95U DP / master S5–115U / CPU 945
Cancel
3 IM 180 master S5–135U / CPU 922
4 505-CP5434-DP S5–135U / CPU 928A Help
5 SIMADYN D SS52 S5–135U / CPU 928B
6 CP 5412 (A2) S5–155U/H / CPU 946/947
7 S5–155U/H / CPU 948
8
9 Master: 6ES5 308-3UC11
10
11 Host: 6ES5 945-7UA.1
Figure G-5 Example of the ”Master Host Selection” window
5. Press ”OK” to confirm.

Result: COM PROFIBUS creates a window containing icons for the mas-
ter system having PROFIBUS address ”1”.
COM PROFIBUS
Å
File Edit Configure Service Documentation Window Help
Å Slaves

Overview of Master Systems - NONAME.ET2 ET 200

SIMATIC
Mas Master System: PROFIBUS Address 1
DRIVES
Bus Description: PROFIBUS-DP SWITCHG.
Host Description: S5-115U / CPU 945
C+M
Station Type: IM 308-C VALVES
PROFIBUS Address: 1 CONTROL
Station Description: Master System 1
IDENT
ENCODERS
Others
I: 0% O: 0% Offline
Figure G-6 Example showing how the master system is displayed on screen

G-18 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Entering bus To enter the parameters for the bus:

parameters
1. In the application window, double-click on ”Bus Description”.
Result: The ”Bus Parameters” dialog box is opened.
Bus Parameters
Bus Description: Bus example for parameterization
Parameters
Bus Profile PROFIBUS-DP Baud: 1500.0 kbaud
Repeaters on Bus
OK Cancel Help Set parameters ...
Figure G-7 Example of the ”Bus Parameters” dialog box
2. Confirm the ”PROFIBUS-DP” bus profile and the baud rate of

1500 kbaud by pressing the ”OK” button.
Result: The bus parameters you entered are saved and you are returned to
the application window.
Entering host To enter the designation for the host:

parameters
1. In the application window, double-click on ”Host Description”.
Result: The ”Host Parameters” dialog box is opened.
Host Parameters
OK
Host Description: Host system <1> Cancel
Host Type: S5-115U / CPU 945 Host Type...
Reserv. I...
Power-up Delay: 20 [ s]
Reserv. O...
Addresses...
Help
Figure G-8 Example of the ”Host Parameters” dialog box
2. Make your entries as appropriate and confirm by pressing ”OK”.

Result: The host parameters you entered are saved and you are returned
to the application window.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-19
Entering master To extend the parameters for the master:

parameters
1. In the application window, double-click on the icon for the master.
Result: The ”Master Parameters” dialog box is opened.
Master Parameters
OK
PROFIBUS Address: 1 Cancel
Station Type: IM 308-C Configure...

LSAP ...
Station Description: Master for pump 1
VFD ...
Host: Host system <1>
Help
Addressing Mode: Linear
Number of IM 308-C: 0
Multiprocessor Mode:
Defaults
Error-Reporting: QVZ
Response Monitoring for slaves
Figure G-9 Example of the ”Master Parameters” dialog box
2. Select the values as shown above and press the ”OK” button to confirm.
Result: The master parameters you entered are saved and you are re-
turned to the application window.

G-20 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Entering slave To configure the ET 200B distributed I/O station:

parameters for
1. In the ”Slaves” window, click on the icon for the ET 200 and by holding
ET 200B
down the left mouse button, drag it to the bottom of the bus.
Result: A selection list allowing you to choose the PROFIBUS address of
the slave is opened.
2. Select ”3” and press the ”OK” button to confirm.
Result: The ”Slave Parameters” dialog box is opened.
Slave Parameters
Family: Station Type: Order Number:

ET 200C B-16DO DP 6ES7 132-0BH00-0XB0 OK
ET 200U B-16DO/2A DP 6ES7 132-0BH10-0XB0
Cancel
ET 200B B-16DI/16DO DP 6ES7 133-0BL00-0XB0
ET 200M B-8DI/8DO DP 6ES7 133-0BH00-0XB0 Configure...
ET 200L B-32DO DP 6ES7 131–0BL00–0XB0
132-0BL00-0XB0
B-24DI/8DO.2 DP 6ES7 133-0BN10-0XB0 Parameterize...
SIMATIC
DRIVES B-24DI/8DO DP 6ES7 133-0BN00-0XB0 Help
Description:
Response Monitoring: PROFIBUS Address: 3

Error Rreporting: FREEZE-able
None QVZ PEU SYNC-able
Figure G-10 Example of the ”Slave Parameters ET 200B” dialog box
3. Select ”ET 200B” as the family and the ET 200B-16DO with order num-
ber 6ES7 132-0BH00-0XB0 as the station type, and enter a designation.
Press the ”OK” button to confirm.
Result: The master system in the application window is extended accord-
ingly.
Entering slave To configure the ET 200M distributed I/O station

parameters for
1. In the ”Slaves” window, click on the icon for ET 200 and by holding
ET 200M
the slave is opened.
2. Select a PROFIBUS address, e.g. ”4”, and press the ”OK” button to con-
firm.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-21
3. Select the ET 200M with order number 6ES7 153-1AA01-0XB0 as the

station type and click on the ”Configure...” button to switch to the ”Con-
figure” dialog box
Result: The ”Configure ET 200M” dialog box is opened.
Configure: ET 200M (IM 153-1) #4 <>

ID Order Number Remarks I Addr. O Addr.
OK
11 004
Cancel
22 004
33 004 Order No. ...
4 067 6ES7 321-1FF0*-0AA0 8DE ID...
4E5 000 P000 Data...
56 Reserve
67 Auto Addr.
78
Delete...
8
Addresses...
9
Param. ...
107
118 Help
12
Figure G-11 Example of the ”Configure ET 200M” dialog box
4. Click on the first white field in the ”ID” column and then on ”Order
Number” in order to enter a signal module of the ET 200M.
Result: A pick list of all signal modules with order numbers appears.
5. Select, for example, a digital input module 8DE with order number
6ES7 321-1FF0*-0AA0 and press the ”OK” button to confirm.
Result: The digital input module is entered in the ”Configure ET 200M”
dialog box.
6. Close the list of signal modules by clicking on ”Close”.
7. Click the empty field under ”I Addr.” and then press the ”Auto Addr.”
button.
Result: The start of the address area for the digital input module is auto-
matically defined.
You can also overwrite the empty field under ”I Addr.” with any address
of your choice.
8. Press ”OK” twice to confirm.
9. In the ”Slaves” window, deselect station selection by pressing the but-
ton.
All the important parameters have now been entered.

G-22 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Saving the file It is now time to save the data with COM PROFIBUS.
1. Save the entire configuration in a program file by selecting File Save
as.
2. Enter a file name and confirm it by pressing the ”OK” button.
Printing the You can print documents that will show you, for example, which STEP 5
system address is assigned to which DP slave. This entails printing the station-ori-
documentation ented address assignments with Documentation Station- oriented address
assignment.
Exporting data to The last step is to save the data with COM PROFIBUS and export it to the
the DP master DP master. You must have installed the online functions (see section G.3) in
order to use the File Export DP master function.
1. Switch the IM 308-C to STOP.
2. Connect the PC/programmer (with the PROFIBUS card) to the PROFI-
BUS DP interface of the IM 308-C using the programming adapter.
3. Insert the memory card in the IM 308-C if it is not already inserted.
4. In COM PROFIBUS, click on the master system that you want to export
to the IM 308-C.
5. Select File Export DP master.
6. Enter the currently active baud rate and the PROFIBUS address of the
IM 308-C and confirm them by pressing ”OK”.
Result: The data of the master system is exported to the memory card
that is installed in the IM 308-C. The switch position you selected on the
IM 308-C remains set.
COM PROFIBUS then asks whether you want to activate the parameter
record immediately or later on.
7. Activate the master system you exported to the IM 308-C.
Result: The IM 308-C works with the new parameterization data.
Status of the You can display the status of the inputs/outputs with COM PROFIBUS, pro-
inputs/outputs viding you have installed the online functions (see section G.3).
1. Load the master system you exported to the DP master with COM PRO-
FIBUS.
2. Click on the slave whose input/output states you want to display.
3. Select Service Status.
Result: COM PROFIBUS displays the status of the selected slave.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-23
G.6 Example of how to parameterize an FMS configuration

with COM PROFIBUS
Overview This section contains a short example showing how to parameterize an FMS
master system with COM PROFIBUS.
Sample Fig. G-12 contains an example showing how an FMS master system is para-
configuration meterized with COM PROFIBUS:
Station type: CP 5412 (A2)

PROFIBUS address: 1
Station type: SIMOCODE FMS

PROFIBUS address: 2
Station type: ET 200U DP/FMS

PROFIBUS address: 3
Figure G-12 Sample configuration

G-24 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Starting To work with COM PROFIBUS:

COM PROFIBUS
1. Start MS-Windows and
Result: COM PROFIBUS starts.
3. Select File New and
4. Select the master.
Master Host Selection
Address Master Station Type Host Station Type

1 IM 308-C CP 5412 (A2) OK
2 S5-95U DP / master
Cancel
3 IM 180 master
4 505-CP5434- DP
Help
5 SIMADYN D SS52
6 CP 5412 (A2)
7
8
9 Master: 6GK1 541-2BA00
10
11 Host: SIMATIC NET DP/FMS master for PC
Figure G-13 Example of the ”Master Host Selection” window

Result: COM PROFIBUS creates a window containing icons for the FMS
master system having PROFIBUS address ”1”.
COM PROFIBUS
Å
Å Station

Overview of Master Systems - NONAME.ET2 SIMATIC

PC
Mas Master System: PROFIBUS Address 1
ET 200
Bus Description: PROFIBUS-DP/FMS SWITCHG.
Host Description: CP 5412 (A2)
DRIVES
Station Type: CP 5412 (A2) Others
PROFIBUS Address: 1
Station Description: FMS Master
I: 0% O: 0% Offline
Figure G-14 Example showing how the FMS master system is displayed on screen

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-25
Bus parameters To enter the parameters for the bus:

1. In the application window, double-click on ”Bus Description”.
Result: The ”Bus Parameters” dialog box is opened. COM PROFIBUS
has automatically selected ”DP/FMS” as the bus profile because you
chose the FMS master.
Bus Parameters
Bus Description: Bus example for parameterization
Parameters
Bus Profile: DP/FMS Baud rate: 500.0 kbaud
Repeater on Bus
OK Cancel Help Set Parameters ...
Figure G-15 Example of the ”Bus Parameters” dialog box
2. Select a baud rate of ”500” kbaud and confirm it by pressing the ”OK”
button.
Result: The bus parameters you entered are saved and you are returned to
the application window.
Host parameters The host parameters are irrelevant for SIMATIC NET PC modules.
Master parameters The master parameters are irrelevant for this example, which entails entering
an FMS master system.
FMS connections To configure the FMS connections to the FMS SIMOCODE device:
for SIMOCODE
1. In the ”Station” window, click on the icon for ”SWITCHG.” and by hold-
ing down the left mouse button, drag it to the bottom of the bus.
the station is opened.

G-26 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c

Result: The ”FMS Station Properties” dialog box is opened.
FMS Station Properties
Family: Station Type: Order Number:

SIMATIC SIMOCODE FMS 3UF20* OK
PC Cancel
ET 200
SWITCHG. Configure...
DRIVES
Parameters ...
OTHERS
Connections...
Description: Help
Help
PROFIBUS Addr.: 3
Figure G-16 Example of the ”FMS Station Properties SIMOCODE” dialog box
3. Branch to ”Connections”, the next dialog box, by clicking ”Connec-

tions ...”.
Result: The ”Edit FMS Connections” dialog box is opened.
4. Click ”New”.
Result: COM PROFIBUS enters the default connections.
Edit FMS Connections

Connections (SIMOCODE FMS)
OK
CR: Name:
Cancel
3 Connection_to_SIMOCODE FMS <3>
New
Delete
Help
Select Interface Parameters
CR: 3 VFD Number: 1

Name: Connection_to_SIMOCODE FMS <3>
Select Connection Parameters
Connection Profile: SIMOCODE_CR2 (LSAP NIL) Parameters ...
Figure G-17 Example of the ”Edit FMS Connections” dialog box
5. Confirm the FMS connections by pressing the ”OK” button, then confirm
the FMS station parameters by pressing ”OK” again.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-27
FMS connections To configure the FMS connections to the FMS ET 200U device:
to ET 200U
1. In the ”Station” window, click on the icon for ”ET 200” and by holding
the station is opened.
3. Select the ET 200U (FMS) and branch to ”Connections”, the next dialog
box, by clicking ”Connections ...”.
4. Click ”New”.
Edit FMS Connections

Connections (ET 200U DP/FMS)
OK
CR: Name:
Cancel
4 Connection_to_ET 200U DP/FMS <4>
New
Delete
Help
Select Interface Parameters
CR: 4 VFD Number: 1

Name: Connection_to_ET 200U DP/FMS <4>
Select Connection Parameters
Connection Profile: ET200U_CR2 (LSAP20) Parameters ...
Figure G-18 Example of the ”Edit FMS Connections” dialog box
5. Confirm the FMS connections by pressing the ”OK” button, then confirm
the FMS station parameters by pressing ”OK” again.
All the parameters for the FMS stations have now been entered.
Saving the file It is now time to save the data with COM PROFIBUS.
1. Save the entire configuration in a program file with File Save as.
2. Enter a file name and confirm it by pressing the ”OK” button.
Printing the You can print documents that will show you an overview of the FMS master
system system. This entails printing the station list with Documentation Station
documentation list.

G-28 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Saving in a binary You require a binary database in NCM format for the CP 5412 (A2):
database
1. Select File Export NCM file and enter a name for the NCM data-
base.
Result: COM PROFIBUS converts the configuration you have generated
and creates, amongst other things, a non-resident, binary database (NCM
file) with an .LDB extension.
2. Load the binary database on the CP 5412 (A2) using the SIMATIC NET
Setup program.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-29
G.7 Creating and opening a program file; importing data
Definitions COM PROFIBUS recognizes files of different types:
Table G-5 File types in COM PROFIBUS
Name Meaning Exten-

sion
Program file In a program file, you save the entire bus configuration, i.e. all the components physically .ET2
interconnected by a bus cable.
Note: The name format for program files generated with COM ET 200 V1.0 to V4.x is:
??????ET.200.
Directory: \PROGDAT
Binary file In a binary file, you save the configuration of a master system. The contents of a binary file .2BF
correspond to the data stored in the master.
Create a binary file if, after exporting data to the master, you want to store it on the PC as
well.
NCM file In an NCM file, you save the configuration of a master system for SIMATIC NET PC mod- .LDB
ules. You then load the NCM file on the module using SIMATIC NET tools.
Directory: \NCM
Type file for A type file contains all the parameters of a DP slave. COM PROFIBUS requires a type file .200
DP slaves or a device master file for each station type, in order to link the stations.
Non-language-specific type files are designated ???????X.200, while type files in English
bear names with the format ???????E.200.
Directory for DP slaves: \TYPDAT5X
Note: Type files used under COM ET 200 V1.0 to V4.x are in the \KONVER4X directory.
You require these type files only if you want to convert program files generated with
COM ET 200 V1.0 to V4.x.
Type file for A type file contains all the parameters of an FMS station. COM PROFIBUS requires a type .FMS
FMS sta- file for each station type, in order to link the stations.
tions Directory for FMS stations: \FMSTYPES
Type file for A type file for master/host contains the parameters of the master and the host. .2MH
master/host Directory: \MASTERS
Device mas- A device master file contains all the parameters of a DP slave in accordance with .GSD
ter file for EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. .GSX
DP slaves Note: If COM PROFIBUS contains both the type file and the device master file under a
particular manufacturer ID, it only ever imports the device master file. The type file is no
longer relevant! (Exception: old parameterizations which were created using type files.)
Directory: \GSD
Operating- The operating-system file contains the IM 308-C operating system which belongs to COM .LFW
system file PROFIBUS. Once the operating-system file has been exported to a memory card, it can
then be imported to the IM 308-C.
Directory: \BESY308C

G-30 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Creating a file You create a new program file when you

1. Start COM PROFIBUS and
2. In COM PROFIBUS, select File " New.
3. Enter the parameters in the ”Master host selection” dialog box and
Result: A new program file is created with the description ”noname.et2”.
In addition, a window bearing the title ”Master system: PROFIBUS address
X” is opened and you can start the parameterization of a slave belonging to
this master system.
Opening a There are two ways of opening an existing program file:

program file
S Click on the icon for File " Open
or
S Using File " Open, select an existing program file.
Importing data There are various ways of loading or importing the data of a master system
with COM PROFIBUS, depending on the master:
COM PROFIBUS
File " Import " File " Import " File " Import " File " Import "
DP master. Memory card. NCM file. Binary file.
e.g. from IM 308-C, e.g. from memory e.g. databases generated e.g. for saving a
DP master card for IM 308-C with COML-DP or COML- master system on
FMS for CP 5412 (A2) the PC
Figure G-19 Alternative ways of importing master systems
Note
You cannot reconstruct the entire bus system configuration and store it in a
single program file until you have loaded all the master systems that to-
gether make up this configuration (from the DP master, the memory card,
the NCM file and the binary file).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-31
Importing data If you want to import data directly from the DP master:
from DP master
S The programmer/PC must be connected to the DP master either via PRO-
FIBUS or directly (see Table G-1, section G.2)
S A master system must already have been exported to the master pre-
viously
S The memory card must be connected if the DP master is the IM 308-C
S The 32 K EEPROM must be installed in the S5-95U if the S5-95U is the
DP master.
To load the data, select File " Import " DP Master.
Result: The data of a master system is available in the program file opened
by these commands.
Importing data If you want to import data from a memory card:

from memory card
S Your programmer must have a memory card interface, or
Your programmer must have an E(E)PROM slot with the appropriate pro-
Your PC must have an external programming unit.
The order numbers are listed in Appendix G.
S The memory card drivers must already be loaded when MS-WINDOWS
or Windows 95 is started
S The memory card must be connected to the memory card interface of the
programmer or the PC.
To load the data, select File " Import " Memory card.
Result: The data of a master system is available in the program file opened
by these commands.
Importing data Using the File " Import " NCM File function, you can load databases in
from an NCM file COM PROFIBUS that you have generated using the SIMATIC NET PC para-
meterization tools, e.g. COML-DP or COML-FMS.
Importing data You need the ”Import data from binary file” function only if the original pro-
from a binary file gram file was previously saved as a binary file and is now lost.
If you want to import data from a binary file
1. Select File " Import " Binary File:
2. Select a file with a ”.2BF” extension.
Result: The binary file is converted into a format compatible with COM
PROFIBUS and imported. The contents of a binary file correspond to a mas-
ter system. The data of the binary file is available in the program file opened
by these commands.

G-32 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.8 Parameterizing the configuration of a master system with

COM PROFIBUS
In this section G.7 Section G.7 contains information on:
Section Topic Page

G.8.1 Entering bus parameters G-35
G.8.2 Entering host parameters G-37
G.8.3 Entering master parameters G-39
G.8.4 DP slave: entering slave parameters G-42
G.8.5 FMS station: entering FMS station parameters G-44
G.8.6 Using PROFIBUS-DP and PROFIBUS-FMS simultaneously G-46
G.8.7 Creating a new master system G-47
G.8.8 Configuring IM 308-C as a DP slave G-48
G.8.9 Assigning DP slaves to groups G-51
G.8.10 IM 308-C: assigning shared-input masters G-52
Starting point If you have opened a new program file and entered the parameter settings in
the ”Master host selection” dialog box, COM PROFIBUS has already created
a window for the new master system (see section G.7) and the master is de-
picted in this window as an icon.
It is advisable to set the bus, host and master parameters before setting the
slave parameters, because otherwise it is not easy to change certain settings.
Building the DP Build your configuration in the application window as follows:

configuration
1. Begin by entering the parameters for the bus, the host and the DP master.
(principle)
See sections G.8.1 to G.8.3 for details.
2. After entering the parameters, in the ”Slaves” window click on the slave
that you want to parameterize, e.g. ET 200 ().
Result: The icon for slave you selected is ”attached” to the mouse
pointer.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-33
3. Click on the line representing the bus to insert the slave ().
Result: COM PROFIBUS prompts you for the PROFIBUS address of this
slave.
4. Select a PROFIBUS address and confirm it by pressing the ”OK” button.
5. Enter the slave parameters. See sections G.8.4 and G.8.5 for details. Re-
peat steps 2 to 4 until you have entered all the slaves for this master sys-
tem.
Note
Any slaves that have not yet been configured appear in italics in the applica-
tion window.
6. Deselect the slave by clicking on the arrow in the ”Slaves” pop-up win-
dow ().

Bus Description: PROFIBUS-DP
Slaves
Host Description: CP 5412 (A2)
Station Type: CP 5412 (A2)

ET 200
PROFIBUS Address: 1
Station Description: SIMATIC
DRIVES
SWITCHG.
C+M
VALVES
CONTROL
IDENT
ENCODERS
Others
Figure G-20 Application window
Building the FMS If you enter an FMS configuration instead of a DP configuration, the above
configuration input rules apply analogously.
You can find more information about entering a PROFIBUS FMS configura-
tion in section G.8.6.

G-34 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.8.1 Entering bus parameters
Definition You use the bus parameters to define:

The description for the bus system
The bus profile for transmitting data on the bus
The baud rate
Whether the bus incorporates an RS 485 repeater
The duration of the response monitoring time.
Meanings The meanings of the individual bus parameters are shown in Table G-6:
Table G-6 Meanings of bus parameters
Description Meaning Default

Bus description Assign a name to the bus system. Max. length: 40 characters. –
Bus profile1 In the ”Bus profile” field, you can select certain bus and reaction times: PROFIBUS-
PROFIBUS-DP, if there are only DP masters on the bus and they comply DP
with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
DP/FMS, if there is at least one FMS master on the bus or in order to para-
meterize an FMS master system.
DP with IM 308-B, if there is at least one IM 308-B or one CP 5480-DP
(version 2) on the bus, but no FMS master.
DP with S5-95U, if you have an S7-95U as DP master. The defaults apply to
the S5-95U (DP master).
Variable, if the bus or reaction times have to be varied to suit your specific
configuration (with ”Set parameters ...”).
Baud rate Set a baud rate between 9.6 kbaud and 12000 kbaud. Bear in mind that some 1,500 kbaud
slaves are restricted to a maximum of 1500 kbaud (e.g. ET 200U).
Repeaters on bus Use this parameter to tell COM PROFIBUS whether the bus is extended by RS No
485 repeaters (order number 6ES5 ... or 6GK1 ... only) or fiber-optic amplifiers
(e.g. OLMs or active star hubs).
If the bus is extended, the hamming distance is reduced from 4 to 2 at baud rates
of 3000 kbaud or higher.
Set parameters ... In the ”Set parameters” dialog box, you can define among other things: –
The response monitoring time (response monitoring/Ttr) for all DP slaves on
the bus as a function of the target token runtime. If, for example, you select a
factor of 1.25, the response monitoring time is 1.25 times the target token
runtime.
Delta Ttr, if, for example, you have to make provision for another, other-ven-
dor master (see section G.9).
1: RESET the slaves not incorporated in the bus after a bus-profile change.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-35
Entering bus To enter the bus parameters:

parameters
1. Select Configure " Bus Parameters or
Double-click on ”Bus Desription” or
Select the bus parameters with the right mouse button.
Result: The ”Bus Parameters” dialog box is opened.
2. Set the bus parameters. Click on ”Help” for more information.
3. If necessary, go to ”Set Parameters ...”:
– If you want to view the bus times calculated by COM PROFIBUS,
– If you want to customize the bus times to suit your configuration,
– If you want to increase the response monitoring time, or
– If you must make provision for the token runtime of another master
not entered with COM PROFIBUS (see section G.9).
4. Confirm the bus parameters and close the dialog box by pressing ”OK”.
Customizing bus If you select ”DP with S5-95U” as the bus profile for the DP master or DP
times to suit your slaves, you must change the bus times. The rule of thumb is:
configuration
S Always set the slowest bus time of all bus stations.
S Set the following bus times:
Table G-7 Bus times that must be set for a ”DP with S5-95U” bus profile
Bus time Also known as

TID2 SDT2
TRDY SDT1
TSET SET
TSL ST
TTR TRT

G-36 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.8.2 Entering host parameters
Definition A host is a system or device containing one or more masters.

If there is no higher-level system for the master, e.g. in the case of an S5-95U
with a DP master interface or a SIMATIC NET PC module, the master is
considered to be its own host.
If the host and the master are identical, COM PROFIBUS automatically
masks out any parameters that are irrelevant. You define the following host
parameters:
The description of the host
The host type
The reservation of input and output addresses for the central I/O modules
in the programmable controller, and
The length of the power-up delay
Meanings The meanings of the individual host parameters are shown in Table G-8:
Table G-8 Meanings of host parameters

Host description Assign a name to the host system. Max. length: 40 characters. –
Host type The host type is the CPU to which the master is assigned. –
Power-up delay The CPU power-up is delayed for this length of time, so that the master can ad- 20 s
dress all the slaves configured with COM PROFIBUS. Note, however, that the
time specified here is the upper limit for the delay.
When the timer times out, CPU power-up continues even if the master did not
succeed in addressing all the slaves configured with COM PROFIBUS.
IM 308-C only: If the IM 308-C is used as DP master, the reaction of the CPU is
dependent on the selected error-reporting mode (see section 8.2).
Reserv. I... These parameters enable you to reserve input and output address areas that can –
Reserv. O... then be used for central/local I/O modules in the programmable controller or for
another master in a programmable controller.
If you use page addressing, the input and output address areas are reserved on
each page!
In this way, you can avoid the danger of having the same S5 addresses used for
distributed I/O and for I/O modules in the central or expansion units.
Addresses The ”Addresses” button provides you with an overview of the available address –
space, the occupied address space and the reserved address space.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-37
Entering host To enter the host parameters:

parameters
1. Select Configure Host Parameters, or
Double-click on ”Host Description”, or
Select the host parameters with the right mouse button.
Result: The ”Host Parameters” dialog box is opened.
2. Set the host parameters. Click on ”Help” for more information.
3. Confirm the host parameters and close the dialog box by pressing the
”OK” button.

G-38 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.8.3 Entering master parameters
Definition Not all master parameters are relevant for all masters. COM PROFIBUS
masks out any irrelevant master parameters automatically. You define the
following master parameters, among others:
The description of the master
The host to which the master is assigned
How the distributed I/O is addressed
Whether the master is addressed by the CPU in multiprocessor mode, and
Which error messages will be generated (QVZ or PEU and response mon-
itoring of slaves)
FMS master If you parameterize an FMS master system, the only relevant parameters are
system the PROFIBUS address, the station type and the station description.
Meanings The meanings of the individual master parameters are shown in Table G-9:
Table G-9 Meanings of master parameters

PROFIBUS address The PROFIBUS address is a bus-wide unique number which you assign to the (Assigned
master. PROFIBUS
address)
Station type Type of the master IM 308-C
Station description Assign a name to the master system. Max. length: 40 characters. –
In host Select the name of the host which contains the master with the ”In host” parameter. –
Addressing If the master is assigned to a CPU and if you have not yet assigned addresses to the Linear
slaves, you can select the type of addressing (IM 308-C: see section 10.1; S5-95U:
see section 10.1).
Number of IM 308-C only: You require the number of the IM 308-C for page addressing or (Lowest un-
IM 308-C addressing via FB IM308C (see section 6.1). assigned
number of
the
IM 308-C)
Multiprocessor IM 308-C only: You must check the box for multiprocessor mode: –
mode If you want to use several CPUs and masters with a single host, or
If the address space occupied by FB IM308C has already been used for CPs
and IPs in the programmable controller.
COM PROFIBUS prompts for the first address in the range that FB IM308C
should use to address the distributed I/O (DP window) (see section 7).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-39
Table G-9 Meanings of master parameters, continued

Error-reporting IM 308-C only: The error-reporting modes, namely PEU (power-fail in expan- QVZ
mode sion unit), QVZ (acknowledgment delay) and ”None”, enable you to define how
the CPU should react to an error in the distributed I/O system (see section 8.2).
PEU, QVZ and ”None” are described in detail in section 8.2.
If you select PEU or QVZ, the setting is valid for all slaves assigned to the mas-
ter. Note, however, that you can deactivate PEU or QVZ for individual slaves, for
example during initial operation (slave parameters).
Caution
If you set the error-reporting mode to ”None”, diagnosis with
! FB IM308C is the only way that you can detect an error in
the distributed I/O system from within the application pro-
gram!
Consequently, we strongly recommend that the error-report-
ing mode be set to ”None” only for initial operation.
Response monitor- PROFIBUS-DP: Response monitoring enables you to define how the DP slave Yes
ing reacts to a master error or a break in the data traffic on the bus.
If the DP slave is not addressed within the response monitoring time you define,
it goes to the safe condition (all outputs are set to ”0”).
If you set response monitoring to ”Yes” (by checking the box), the setting applies
to all DP slaves assigned to the master. Note, however, that you can switch off
response monitoring for individual slaves, for example during initial operation
(slave parameters).
Danger
If you switch off response monitoring, there is a possibility
! that the outputs of a particular slave may not be set to ”0” if
an error occurs!
Consequently, we strongly recommend that response moni-
toring be switched off only for initial operation.
See section 8.2 for a detailed description of response monitoring for the IM
308-C and section 11.3 for the S5-95U.
Configure ... If the master is also used as a slave, you can open the ”Configure slave” dialog box
by clicking this button (see section G.8.7).
LSAPs ... If CP 5412 (A2), the SIMATIC NET PC module, is used as FMS and/or DP mas- –
ter, you can open the ”Reserve LSAPs ...” dialog box by clicking on this button.
Enter the LSAP disable list there.
VFDs ... If CP 5412 (A2), the SIMATIC NET PC module, is used as FMS master, you can –
open the ”Edit VFDs ...” dialog box in order to parameterize the VFDs by clicking
on this button.

G-40 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
LSAPs ... (CP 5412 Local service access points (LSAPs), which are not allowed to be used by
(A2) only) another protocol at the same time, are defined at the FDL interface. You must
therefore disable the LSAPs that are reserved for the FDL interface in the
”Reserve LSAPs ...” dialog box.
1. Click on the ”Reserve LSAPs ...” button in the ”Master Parameters” dia-
log box.
Result: The ”Reserve LSAPs” dialog box is opened.
All the LSAPs which are already used by the PROFIBUS DP and the
PROFIBUS FMS are grayed and can no longer be selected.
2. Reserve the LSAPs for FDL.
3. Confirm the reserved LSAPs and close the dialog box by pressing the
”OK” button.
VFDs ... (CP 5412 COM PROFIBUS automatically creates a virtual field device (VFD) as de-
(A2) only) fault whenever you parameterize an FMS master.
You can edit this VFD as necessary in the ”Edit VFDs” dialog box.
Entering master To enter the master parameters:

parameters
1. Select Configure Master Parameters, or
Double-click on the icon for the master, or
Select the master parameters with the right mouse button.
Result: The ”Master Parameters” dialog box is opened.
2. Set the master parameters. Click on ”Help” for more information.
3. Confirm the master parameters and close the dialog box by pressing
”OK”.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-41
G.8.4 DP slave: entering slave parameters
Definition The slave parameters enable you to define:

The family and type of the DP slave
The description of the DP slave
The configuration and addresses of the DP slave (Configure ...)
The structure of a parameterization telegram, if necessary (Parameter-
ize ...),
and
Whether or not the error-reporting mode selected for the DP master or
response monitoring is to be switched off for this DP slave.
Meanings The meanings of the individual DP slave parameters are shown in Table
G-10:
Table G-10 Meanings of DP slave parameters

Family Family of the distributed I/O station, e.g. ET 200B, SIMATIC, valves, etc. –
Station type Enter the station type of the DP slave exactly as shown, for example, by the order –
number or the label on the DP slave.
Description Assign a name to the distributed I/O station. Max. length: 40 characters. –
Response monitor- You can switch response monitoring on or off for each individual DP slave. Yes
ing
Danger
If you switch off response monitoring, there is a possibility
! that the outputs of a particular slave may not be set to ”0” if
an error occurs!
Consequently, we strongly recommend that response moni-
toring be switched off only for initial operation.
Error-reporting You can switch the error-reporting mode PEU or QVZ on or off for each slave. QVZ
mode The switch for setting the error-reporting mode for all DP slaves assigned to a DP
master is in the ”Master Parameters” dialog box (see sections G.8.3 and 8.2).
PROFIBUS address The PROFIBUS address is a bus-wide unique number for the DP slave. (Assigned
PROFIBUS
address)
FREEZE-able The ”FREEZE-able” and ”SYNC-able” parameters indicate whether the DP slave –
SYNC-able can receive and respond to the FREEZE and SYNC control commands respec-
tively.

G-42 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Table G-10 Meanings of DP slave parameters, continued

Configure ... In the ”Configure ...” dialog box: –
S Define the size of the input/output areas for a DP slave and/or
S Assign S5 addresses to these input/output areas.
E.g. define the signal modules and their initial addresses for the ET 200M or assign
an address to an ET 200B.
Parameterize ... In the ”Parameterize ...” dialog box you define the contents of the parameterization –
telegram, if the DP slave type requires this. You define, for example, areas or diag-
nostic enabling for analog DP slaves.
See the manual for the DP slave for details of the ”Parameterize ...” dialog box.
COM PROFIBUS uses the values in the ”Parameterize ...” dialog box to generate
the parameterization telegram which the DP master sends to the DP slave on pow-
ering up.
Entering slave There are several ways of entering slave parameters:

parameters
S Via the menu bar:
Select Configure " Slave Parameters and confirm the desired slave
PROFIBUS address by pressing the ”OK” button.
S Via the ”Slaves” window:
In the ”Slaves” window, click on the icon for the appropriate DP slave
and attach it to the bottom of the bus by clicking the mouse button. Con-
firm the desired slave PROFIBUS address by pressing the ”OK” button.
S Via the icon for the DP slave (if the slave is already displayed in the ap-
plication window):
Double-click on the icon for the slave or select the slave parameters by
clicking the right mouse button.
Note
You can switch to the ”Configure” and ”Parameterize” dialog boxes for the
DP slave directly from the graphical parameterization mode.
S To open the ”Configure” dialog box: press and hold down the ”Shift” key
and double-click on the icon for the DP slave.
S To open the ”Parameterize” dialog box: press and hold down the ”Ctrl”
key and double-click on the icon for the DP slave.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-43
G.8.5 FMS station: entering FMS station parameters
Definition The FMS station properties enable you to define:

S The family and type of the FMS station
S The description of the FMS station
S The FMS connections to the selected station.
Meanings: The meanings of the individual FMS station properties are shown in
Table G-11:
Table G-11 Meanings of FMS station properties

Family Family of the FMS station, e.g. SIMATIC –
Station type Enter the station type of the FMS station exactly as shown, for example, by the –
order number or the label on the FMS station.
Description Assign a name to the FMS station. Max. length: 40 characters. –
PROFIBUS address The PROFIBUS address is a bus-wide unique number for the FMS station. (Assigned
PROFIBUS
address)
Connections ... In the ”Connections ...” dialog box, you can define the FMS connections to the –
selected station.
Selecting FMS There are several ways of entering FMS station properties:
station properties
S Via the menu bar:
Select Configure " FMS Station Properties and confirm the desired
PROFIBUS address by pressing the ”OK” button.
S Via the ”Stations” window:
In the ”Stations” window, click on the icon for the appropriate FMS sta-
tion and attach it to the bottom of the bus by clicking the mouse button.
Confirm the desired PROFIBUS address by pressing the ”OK” button.
S Via the icon for the FMS station (if the FMS station is already displayed
in the application window):
Double-click on the icon for the FMS station or select the FMS station
properties by clicking the right mouse button.

G-44 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Entering FMS Proceed as follows to enter the FMS station properties for an FMS station:
station properties
1. Set the FMS station properties. Click on ”Help” for more information.
2. Press the ”Connections ...” button to switch to the ”Connections” dialog
box and enter the FMS connections for the selected FMS station (see
Table G-12).
3. Select a new connection with the ”New” button.
Table G-12 Meanings of the connections of an FMS station

CR1 The communications relation reference (CR) is the number of an FMS connection.
Value range: 3 to 128
VFD number1 The communications relation is assigned to a valid virtual field device (VFD) via
its VFD number.
You assigned the VFD number to the master with the master parameters.
Value range: 1 to 5
Name Assign a name to the communications relation. Max. length: 32 characters. –
Connection profile Connection profiles group together the specific communications parameters of an Default
FMS station (e.g. fixed FMS connections for pre-parameterized FMS devices, such
as the SIMOCODE).
Value range: The available profiles are dependent on the selected FMS device.
Parameters ... In the ”Parameters ...” dialog box which follows, you can define communications –
parameters for the selected connection profile:
The type of communications relation, e.g. MMAZ
The local and remote service access points (LSAPs)
The services supported by the master acting as a client
The service supported by the master acting as the server
Details such as PDU sizes, maximum number of simultaneous services, etc.
You can normally use the default values directly.
1 The CR and the VFD number are the interface parameters which are visible at the SIMATIC NET FMS communications
interface.
4. Edit the FMS connections and confirm them by pressing the ”OK” button.
5. Confirm the FMS station properties and close the dialog box by pressing
”OK”.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-45
G.8.6 Using PROFIBUS-DP and PROFIBUS-FMS simultaneously
Definition According to EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS, it is possible to use PROFI-

BUS-DP and PROFIBUS-FMS simultaneously on a shared, physical bus line.
The SIMATIC NET communications processor CP 5412 (A2) permits simul-
taneous operation of PROFIBUS-DP and PROFIBUS-FMS.
Procedure Proceed as follows to parameterize simultaneous operation of PROFIBUS-DP

and PROFIBUS-FMS with COM PROFIBUS:
1. Create a new master system using File New.
2. Select the CP 5412 (A2) as master in the ”Master Host Selection” dialog
box and confirm it by pressing ”OK”.
3. Select the DP and/or FMS protocols that you want to use for the CP 5412
(A2) and confirm them by pressing ”OK”.
Result: COM PROFIBUS starts a separate master system for each proto-
col at the same PROFIBUS address. The stations you must parameterize
depend on the master system you are currently using, i.e. you parameter-
ize the DP slaves in the DP master system or the FMS stations in the FMS
master system.
More information about parameterizing the DP slaves can be found in
section G.8.4 and about parameterizing the FMS stations in section G.8.5.
Note
Even if originally you only decided to use a DP master system, you can
create an FMS master system at any time with Configure FMS Paramete-
rization.
The same applies analogously if at first you only selected an FMS master
system. In this case, you can create a DP master system with Configure
DP Parameterization.

G-46 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.8.7 Creating a new master system
Definition Each master plus the stations assigned to it constitutes a master system.
You have to create a new master system if you have at least two masters con-
nected to a physical bus.
If you parameterize a slave that can also be a master, COM PROFIBUS auto-
matically creates a new master system for this slave (e.g. the IM 308-C/DP
slave).
Creating a new To create a new master system:

master system
1. Select Configure New Master System or click the appropriate icon.
2. Enter the parameters in the ”Master Host Selection” dialog box and con-
firm them by pressing ”OK”.
Result: A new field appears containing the master you just created. You
can now proceed in the same way as with the first master system and as-
semble your new master system using graphical icons.
COM PROFIBUS
Å
ÅÅ

Slaves
Overview Master Systems - NONAME.ET2 ET 200

Mas Master System: PROFIBUS Address 1 SIMATIC
Mas DRIVES
Bus designation: PROFIBUS-DP
Host designation: S5-115U / CPU 945 SWITCHG.
Bus Description: PROFIBUS-DB C+M
Station type:
Host Description: IM 308-C
S5-115U / CPU 945
PROFIBUS address: 1 VALVES
Station
Station Type: IMMaster
designation: 308-C system 1 CONTROL
PROFIBUS Address: 3 IDENT
Station Description: Master System
ENCODERS
Others
I: 0% O: 0% Offline
Figure G-21 Creating a new master system

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-47
G.8.8 Configuring the IM 308-C as a DP slave
Definition As of release 3, the IM 308-C can be operated as:

DP master
DP slave
or
DP master and DP slave.
You can find all you need to know about operating the IM 308-C as a DP
slave in section 5.6.
Displaying the If a master is operated as a slave, COM PROFIBUS automatically creates a

master and slave master system for the slave. Meanings:
in the application
– m: IM 308-C operates as DP master only
window
– s: IM 308-C operates as DP slave only
– m + s: IM 308-C operates as DP master and DP slave.

G-48 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Starting point 1 The IM 308-C only operates as a DP slave and not as DP master:
(DP slave only)
Note
What happens if the IM 308-C operates as a DP slave in a master system
whose master is not entered with COM PROFIBUS?
Simply create a master system with any master, e.g. a CP 5412 (A2), and
parameterize the IM 308-C as a DP slave in this master system.
COM PROFIBUS automatically creates a separate master system for the IM
308-C/DP slave, which you can then export to the IM 308-C.
Procedure for The procedure for configuring an IM 308-C as a DP slave only is as follows:
starting point 1
1. Select the IM 308-C/slave as a DP slave (e.g. by selecting Configure
Slave Parameters ).
2. Select a PROFIBUS address and press the ”OK” button to confirm.
3. Select ”SIMATIC” as the family and ”IM 308-C DP Slave” as the station
type.
4. Press the Configure ... button to switch to the ”Master Host Selection”
dialog box.
5. Select the host station type and press the ”OK” button to confirm.
Result: The ”Configure: IM 308-C/Slave” dialog box is opened.
6. Press the ”ID” button and enter the input and output data quantities and
the addresses. Remember:
– Inputs: input data of the DP slave CPU
= outputs of the DP master
Outputs: output data of the DP slave CPU
= inputs of the DP master
– The maximum block size is 16 words.
7. Press the ”OK” button twice to confirm:
Result: COM PROFIBUS automatically creates a new master system for
the IM 308-C as a DP slave.
8. Switch to the master system in which the IM 308-C/DP slave is the DP
master (the master system is indicated by an ”s”).
9. Edit the host and master parameters of the IM 308-C/DP slave.
10. Once you have completed all the entries for the bus configuration, export
the data of this master system for the IM 308-C/DP slave to the
IM 308-C.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-49
Starting point 2 The IM 308-C operates as master and as a slave. You have already parame-
(DP master and DP terized the IM 308-C as master, and entered all the host and master parame-
slave) ters, and now want to parameterize it as a slave.
Procedure for If you have already parameterized the IM 308-C as master, proceed as fol-
starting point 2 lows to parameterize it as a slave:
1. Switch to the master system in which you want the IM 308-C to be ad-
dressed as a DP slave.
2. Select Configure New Slave in this master system.
3. Enter the PROFIBUS address of the IM 308-C as master manually.
4. Confirm it by pressing ”OK” and ”Yes”.
Result: COM PROFIBUS opens the ”Slave Parameters” dialog box for
the IM 308-C as a DP slave.
5. Press the Configure ... button to switch to the ”Configure IM 308-C DP
Slave” dialog box.
Result: The ”Configure: IM 308-C/Slave” dialog box is opened.
6. Press the ”ID” button and enter the input and output data quantities and
the addresses. Remember:
– Inputs: input data of the DP slave CPU
= outputs of the DP master
Outputs: output data of the DP slave CPU
= inputs of the DP master
– The maximum block size is 16 words.
7. Press the ”OK” button twice to confirm:
Result: COM PROFIBUS automatically creates a new master system for
the IM 308-C as a DP slave (indicated by ”m + s”).
8. Once you have completed all the entries for the bus configuration, export
the data of this master system for the IM 308-C/DP slave to the
IM 308-C.

G-50 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.8.9 Assigning DP slaves to groups
Definition If you want to send the FREEZE or SYNC control commands to DP slaves,
you must arrange the DP slaves in groups.
Each group consists of at least one DP slave. Note, however, that each DP
slave can belong to several different groups.
You can form a maximum of 8 groups in each master system.
Precondition The DP master must be able to send the FREEZE and SYNC control com-
mands and the DP slave must be able to process them.
Defining group To assign the DP slaves to groups:

membership
1. Select Configure Group Membership.
Result: The ”Groups and their Properties” dialog box is opened.
Groups and their Properties
Gp. 1: Group 1 FREEZE SYNC OK

Gp. 2: Group 2 FREEZE SYNC Cancel
Gp. 3: Group 3 FREEZE SYNC
Grouping
Help
Figure G-22 Groups and their Properties
2. In this dialog box, define whether the groups can process FREEZE and/or
SYNC commands, and
3. Click on the ”Grouping ...” button in the next dialog box and define
which DP slaves with which PROFIBUS addresses belong to which
group. Define the group members by double-clicking on the empty fields.
4. Confirm your entries by pressing the ”OK” button.
Result: The DP slaves are now assigned to between one and eight groups.
You require the group numbers when you send control commands in the
STEP 5 application program with FB IM308C.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-51
G.8.10 IM 308-C: Assigning a shared-input master
Definition In addition to the parameterization master, other DP masters can be granted

read access to each DP slave with inputs. These DP masters are known as
shared-input masters.
The DP slaves accessed by shared-input masters are known as shared-input
slaves.
Preconditions Another DP master requiring read access to a DP slave must satisfy the fol-
lowing preconditions:
Before you assign the DP slave to a shared-input master:
You must have already completely parameterized the DP slave in a mas-
ter system and defined all the slave parameters (see section G.8.4)
You must have already created a new master system (see section G.8.7)
Assigning a To assign a DP slave to a shared-input master, proceed as follows:

shared-input
1. Select a DP slave from the toolbar, and
master
2. In the master system which contains the shared-input master, point to the
bottom of the bus and click the mouse button.
Result: A pop-up menu of PROFIBUS addresses appears.
3. Manually enter the PROFIBUS address of the DP slave to which the
shared-input master is to be granted read access and confirm it by press-
ing the ”OK” button twice.
Result: The DP slave is masked out or grayed. The shared-input master
has read access only to the inputs of this DP slave.

G-52 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.9 Making provision for masters other than those entered

with COM PROFIBUS
Definition If the bus includes masters other than those entered with COM PROFIBUS,
you must make provision for these in the target token runtime.
Note
If you have parameterized all the masters that together make up a bus system
with COM PROFIBUS, the system automatically calculates the total target
token runtime. In this case, you do not need to make provision for any addi-
tional target token runtimes.
Making provision To make provision for other-vendor masters (i.e. not entered with COM PRO-
for other-vendor FIBUS) in the target token runtime, proceed as follows:
masters
1. Parameterize both the master systems completely. A target token runtime
TTR results for each master system:
– TTR1: calculated with COM PROFIBUS
– TTR2: calculated with another software tool
The sum of the two target token runtimes TTR corresponds to the actual
target token runtime.
2. Select Configure Bus Parameters in COM PROFIBUS and then click
on the Set Parameters button.
Result: The ”Bus Parameter Settings” dialog box is opened.
3. Make a note of the target token runtime TTR calculated by COM PROFI-
BUS.
4. Set the ”Delta Ttr” parameter to the time in bit-time units. This setting is
the target token runtime you calculated for the other-vendor master.
Result: When you click the ”Calculate” button, COM PROFIBUS calcu-
lates the new target token runtime Ttr in bit-time units.
5. In the other-vendor master system, add the target token runtime you noted
in 3. to the target token runtime of this other-vendor system.
Subsequent If you want to make changes after you have already customized the target
changes token runtime, proceed as follows:
1. Cancel out the additive target token runtimes again in all the master sys-
tems.
2. Repeat steps 1 to 5 above in order to calculate the new target token run-
time.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-53
G.10 Device master files
Introduction Each PROFIBUS device requires a device master file or a type file so that it
can be mounted in COM PROFIBUS. All new devices are described by
means of device master files. COM PROFIBUS loads the data needed for old
devices from type files.
If there is both a device master file and a type file, COM PROFIBUS uses the
device master file automatically.
What is a device A device master file contains all the DP slave descriptions in a standard for-
master file? mat in accordance with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Device master files are stored in the directory called ”\GSD”.
What is a DP type COM PROFIBUS reads the data required for old DP slaves from the DP type
file? file. A DP type file describes a slave with regard to the number of inputs and
outputs, the number of diagnostic bytes, FREEZE/SYNC-ability, possible
parameter values and so on.
COM PROFIBUS can only process those DP type files which are in the
”TYPDAT5X” directory. Non-language-specific type files are identified by
an ”*X.200” extension, while English-language type files are identified by an
”*E.200” extension.
What is an FMS COM PROFIBUS reads the data required for old FMS stations from the FMS
type file? type file. An FMS type file describes the parameters of an FMS station (e.g.
the value ranges for the FMS connection parameters).
COM PROFIBUS can only process those FMS type files which are in the
”FMSTYPES” directory. Non-language-specific type files are identified by
an ”*X.FMS” extension, while English-language type files are identified by
an ”*E.FMS” extension.
Reading a device If you copy new device master files or new DP type files into the appropriate
master file/type file directory while COM PROFIBUS is running, you must then update the
directory with File Read Device Master Files.
Opening a device To open and read an existing device master file/DP type file:
master file/DP type
1. Select File Open Device Master File.
file
Result: A list box appears containing the names of all the device master
files/type files.
2. Select the file name of your choice and confirm it by pressing the ”OK”
button.
Result: A window containing the filled-in device master file/type file
appears on the screen.

G-54 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.11 Saving and exporting the configuration parameterized

with COM PROFIBUS
In section G.11 Section G.11 contains information on:
Section Topic Page

G.11.1 Saving to DP master (File Export DP Master ) G-57
G.11.2 Saving to 32 K EEPROM in S5-95U ( File Export G-59
DP Master)
G.11.3 Saving to memory card for IM 308-C ( File Export G-62
Memory Card)
G.11.4 Saving as a binary database in NCM format for SIMATIC NET G-63
PC modules File Export NCM File )
Options for sav- You have several options for saving and exporting data with COM PROFI-
ing/exporting BUS.
Table G-13 Saving the configuration parameterized with COM PROFIBUS
If you ... Use the commands Meaning

...
save the entire configuration File Save COM PROFIBUS saves the entire bus configura-
or tion in a program file.
File Save file as ...
export the configuration of a master sys- File Export COM PROFIBUS exports the configuration of
tem to the memory card for the IM 308-C Memory Card the master system to the memory card (see sec-
tion G.11.3)
want to save the configuration of a mas- File Export COM PROFIBUS saves the configuration of the
ter system on the programmer/PC as well Binary File master system in a binary file having the exten-
sion ”*.2BF”
export the configuration of a master sys- File Export COM PROFIBUS exports the configuration of
tem directly to the DP master (e.g. to an DP Master the master system to the DP master (see sections
IM 308-C or S5-95U/DP master) G.11.1 and 9.6)
export the configuration of a master sys- File Export COM PROFIBUS saves the configuration of a
tem to SIMATIC NET PC modules NCM File master system as an NCM file. You can then ex-
port this file (binary database) to SIMATIC NET
PC modules using SIMATIC NET tools.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-55
Saving more than COM PROFIBUS exports the data of only one master system to the master or
one master system to a binary file. This has the following consequences if you have more than
one master system:
If your bus configuration consists of more than one master system and
you want to modify the parameters of one of these systems, you must also
re-parameterize the other masters. If not, you may encounter errors or the
bus system may not work at all (e.g. because the response monitoring
time has been changed).
If you want to reconstruct the entire configuration of a program file, you
must re-import all the associated binary files or the master systems of all
masters.

G-56 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.11.1 Saving to DP master (File " Export " DP master)
Example 1: No There is no master system on the DP master as yet. To export data to the DP
master system on master (e.g. to the IM 308-C):
the DP master
S The online functions of COM PROFIBUS must be installed (see sec-
tion G.2).
rectly to the DP master (see Table G-1, section G.2).
S There must be no other stations on the PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS ad-
dress 1, and no other baud rates must be set, because the default parame-
ters are saved on the DP master (IM 308-C: baud rate = 19.2 kbaud and
PROFIBUS address = 1).
S The memory card must be inserted in the IM 308-C as DP master. If the
memory card contains data not generated with COM PROFIBUS, delete
the memory card in COM PROFIBUS with Service " Delete Memory
Card.
Example 1: To export the master system to the master:

Exporting the
1. In COM PROFIBUS, select File " Export " DP Master.
master system
2. Enter the baud rate and the PROFIBUS address of the DP master and con-
firm them by pressing the ”OK” button (IM 308-C: baud rate =
19.2 kbaud; PROFIBUS address = 1).
Result: COM PROFIBUS exports the parameters to the DP master
(IM 308-C: ”RN” and ”IF” LEDs lit: the operating mode of the IM 308-C
does not change).
After the parameters have been exported, they are saved in the DP master,
but the DP master resumes with the old parameters (IM 308-C: ”ST” and
”IF” LEDs lit).
3. COM PROFIBUS then asks you whether you want to activate the ex-
ported parameters immediately in the DP master:
If there is only one DP master on the PROFIBUS, activate the parameters
by clicking on ”Yes”.
first, then activate it with Service " Activate Parameters.
Result: The DP master(s) work(s) with the new parameters.
Note
The IM 308-C always works with the last parameters to have been exported
if the system is powered down and powered up again!

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-57
Example 2: Over- There is already a master system on the DP master and you want to overwrite
writing a master it. To export data to the DP master (e.g. to the IM 308-C):
system on the DP
master
tion G.2)
rectly to the DP master (see Table G-1, section G.2)
Example 2: To export the master system to the master:

Exporting the
1. In COM PROFIBUS, select File "Export "DP Master.
master system
2. Enter the current baud rate and the PROFIBUS address of the DP master
and confirm them by pressing the ”OK” button.
Result: COM PROFIBUS exports the parameters to the DP master
(IM 308-C: ”RN” and ”IF” LEDs lit: the operating mode of the IM 308-C
does not change).
After the parameters have been exported, they are saved in the DP master,
but the DP master resumes with the old parameters (IM 308-C: ”ST” and
”IF” LEDs lit).
3. COM PROFIBUS then asks you whether you want to activate the ex-
ported parameters immediately in the DP master:
If there is only one DP master on the PROFIBUS, activate the parameters
by clicking on ”Yes”.
first, then activate it with Service " Activate Parameters.
Result: The DP master(s) work(s) with the new parameters.
Note
The IM 308-C always works with the last parameters to have been exported
if the system is powered down and powered up again!

G-58 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.11.2 Saving to 32 K EEPROM in the S5-95U (File " Export "
DP master)
32 K EEPROM for If you have the S5-95U as DP master, you use a special memory module, an
S5-95U EEPROM with a capacity of 32 Kbytes, supplied with the S5-95U with DP
master interface.
ber in Appendix G.
Preconditions To export data directly to the S5-95U:

tion G.2)
rectly to the DP master (see Table G-1, section G.2)
S The 32 K EEPROM must be installed on the S5-95U (see section 9.5)
Note
The data of a master system cannot be saved by inserting the 32 K EEPROM
in the EEPROM slot of the programmer or an external programming unit.
You can only save the data of a master system in the S5-95U when the 32 K
EEPROM is inserted in the S5-95U.
Saving data to You can only export the data you have parameterized with COM PROFIBUS
S5-95U to the S5-95U via the PROFIBUS-DP. The S5-95U automatically sets the
baud rate to 19.2 kbaud and the PROFIBUS address to ”1” after a general
reset (battery removed and POWER DOWN/POWER UP or programmer
command).
Tip: Save the application program on the 32 K EEPROM before you carry
out a general reset. In this case, the S5-95U will load the application program
after the POWER DOWN/POWER UP.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-59
Saving The procedure for saving the configuration data to the 32 K EEPROM is as
configuration data follows:
to 32 K EEPROM
2. In COM PROFIBUS, select File Export DP Master.
3. Enter the current baud rate of the DP master (default after general reset =
19.2 kbaud). The current baud rate is available in EB 63 (value 05H is not
used):
Table G-14 Contents of EB 63 (baud rate)
EB 63 Baud rate
00H 9.6 kbaud
01H 19.2 kbaud
02H 93.75 kbaud
03H 187.5 kbaud
04H 500 kbaud
06H 1500 kbaud
4. Enter the current station number of the DP master (default after general
reset = STN1). The current station number is available as a hexadecimal
value in EB 62.
Result: COM PROFIBUS exports the configuration data to the S5-95U. It
then asks whether you want to activate the exported configuration data
immediately in the S5-95U.
5. If there is only one S5-95U on the PROFIBUS, activate the exported con-
figuration data immediately.
first, then activate it with Service Activate Parameters.
Result: If the configuration data is exported successfully, it is stored in
compressed form in the 32 K EEPROM (STOP LED flickers).
If the configuration data is not exported successfully, the S5-95U resumes
with the old bus parameters of the 32 K EEPROM. If the 32 K EEPROM
is blank, the default values are used.
If the export of the configuration data to the S5-95U is interrupted – e.g.
if the bus connector is withdrawn or an error occurs on the bus – you must
POWER DOWN/POWER UP.
6. Reset the S5-95U from STOP to RUN. After a STOP-RUN transition, the
S5-95U operates with the new configuration data.

G-60 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
General reset of If you perform a general reset (with a programmer command or by removing
the 32 K EEPROM the backup battery and using DB 1 parameter ”LNPG n”; see section 10.3),
only the configuration data on the 32 K EEPROM is deleted. The STEP 5
application program is deleted from the 32 K EEPROM if you then press the
”Copy” button.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-61
G.11.3 Saving to memory card for IM 308-C (File " Export "
Memory Card)
Preconditions for To export data to a memory card:

use of memory
S Your programmer must have a memory card interface, or
card
S Your programmer must have an (E)EPROM slot with the appropriate pro-
S Your PC must have an external programming unit.
The order numbers are listed in Appendix F.
Saving to memory To save the data of a master system to a memory card:

card
1. Insert the memory card in the slot in the programmer or programming
unit, and
2. In COM PROFIBUS, select File " Export " Memory Card.
Result: The configuration data is saved on the memory card. You can
insert the memory card in the IM 308-C.

G-62 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.11.4 Saving as a binary database in NCM format for SIMATIC NET PC

modules (File " Export " NCM file)
Applications You require binary databases in NCM format for SIMATIC NET PC mod-
ules. The procedure for exporting the master system configured with COM
PROFIBUS to a SIMATIC NET PC module is as follows:
1. Generate the database for the SIMATIC NET PC module (.LDB) using
the File " Export " NCM file command.
2. Choose a name for the NCM database and give it an ”.LDB” extension.
3. Follow the instructions provided by COM PROFIBUS and confirm your
inputs by pressing the ”OK” button.
Result: COM PROFIBUS converts the configuration you have generated
and creates the following files:
– NCM file, loadable binary database (.LDB)
– Error file (.ERR)
4. Load the binary database (NCM file) onto the SIMATIC NET PC module
using the SIMATIC NET Setup program (please also refer to the Installa-
tion Manual for the FMS-5412, DP-5412 or SOFTNET for PROFIBUS).

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-63
G.12 Documenting and printing the parameterized configura-

tion
Overview COM PROFIBUS can generate the following lists to document the parame-
terized configuration:
Table G-15 Documenting the parameterized configuration
Documentation ... Contains ...

List of all bus parameters ... baud rate, bus profile and bus times, etc.
Station list ... all stations on the bus, in order of their PROFIBUS
addresses, with description and master or host assign-
ment.
Overview of hosts and master ... host configuration, masters assigned to the host and
systems PROFIBUS addresses of the DP slaves/FMS stations
assigned to the master.
Assignment of DP slaves to ... slaves in groups and the group properties (FREEZE,
groups1 SYNC).
Station-oriented address as- ... the STEP 5 addresses assigned to a DP slave.
signment1
Area-oriented address assign- ... how the STEP 5 address space is divided among the
ment1 various DP slaves.
Overview of connections ... FMS connections parameterized for an FMS station.
(FMS)2
List of all station types and ... the device master files/type files in a directory
associated device master files known to COM PROFIBUS, with the device master
file/type file to station type assignments.
1 These documentation lists are only available for a DP system.
2 This documentation list is only available for an FMS system.
View documenta- To view the area-oriented address assignments, for example, select Docu-
tion mentation Area-oriented Address Assignment.
What can I print? You can print all the lists that are named in the ”Documentation” box.
How do I print? To print a list:

1. Click on the list of your choice in the system documentation box (e.g.
overview of host and master systems), and
2. Click on the print icon or select File Print.
3. Confirm your choice by pressing the ”OK” button.

G-64 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
G.13 PROFIBUS-DP: service functions with COM PROFIBUS
Overview COM PROFIBUS incorporates the following service functions:

Overview diagnostics (not when S5-95U is DP master)
Slave diagnostics
Status of slave inputs and outputs
Changing the PROFIBUS address of a slave
Activating parameters that have been exported to the DP master
Bus parameters of the PROFIBUS card
Data cycle times
Programmer/PC offline on the PROFIBUS
Deleting the memory card
Preconditions It is a precondition of using the service functions that your programmer/PC is

active as master on the PROFIBUS via a PROFIBUS interface. You can find
these preconditions for the online functions in section G.2.
Definition of The overview diagnostics indicate which slave has reported a diagnosis – in
diagnostics other words detected an error.
The slave diagnostics provide more detailed information about the slave with
regard to
The station status of the slave
The master PROFIBUS address
The device-specific, ID-specific and channel-specific diagnostics, de-
pending on the slave type

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-65
View overview You can view the overview diagnostics as follows:

diagnostics
1. Switch to the master system whose overview diagnostics you want to
view.
2. Select Service " Overview Diagnostics or click on the master with the
right mouse button.
Result: The ”Overview Diagnostics” dialog box is opened. Its meaning is
as follows:
Table G-16 Meaning of the ”Overview Diagnostics” dialog box
PROFIBUS address Meaning

M PROFIBUS address of the master
X A slave which is parameterized , but not assigned to this master system
Empty field No diagnostics reported by a slave which is assigned to this master system
!! (empty field) Diagnostics reported by a slave
OFF (empty field) No data communication between master and slave.
View slave You have several ways of viewing the slave diagnostics:
diagnostics
S If the mouse is pointing to an empty field for a slave in the ”Overview
Diagnostics” dialog box, you can display the slave diagnostics either by
clicking the right mouse button or by double-clicking (not if S5-95U is
DP master)
or
S Click on the appropriate slave and select Service " Slave Diagnostics
or
S Click on the appropriate slave with the right mouse button and select
Slave Diagnostics.
Result: COM PROFIBUS opens the ”Slave Diagnostics” box.

G-66 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Status of inputs With Version 3.0 of COM PROFIBUS, you can display the status of the in-
and outputs puts and outputs of the slaves on the PROFIBUS.
You have several ways of viewing the status of a slave:
1. Click on the appropriate slave and select Service " Status
or
Click on the appropriate slave with the right mouse button and select Sta-
tus.
Result: COM PROFIBUS opens the ”Status” box
2. Using the right mouse button in the ”Format” column, select the field
containing the format in which you want the inputs and outputs to be dis-
played.
Result: COM PROFIBUS updates the status of the inputs and outputs
online.
Preconditions of The following preconditions must be fulfilled in order to change the PROFI-
changing the BUS address with COM PROFIBUS:
PROFIBUS
S It must be possible to change the PROFIBUS address of the slave using
address
the software. This is not the case with slaves whose PROFIBUS address
can only be set directly with a switch on the housing.
S The slave must behave like a DP slave in accordance with EN 50 170,
Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
S The slave must not be in the process of communicating with the DP mas-
ter.
Changing the To change the PROFIBUS address:

PROFIBUS
1. Select Service " Change PROFIBUS Address.
address
Result: COM PROFIBUS opens the ”Change PROFIBUS Address” box.
2. Enter the old and new PROFIBUS addresses.
3. Specify whether or not the new PROFIBUS address can be changed later
on. If not, you will only be able to change the PROFIBUS address after a
general reset.
4. Confirm your inputs by pressing the ”OK” button.
Result: COM PROFIBUS assigns a new PROFIBUS address to the slave.
This new PROFIBUS address takes effect for the slave immediately.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c G-67
Activating If you have exported the data of a master system to the DP master directly
parameters using the File Export DP Master function, the new parameters are not
valid immediately.
After the data has been exported, COM PROFIBUS asks you whether you
want to activate the exported parameters immediately in the DP master. If
there is only one DP master on the PROFIBUS, activate the parameters im-
mediately.
If there are two or more DP masters on the PROFIBUS, answer ”No” to the
prompt instead. Export all the parameterization data to the DP masters first,
then activate it with Service Activate Parameters. You can thus activate
the parameters synchronously.
Bus parameters of Using Service Bus Parameters DP Card you can define the bus profile
the PROFIBUS and the baud rate of the PROFIBUS card.
card
Data cycle times Using Service Data Cycle Times you can tell COM PROFIBUS to output
the data cycle times, such as the response monitoring time for the configura-
tion you have entered.
Offline If you want to use a programmer/PC offline on the PROFIBUS, e.g. in order
to display diagnostic messages or states, and at the same time disconnect the
programmer/PC from the PROFIBUS in a defined manner, select Service
Offline.
Deleting the If you want to delete the memory card for the IM 308-C, select Service
memory card Delete Memory Card.

G-68 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Glossary
Baud rate The speed of data transmission, expressed as the number of bits transferred
per second (baud rate = bit rate).
Baud rates from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud are possible on the PROFIBUS-DP,
while the PROFIBUS-FMS permits rates from 9.6 kbaud to 1.5 Mbaud.
Binary file If, after transferring data to the DP master, you wish to save this data on the
programmer/PC as well, you must create a binary file. The binary file con-
tains all the bus, slave and master parameters of a master system configured
with COM PROFIBUS.
Bus Common transmission path interconnecting all nodes; the bus has two de-
fined terminating points.
The bus for the ET 200 system is a two-conductor cable or a fiber-optic wa-
veguide.
Bus connector Physical connection between a station and the bus.

Bus connectors for ET 200 are available with and without an interface for the
programmer and with IP 20 and IP 65 protection ratings.
Bus segment Segment
Bus system The set of all stations physically connected by a bus cable forms a bus sys-
tem.
CLEAR An operating mode of the DP master. The DP master reads the input data
cyclically, the outputs remain set to ”0”.
The DP master participates in the token ring.
Combimaster A master that can function either as a DP master or as an FMS master.
Communications With the PROFIBUS-FMS, a communications relationship is a logical link

relationship between two stations on the bus.

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c Glossary-1
Glossary
Communications A communications relationship exists between two stations that communicate

relationship with one another via the PROFIBUS-FMS. Each station on the bus has at
reference (KR) least one communications relationship. Each relationship has a unique num-
ber (known as a communications relationship reference). A communications
relationship reference corresponds to an ”internal address” of the bus station
on layer 7.
Configuring The act of parameterizing individual modules in a distributed I/O system

and/or assigning addresses.
Consistent data Data which, on account of its content, belongs together and cannot be sepa-
rated is known as consistent data.
The values of analog modules, for example, must always be treated as consis-
tent data, i.e. the value of an analog module must not be falsified by being
read at two different times.
Control command The IM 308-C can send commands simultaneously to a group of DP slaves in
order to synchronize the DP slaves.
The control commands FREEZE and SYNC enable event-driven syn-
chronization of the DP slaves.
Cyclic processing The regular addressing of the slaves by the master.

The master (e.g. the IM 308-C) reads the input data of the slaves and sends
output data to the slaves.
Cyclic processing corresponds to the RUN and CLEAR operating modes of
the DP master.
Device master data Device master data contains DP slave descriptions in a standard format. It is
easier to parameterize the master and the DP slave using the device master
data.
Diagnostics The detection, location, classification, indication and evaluation of errors,

faults and messages.
Diagnostics supports monitoring functions that execute automatically during
system operation, thus enhancing the availability of the system by helping to
minimize startup times and idle times.
ET 200 supports a number of diagnostics options, from an overview of the
DP slaves that have generated diagnostic reports to monitoring of individual
channels.

Glossary-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Glossary
Distributed I/O sta- An I/O unit not installed in the central device. A distributed I/O station can
tion be located at a considerable distance from the CPU. Distributed I/O stations
include:
ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200L, ET 200M, ET 200U
DP/AS-I link
S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP interface
other DP slaves from Siemens or other-vendor products
The PROFIBUS-DP bus connects the distributed I/O stations to the IM 308-C
master interface or the S5-95U with DP master interface.
DP master A master which functions in accordance with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PRO-

FIBUS with the DP protocol is known as a DP master.
DP Siemens The bus protocol developed by Siemens. With the cooperation of the PROFI-
BUS User Forum, this bus protocol has been extended into an open, vendor-
independent system. The extended bus protocol has been ratified as European
Standard EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS ( DP standard).
DP slave A slave operating on the PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS-DP protocol

and functioning in accordance with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS is
known as a DP slave.
DP standard The bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system, as defined in
EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
DP window The DP window is the address space addressed by the FB IM308C on the
IM 308-C. Multiple DP windows are available for addressing the distributed
I/O system, beginning with address (F)F800H, (F)FA00H, (F)FC00H and
(F)FE00H.
When you use DP windows, you must ensure that the address space is not
also occupied either totally or in part by CPs and IPs in the central program-
mable controller.
Earth The conductive soil where the potential at all points can be assumed to be
zero.

Glossary
ET 200 ET 200 distributed I/O system with the PROFIBUS-DP protocol is a bus for
connecting distributed I/O stations to the S5-115U, S5-135U and S5-155U
programmable controllers or other suitable master. The ET 200 is character-
ized by fast reaction times, as only small volumes of data (bytes) are trans-
ferred.
ET 200 is based on the European Standard EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFI-
BUS.
ET 200 operates on the master/slave principle. The DP master can be, for
example, the IM 308-C master interface, the S5-95U with DP master inter-
face or a programmer/PC with a SIMATIC NET PC module.
The DP slaves can be, for example, the ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200L,
ET 200M or ET 200U distributed I/O stations, the S5-95U programmable
controller with PROFIBUS-DP slave interface, other Siemens DP slaves or
other-vendor slaves.
Export A COM PROFIBUS command for saving data on a memory card or in a

binary file.
External power Power supply unit for I/O modules.

supply
FDL Field bus data link; layer 2 of PROFIBUS
Floating On a floating I/O module the reference potentials of the control and load cir-
cuits are galvanically isolated from each other. The input and output circuits
are not grouped, in other words they have no common reference potential
(1-to-1 grouping). Not to be confused with ”isolated”.
FMS connection An FMS connection is a communications relationship between two FMS

stations.
FMS master A master which functions in accordance with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PRO-
FIBUS with the FMS protocol is known as an FMS master.
FMS service The master can exchange data with FMS services.
There are confirmed and unconfirmed FMS services. In the case of confirmed
FMS services (e.g. MSAZ), the slave sends an acknowledgment back to the
master to confirm that the services have been received. With unconfirmed
FMS services (e.g. broadcast), the slave does not send an acknowledgment to
the master.

Glossary
FMS slave A slave operating on the PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS-FMS protocol
and functioning in accordance with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS is
known as an FMS slave.
FMS station An FMS station is an FMS master or an FMS slave.
FREEZE A control command issued by the DP master to a group of DP standard

slaves.
When it receives the FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the
current state of the inputs and transfers them cyclically to the DP master.
The DP standard slave freezes the status of the inputs every time it receives a
FREEZE command.
The DP standard slave does not transfer the data cyclically to the DP master
until the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.
The FREEZE command requires that the DP standard slaves be assigned to a
group in COM PROFIBUS. ET 200 supports the FB IM308C for the
FREEZE command.
Gap factor Gap-update factor. The distance between the own PROFIBUS address of the
DP master and the next PROFIBUS address is known as the gap. The gap
update factor, in turn, indicates the number of token runs that must be per-
formed before the DP master checks whether there is another DP master in
the gap.
If, for example, the gap updating factor is 3, each DP master checks after 3
token runs whether there is another DP master between its own PROFIBUS
address and that of the next DP master.
Ground electrode One or mode conductive parts making good contact with the ground.
Grounding Connecting an electrically conductive part to the ground electrode by means

of a grounding system.
Group You must assign the DP slaves to groups and send the FREEZE and SYNC
control commands to the groups.
Multiple DP slaves can be assigned to a group. A given DP slave can be as-
signed to more than one group, but can belong to only one master system.
Grouping On grouped modules, multiple input and output circuits share a common con-
nection. The common connection may carry either the (L-) potential (M-
grouping) or the (L+) potential (P-grouping).

Glossary
Group Membership of a bus node to a group.

membership
Host A host is a system or device containing at least one DP master, for example
the programmable controller with the CPU is the host and the IM 308-C is
the DP master.
ID A unique code identifying the S5-100U I/O modules in the ET 200U distrib-
uted I/O station. These unique codes are assigned to the S5-100U I/O mod-
ules under COM PROFIBUS.
IM 308-C A DP master for the ET 200 distributed I/O system. The IM 308-C can be
used together with COM PROFIBUS and can be inserted in the S5-115U,
S5-135U and S5-155U programmable controllers.
Import A command in COM PROFIBUS for reading a configuration from a DP ma-

ster, a memory card or a binary file.
IP 20 DIN 40050 degree of protection: protection against finger contact and ingress
of solid bodies measuring in excess of 12 mm in diameter.
IP 65 DIN 40050 degree of protection: complete protection against contact, protec-

tion against the ingress of dust and protection against jets of water from all
directions.

tion against the ingress of dust and protection against the ingress of heavy
seas or powerful jets of water.

tion against the ingress of dust and protection against damaging ingress of
water under pressure when immersed.
Isolated On an isolated I/O module the reference potentials of control and load cir-
cuits are galvanically isolated, e.g. by optocouplers, relay contacts or trans-
formers. Input and output circuits may be grouped. Not to be confused with
”floating”.
Isolation Facility for monitoring the isolation resistance of a system.

monitoring
LSAP A link service access point is a layer 2 access point (address).

Glossary
Lightning arrester A device capable of wholly or partially diverting a lightning pulse without
losing its integrity.
Lightning- Comprises those parts of the internal lighting-protection system required to

protection reduce the potential differentials caused by a lightning pulse, i.e. the poten-
potential tial-equalization busbars, potential-equalization conductors, clamps, connec-
equalization tors, air-gap suppressers, lightning arresters and overvoltage arresters.
Loop resistance Total resistance of the feed and return.
Machine ground The entirety of all interconnected inactive parts of a device. The machine
ground cannot carry a hazardous contact voltage even in the event of a fault.
Master When in possession of the token, the master may send data to other nodes
and request data from other nodes.
Master interface Module for distributed I/O. The distributed inputs/outputs are connected to
the programmable controller via the IM 208-C master interface.
Master PROFIBUS The ”master PROFIBUS address” parameter of the PROFIBUS-DP contains
address the PROFIBUS address of the master to which a DP slave is assigned and
which has parameterized the DP slave.
Master/slave Bus access procedure in which only one node is the master and all other
procedure nodes are slaves.
Master system The master plus all the slaves to which it has read and write access form a
master system.
Max. retry limit A bus parameter defining the maximum number of call retries addressed to a
DP slave.
max_TSDR A bus parameter defining the maximum protocol processing time of the re-
sponding node (Station Delay Responder).
min_TSDR A bus parameter defining the minimum protocol processing time of the re-
sponding node (Station Delay Responder).
Mode selector The mode selector switch is on the IM 308-C master interface. It is a three-
switch position switch for the modes RUN, STOP and OFF.

Glossary
Non-floating On a non-floating I/O module the reference potentials of control and load
circuits are electrically connected.
Non-grounded Configuration without a galvanic connection to ground. In most instances an

configuration RC element is used to divert interference currents.
Offline When the programmer is connected to the bus by the bus cable but is not ac-
tive as master, it is said to be offline on the bus.
Online When the programmer is active as DP master on the bus, it is said to be on-
line on the bus.
Overvoltage Device for limiting overvoltages from remote strikes or induction effects (or
arrester switching operations). The currents diverted by overvoltage arresters are sig-
nificantly lower than lightning pulses with regard to peak values, charges and
specific energy.
Parameterization Parameterization is the defining of an ET 200 configuration with all specific

parameters in COM PROFIBUS.
Parameterization Each DP slave has one parameterization master. In the power-up procedure,
master the parameterization master transfers the parameters to the DP slave, it has
read and write access to the DP slave and may modify the configuration of a
DP slave.
The FREEZE and SYNC control commands, for example, can be sent to the
DP slave only by the parameterization master.
The opposite of the parameterization master is the shared-input master.
Parameterizing The act of transferring the slave parameters from the master to the slave.
PDU Protocol data unit
Process image A process image of all inputs (= PII) or all outputs (= PIO) at a given time.
You can access the process image in the control program.

Glossary
PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, European process and field bus standard defined in the
PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS).
The standard defines functional, electrical and mechanical characteristics for
a bit-serial field bus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system which links PROFIBUS-compatible program-
mable controllers and field devices on cell and field level. PROFIBUS runs
the protocols DP (= distributed I/O system), FMS (= field bus message speci-
fication), PA (= process automation) and TF (= technological functions).
PROFIBUS ad- Each station must be assigned a unique PROFIBUS address for identification.
dress
The programmer or the ET 200 Handheld has the PROFIBUS address ”0”.
DP masters and DP slaves are assigned PROFIBUS addresses in the range 1
to 123, with the following exceptions:
PROFIBUS-DP The PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for distributed
I/O system.
The primary function of PROFIBUS-DP is to sustain the high-speed cyclic
exchange of data between the central DP master and the distributed I/O sta-
tions.
PROFIBUS-FMS The PROFIBUS bus system with the FMS protocol. FMS stands for field bus
message specification.
Protocol data unit The information which is exchanged between two stations on the bus is
packed in a PDU (= protocol data unit).
Reaction time The reaction time is the average time which elapses between the change of
an input and the corresponding change of an output.
Redundancy The provision of duplicates for the sake of reliability. If one component fails
the duplicate assumes the role of the original.

Glossary
Redundant remote The duplication of a bus line monitored at both ends by two 485 repeaters in
operation remote mode:
R R
Remote segment
(redundant segment)
R R
Reference poten- Potential to which the voltages of the circuits are referenced and the datum
tial for measurement of these voltages.
Response A slave parameter in COM PROFIBUS. If a DP slave is not addressed within

monitoring the response monitoring time, it goes to safe condition, i.e. the DP slave sets
its output to ”0”.
Response monitoring can be switched on or off for each individual DP slave.
RS 485 repeater Device for amplifying bus signals and linking segments over large dis-
tances.
RUN An operating mode of the master.

The DP master cyclically reads the input data of the slaves and sends output
data to the slaves. The master is participating in the token ring.
Segment The bus line between two terminating resistors constitutes a segment. A seg-
ment includes 0 to 32 stations. Segments can be linked by RS 485 re-
peaters.
Shared-input Other DP masters can have read access to a DP slave assigned to a parame-
master terization master. The other DP masters are known as shared-input masters.
In COM PROFIBUS masks, DP slaves assigned to a shared-input master ap-
pear gray.
Shield impedance AC impedance of the cable shield. Shield impedance is a characteristic of the
cable used and is usually specified by the manufacturer.

Glossary
Short-circuit A conductive path established by a fault between two conductors that are
normally energized in operation when the fault circuit thus created does not
include a working resistance.
SIMATIC NET PC SIMATIC NET PC modules are used to link the PC to bus systems, e.g.
modules PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet.
SINEC L2 SINEC L2 is the name of the Siemens PROFIBUS.
Slave A slave can exchange data with a master only when requested to do so by
the master.
Slaves are, for example, all DP slaves such as ET 200B, ET 200C, etc.
SOFTNET for SOFTNET for PROFIBUS is the protocol software for the CP 5411, CP 5511
PROFIBUS and CP 5611 SINEC NET PC modules.
Standard-section Metal busbar of a section standardized in EN 50 022.

busbar
Standard-section busbars are used to secure the devices in the SIMATIC fam-
ily, for example S5-100U I/O modules, ET 200B, etc.
Station Device which can send, receive or amplify data on the bus, e.g. master, slave,
RS 485 repeater, star hub.
Station number PROFIBUS address
STOP Operating mode of the master. No data is exchanged between master and
slaves. The master participates in the token ring.
Suppresser Component designed to reduce induced voltages. Induced voltages occur

when circuits with inductors are switched off.

Glossary
SYNC A control command addressed by the DP master to a group of DP standard

slaves.
The DP master issues the SYNC control command to force the receiving DP
slaves to freeze the states of their outputs at their current values. The DP
standard slaves store the output data for subsequent telegrams, but the output
states remain unchanged.
After every SYNC control command, the DP standard slave sets the outputs
which it had saved as output data.
The outputs are not cyclically updated until the DP master sends the UN-
SYNC control command.
The DP standard slave must be assigned to a group in order to implement
the SYNC control command. ET 200 supports the FB IM308C for the SYNC
control command.
Terminating A resistance for matching to the impedance of the bus cable; invariably, a
resistor terminating resistor must be installed at each end of the bus cable or segment.
In the ET 200, the terminating resistors are activated/deactivated in the
bus connectors.
TID1 A bus parameter; idle time 1 is the idle time which elapses after receipt of a
response.
TID2 A bus parameter; idle time 2 is the idle time which elapses after sending of a
call without response.
Token A telegram representing the send authorization in a network. The token sig-
nals the states ”seized” and ”free”. The token is passed from master to mas-
ter.
Token ring Each master physically interconnected by a bus receives the token and passes
it to the next master in turn. The masters participate in what is known as a
token ring.
Token runtime The time that elapses between the receipt of two consecutive tokens.
TQUI Quiet time for modulator; the time for switching from send to receive. The
quiet time for modulator allows for the operation of switching off the trans-
mitter and switching on the receiver.
TRDY Ready time for acknowledgment or response.

Glossary
TSET Setup time. The setup time is the time that may elapse between reception of a
telegram and the associated reaction.
TSL Slot time. The slot time is the maximum time the transmitter allows for a
response from the station it addresses.
TTR Target rotation time. Each master compares the target rotation time with the
actual token runtime. The difference is the factor which determines the time
that the DP master can use to send its data telegrams to the slaves.
UNFREEZE FREEZE
UNSYNC SYNC
VFD A VFD (virtual field device) is a map of a real field device, the purpose of
which is to obtain a standard view of any device.

Glossary

Index
Symbols Addressing
Distributed I/Os, 1-3
”BF” LED, Significance, 9-4
IM 308-C in DP window, 6-4
”RUN” LED, Significance, 9-4
Master parameters, G-39
”STOP” LED, Significance, 9-4
Options for addressing, 6-5
Page addressing, 6-8
S5-95U as DP master, 10-2, 10-3
Numbers Via FB IM308C, 6-5
24 V DC supply, Rules, 3-4 Addressing mode, Mixed addressing, 6-12
32 K EEPROM, 9-11, G-59 Addressing via FB IM308C, Definition and uti-
Purpose, 9-10 lization, 6-11
Replacing, 9-10 Adjusting jumper on IM 308-C, 5-9
Ambient operating conditions, A-7
Application window of COM PROFIBUS, G-16
A Applications of COM PROFIBUS, G-10
AS interface, 1-11
AC-actuated coils and varistors, 3-14
Access
byte-by-byte, B-15
word-by-word, B-15 B
Access commands Backplane connectors of IM 308-C, 5-3
Consistency, B-2 Backup copy, G-12
for the 945 CPU, B-7 Barometric pressure, A-7
for the S5-135U, B-9 Baud rate, Glossary-1
for the S5-155U, B-11 Bus parameters, G-35
for the S5-115U (except 945 CPU), B-3 BF LED. See ”BF” LED
for the S5-115U (except CPU 945), B-5 Binary file, Glossary-1
Rules for access to the distributed I/O sys- Definition, G-30
tem, B-13 Importing (loading) data from, G-32
Access operations, On the addresses for distrib- Block diagram
uted I/O in S5-95U, 10-3 IM 308-C, 5-7
Accidental-contact voltage, 3-13 RS 485 repeater, 4-5
Address Bus, Glossary-1
for courses, vi
for queries, vi
Address space
Host parameters, G-37
Used by ASM 401, 6-3

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c Index-1
Index
Bus cable, 3-24 Changes since the previous version of this

Characteristics, 3-24 manual, iv
Length of droplines, 3-30 Changing PROFIBUS address, With COM
Maximum cable length, 3-29 PROFIBUS, G-67
Rules for laying cables, 3-29 Changing the memory card, 5-11
Technical data, 3-24 Channel-specific diagnostics, 6-13, 10-6
Bus communication interrupted, 8-10, 11-10 CLEAR, Glossary-1
Bus connector, Glossary-1 Operating mode of IM 308-C, 8-7
Connecting to module, 3-35 Climatic conditions, A-7
Dimensional drawing, E-3 Coils in circuit, 3-14
Disconnecting, 3-35 COM ET 200 Windows parameterization soft-
Preparing bus cable, 3-31 ware. See COM ET 200 Windows
Bus connector 6ES7 972-0BA30, Installing bus COM PROFIBUS, 1-3
cable, 3-33 Application window, G-16
Bus connectors, 3-26 Applications, G-10
Applications, 3-26 Backup copy, G-12
Definition and design, 1-17 Creating files, G-31
Pin assignment, 3-28 Creating program file, G-31
Setting terminating resistor, 3-35 Definition and functions, 1-15
Technical data, 3-27 Documentation functions, G-64
Bus connectors 6ES7 972-0BA30, Appearance, Graphical user interface, G-14
3-33 Importing data, G-31
Bus designation, Bus parameters, G-35 Installation, G-12
Bus interruption rectified, 8-14, 11-11 Installing online functions, G-13
Bus parameters Menu bar, G-15
Definition, G-35 Mouse – functions of buttons, G-15
Entering, G-36 Online functions, G-10
Entering – example, G-19, G-26 Opening existing program files, G-31
Meanings, G-35 Parameterizing configuration, G-33
Bus profile, Bus parameters, G-35 Preconditions for using, G-10
Bus segment, Glossary-1 Saving configuration, G-55
Cornerstone data of a bus segment, 1-5 Service functions, G-65
Definition, 1-5 Starting, G-13
Linking bus segments, 1-6 Status bar, G-14
Maximum configuration, 1-5 Title bar, G-14
Bus segments Toolbar, G-16
Cornerstone data for linking bus segments, Combimaster, Glossary-1
1-7 Communications processor, 9-6
Rules for more than 32 stations on bus, 1-6 Communications relation reference, G-45
Bus system, Glossary-1 Communications relationship, Glossary-1
Byte consistency, B-16, B-18, B-20, B-22, B-24, Communications relationship reference, Glos-
B-26 sary-2
Commutating capacitors, 3-14
Commutating capacitors for inductors, 3-14
C Configuration options with the RS 485 repeater,
4-6
Cabinet lighting, 3-15
Configure
Cable routing, Outdoors, 3-7
Cable shielding, 3-10
Slave parameters, G-43
CE, Mark, A-2
Configuring, Glossary-2
Certificates and approvals, iv
Certifications, A-2

Index-2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Index
Connecting bus cable, To bus connector with Device master data. See GSD
order number 6ES5 ..., 3-31 Device master file, Definition, G-30, G-54
Connection profile, G-45 Device-specific diagnostics, 10-6
Connections, FMS station parameters, G-44 Diagnostics, Glossary-2
Consistency, B-2 Channel-specific, 6-13, 10-6
Rules, B-14 Device-specific, 6-13, 10-6
Consistent data, Glossary-2 ID-specific, 6-13, 10-6
Control command, Glossary-2 Master diagnostics, 6-13
See also SYNC Overview diagnostics, 10-6
Issuing, 6-23 Requesting, 10-10
Control processor, 9-6 Slave diagnostics, 6-13, 10-6
Failure, 11-13 Structure, 6-13, 10-6
Controls of the S5-95U, 9-2 With STEP 5, 6-13, 10-6
Correct shield installation, 3-11 Diagnostics cycle, C-20, C-21
Courses, vi Diagnostics word, 10-7
CP 342-5, 1-8 Differences in potential, Causes, 3-8
CP 443-5, 1-8 Dimensional drawings, E-2
CP 5411, 1-8, G-11 Diode, 3-14
CP 5412 (A2), 1-8 Disposal, v
CP 5431, 1-8 Distributed I/O, Access commands, 6-12
CP 5511, 1-8, G-11 Distributed I/O device, ET 200S, 1-12
CP 581 TM-L2, 1-8 Distributed I/O station, Glossary-3
CPU 315-2 DP, 1-8 ET 200B, 1-11
CPU 413-2 DP/414-2 DP, 1-8 ET 200L, 1-11
CPU and IM 308-C power-up, 8-6 ET 200M, 1-12
CR, G-45 ET 200U, 1-11, 1-12
Creating files in COM PROFIBUS, G-31 ET 200X, 1-12
CSA certification, A-3 Documenting a configuration, With COM PRO-
Cycle checkpoint, 9-7 FIBUS, G-64
In S5-95U, 11-13 DP card. See PROFIBUS card
Cyclic processing, Glossary-2 DP cycle, 9-7
DP master, Glossary-3
See also IM 308–C
D Importing (loading) data from, G-32
DP master interface, 1-10
Data consistency, 6-2, B-2
Pin assignment, 9-5
S5-95U, 10-3
Purpose, 9-5
Data cycle, C-20, C-21
DP Siemens, Glossary-3
Data cycle times, G-68
DP slave
Data exchange
Addressable after failure, 8-14, 11-11
Method of operation, C-20
Failure of a DP slave, 8-10, 11-10
Operating principle, 9-7
DP slaves, Possible DP slaves, 1-11
Data exchange between S5-95U and DP slaves,
DP standard slave, Glossary-3
9-6
DP window, Glossary-3
Data-transfer list, 6-13
Structure, 6-15
DP standard, Glossary-3
DB 1, Parameters for S5-95U as DP master,
DP/AS-I link, 1-11
10-4
DPAD, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8
DC-actuated coils, 3-14
Droplines, Length, 3-30
Default parameter set, S5-95U, 11-5
Detecting errors with STEP 5, 6-13

Index
E FB IM308C
Address space occupied, 7-5
Edit VFDs, Master parameters, G-40
Application, 7-2
Electromagnetic compatibility. See EMV
Assignment of ERR parameter, 7-14
EMC, Technical data, A-4
Assignment of FCT parameter, 7-9
EMC and cable routing, 3-7
Assignment of the GCGR parameter, 7-12
EMC Directive, A-2
Block parameters, 7-7
EMERGENCY OFF facilities, 3-3
Call, 7-7
EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS, 1-2
Calling, 7-3, 10-10
ERR, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8
Calling in multiprocessor mode, 6-28, 7-3
Error recognition with STEP 5, 10-6
Changing PROFIBUS addresses, 7-2
Error-reporting mode
Error numbers in ERR parameter, 7-15
Form of delivery, 7-4
For DP/AS-I link, 7-3, D-2
ET 200, Glossary-4
Indirect parameterization, 7-19
Response of ET 200, 8-4, 11-6
Memory areas occupied in the CPU, 7-2
Starting, 8-2, 11-2
Parameterizing configuration, 7-2
Switching off, 8-15, 11-12
Runtimes, 7-6
Switching on, 8-2, 11-2
S5 memory area with CS, 7-11
What does ET 200 consist of?, 1-2
S5 memory area with WO, RO, RI, 7-10
What is ET 200, 1-2
Sending control commands, 7-2
ET 200 distributed I/O system, 1-2
Technical data, 7-5
ET 200B, 1-11
FCT, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8
ET 200C, 1-11
FDL, Glossary-4
ET 200L, 1-11
Features of the IM 308-C, 5-3
ET 200M, 1-12
Field devices as DP slaves, 1-11
ET 200S, 1-12
Field bus: PROFIBUS-DP, 1-3
ET 200U, 1-12
Floating, Glossary-4
ET 200X, 1-12
FM approval, A-3
Example of parameterizing DP configuration
FMS connection, Glossary-4
with COM PROFIBUS, G-17
FMS connections, Entering – example, G-26,
Example of parameterizing FMS configuration
G-28
with COM PROFIBUS, G-24
FMS master, Glossary-4
Export, Glossary-4
FMS service, Glossary-4
Exporting data to DP master, Example, G-23
FMS slave, Glossary-5
External electrical effects, Protection against,
FMS slaves, 1-11
3-4
FMS station, Glossary-5
External power supply, Glossary-4
FMS station properties
Definition, G-44
Entering, G-45
F Meanings, G-44
Failure of a DP slave, 8-10, 11-10 FREEZE, Glossary-5
Failure response of the S5-95U, 11-13 Definition, 6-23
Family Preconditions, 6-23, G-51
FMS station parameters, G-44 FREEZE-able, Slave parameters, G-42
Slave parameters, G-42 Function block FB IM308C. See FB IM308C
FB 230
Block parameters, 10-11
Call in the STEP 5 application program,
10-12
Function, 10-10
Technical data, 10-12

Index
G IM 318-B, 1-12
IM 318-C, 1-12
Gap factor, Glossary-5
IM 329-N, 1-8
GCGR, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8
Import, Glossary-6
General technical data, A-1
Importing data, G-31
Graphical user interface of COM PROFIBUS,
From binary file, G-32
G-14
from DP master, G-32
Ground, Glossary-3
from memory card, G-32
Ground electrode, Glossary-5
From NCM file, G-32
Grounding, Glossary-5
IMST, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8
Grounding of inactive metal components, 3-13
In host, Master parameters, G-39
Group, Glossary-5
In-building, Cable routing, 3-5
Group membership, Glossary-6
Individual diagnostics, 6-13, 10-6
Defining, G-51
Ingress of foreign matter, A-9
Grouping, Glossary-5
Ingress of water, A-9
Groups, Assigning slaves to groups, G-51
Initial operation, 8-2, 11-2
Of the ET 200 – procedure, 2-7
Installing bus cable, On bus connector 6ES7
H 972-0BA30, 3-33
Host, 1-14, Glossary-6 Installing COM PROFIBUS, G-12
Host designation, Host parameters, G-37 Insulation strength, A-9
Host parameters Interface module IF 964-DP, 1-8
Definition, G-37 Interfaces between lightning-protection zones,
Entering, G-38 3-18
Entering – example, G-19, G-26 Interference, Sinusoidal, A-5
Meanings, G-37 Interference immunity, A-4
Host type, Host parameters, G-37 Interference voltages, Measures to prevent, 3-12
Interference-proof operation, 3-14
IP 20, Glossary-6
I IP 65, Glossary-6
IP 66, Glossary-6
ID, B-14, Glossary-6
IP 67, Glossary-6
ID of manufacturer, 6-13
Isolated, Glossary-6
Identification systems MOBY, 1-11
Isolation monitoring, Glossary-6
IEC 1131, A-2
IF 964-DP, 1-8
IM 180, 1-8
IM 308-C, Address space used by ASM 401, 6-3 J
IM 308-C, 5-2, Glossary-6 Jumper on the IM 308-C setting, 5-9
Appearance, 5-2 Jumper X10, 5-3
Block diagram, 5-7 Jumper X9, 5-3
Controls and LEDs, 5-3
Definition and functions, 1-9
Dimensional drawing, E-2 L
Loading operating system from memory
LEDs of the IM 308-C, 5-3
card, 5-12
LEDs of the S5-95U, 9-2
Operating modes, 8-7
LENG, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8
Operating system version, 5-13
Lightning arrester, Glossary-7
Purpose, 5-2
Lightning protection
Setting the jumper, 5-9
Example, 3-22
Switching to OFF, STOP or RUN, 8-8
Rules, 3-19
Technical data, 5-8

Index
Lightning strikes, 3-18 Masters

Lightning-protection zones Possible masters, 1-8
Principle, 3-17 Provision for other, G-53
schematic, 3-18 Max. retry limit, Glossary-7
Lightning-protection components, 3-22 max_TSDR, Glossary-7
Lightning-protection potential equalization, Mechanical conditions, A-7
Glossary-7 Memory card
Linear addressing, 6-5 Changing, 5-11
Definition and utilization, 6-6 Deleting, G-68
LNPG, Parameters in DB 1 for S5-95U as DP Importing (loading) data from, G-32
master, 10-4 Preconditions, G-32, G-62
Loading operating system of the IM 308-C, 5-12 Purpose, 5-11
Loop resistance, Glossary-7 Menu bar of COM PROFIBUS, G-15
Low-voltage switchgear, 1-11 min_TSDR, Glossary-7
LSAP, Glossary-6 MOBY, 1-11
Mode selector switch, Glossary-7
Of the IM 308-C, 5-3
M Module diagnostics, 6-13
Monitoring time, In the S5-95U, 11-13
Machine ground, Glossary-7
Monomaster mode, 6-26, 10-13
Mains power, Rules, 3-3
Mouse, Functions of mouse buttons, G-15
Manual
MPI-ISA card, G-11
Purpose of the manual, iii
MPI interface, G-11
Quick access, v
Multimaster mode, 6-27, 10-13
scope of validity, iv
Multiprocessor mode, 6-28
target group of the manual, iii
Manuals, Other requisite manuals, v
Manufacturer ID, 10-6
Structure, 6-20
Mark, CE, A-2 N
Master, 1-3, Glossary-7 NCM file
Master diagnostics, 6-13 Definition, G-30
Definition, 6-14 Importing (loading) data from, G-32
Requesting, 6-14 Network components, 1-16
Structure, 6-15 Non-floating, Glossary-8
Master interface, Glossary-7 Non-grounded configuration, Glossary-8
See also IM 308–C Number of IM 308-C, Master parameters, G-39
Master parameters
Entering, G-41
Entering – example, G-20, G-26 O
For IM 308-C, G-39
OFF, Operating mode of IM 308-C, 8-7
Meanings, G-39
Offline, G-68, Glossary-8
Master PROFIBUS address, 6-13, 10-6, Glos-
OLM, 1-16
sary-7
Online, Glossary-8
Structure, 6-20
Online functions, G-10
Master status, 6-13
Installation, G-13
Structure, 6-15
Operating system datum, S5-95U, 11-5
Master system, Glossary-7
Operating system file, 5-12
Creating a new master system, G-47
Operating system version of the IM 308-C, 5-13
Definition, G-47
Operating-system file, Definition, G-30
Master/slave procedure, Glossary-7

Index
Operation of the ET 200, General rules and reg- Power supply, switching on, 8-5
ulations, 3-3 Power-up delay, Host parameters, G-37
Operator panels, 1-11 Powerfail in the S5-95U, 11-8
Optical link modules, 1-16 Power-up of the S5-95U on the bus, 11-4
Order numbers, F-1, G-1 Preconditions, 11-3
Overview diagnostics, 6-13, 10-6 Power-up phase, C-21
Definition, 10-7 Preconditions, Using COM PROFIBUS, G-10
In the STEP 5 application program, inter- Printing, G-64
preting, 10-7 Printing system documentation, Example, G-23,
Structure, 6-15, 10-7 G-28
With COM PROFIBUS, G-66 Procedure
Overvoltage, definition, 3-17 From planning to initial operation of the ET
Overvoltage arrester, Glossary-8 200, 2-1
Initial operation of the ET 200, 2-7
Parameterization with COM PROFIBUS,
P 2-5
Planning the layout, 2-2
P-page addressing, 6-5
STEP 5 application program writing, 2-6
Definition and restrictions, 6-9
Structuring the ET 200, 2-3
Page addressing, Definition, 6-8
What to consider before parameterization
Parameterization, Glossary-8
with COM PROFIBUS, 2-4
Parameterization master, Glossary-8
Process image, Glossary-8
Parameterization software: COM PROFIBUS,
PROFIBUS, 1-2, Glossary-9
1-3
PROFIBUS address, Glossary-9
Parameterization with COM PROFIBUS, Proce-
FMS station parameters, G-44
dure, 2-5
Parameterize, Slave parameters, G-43
Parameterizing, Glossary-8
PROFIBUS addresses, Changing, 6-24
Parameterizing configuration with COM PRO-
PROFIBUS card, G-11
FIBUS, G-33
Bus parameters for PROFIBUS card, G-68
Parameterizing ET 200 configuration with COM
PROFIBUS standard, A-2
PROFIBUS, G-33
PROFIBUS-DP, Glossary-9
Parameterizing PROFIBUS FMS configuration
PROFIBUS-DP, 1-2, 1-3
with COM PROFIBUS, Example, G-24
Characteristics, 1-14
Parameterizing PROFIBUS-DP configuration
PROFIBUS-DP field bus. See PROFIBUS-DP
with COM PROFIBUS, Example, G-17
PROFIBUS-FMS, 1-2, Glossary-9
PC/programmer, Offline on PROFIBUS, G-68
Program file
PCMCIA, G-11
Creating, G-31
PDU, Glossary-8
Definition, G-30
Programmer interface. See PROFIBUS card
Opening, G-31
Programming adapter, G-11
Programmable controller S5-95U with PROFI-
Planning the layout, Procedure, 2-2
BUS-DP interface, 1-12
PLC cycle, 9-7
Programmers, As master, 1-8
Pollutant concentration, A-7
Programming units, Power supply, 3-15
Potential differences, Avoiding, 3-8
Protection class, A-9
Potential equalization, 3-8
Protocol data unit, Glossary-9
Power failure, Handling a power failure, 8-15
Provision for other masters, G-53
Power restored in the S5-95U, 11-8

Index
Q RS 485 repeater, Glossary-10

Block diagram, 4-5
Q-page addressing, 6-5
Configuration options, 4-6
Definition and restrictions, 6-10
Connecting bus cable, 4-12
Queries, vi
Connecting the power supply, 4-11
QVZ, During data access, 6-4
Definition, 4-2
Dimensional drawing, E-5
Installing, 4-8
R Mechanical design, 4-3
RC element, 3-14 Pin assignment programmer/OP interface,
Reaction time, Glossary-9 4-4
Calculating, C-11 Rules, 4-2
ET 200, 1-4 Setting terminating resistor, 4-6
Importance, C-2, C-5 Technical data, 4-4
in ET 200, C-2, C-5 Using, 4-2
tcons, C-4 RS 485 repeaters, definition and design, 1-18
tDP, C-8 Rules for operation of the ET 200, 3-3
tinter, C-7 RUN, Glossary-10
tprog, C-3, C-6 Operating mode of IM 308-C, 8-7
tR, definition, C-16 RUN LED. See ”RUN” LED
tslave, C-9
Recycling and disposal, v
Redundancy, Glossary-9 S
Redundant remote operation, Glossary-10
S5-95U
Reference potential, Glossary-10
Address areas, 10-2
Regulations for operation of the ET 200, 3-3
Appearance, 9-2
Relative humidity, A-7
Control processor failure, 11-13
Releases of the components described in the
Controls and LEDs, 9-2
manual, iv
Cycle checkpoint, 11-13
Remote operation, redundant, Glossary-10
Data consistency, 10-3
Repeaters on bus, Bus parameters, G-35
Default parameter set, 11-5
Replacing the 32 K EEPROMs, 9-10
Definition and functions, 1-10
Reserve inputs, Host parameters, G-37
Design, 9-2
Reserve LSAPs, Master parameters, G-40
Entering parameters in DB 1, 10-4
Reserve outputs, Host parameters, G-37
Exchange of data between S5-95U and DP
Response monitoring, Glossary-10
slaves, 9-6
For slaves, master parameters, G-40
Functions of the communications processor,
9-6
Response monitoring/Ttr, Bus parameters, G-35
Functions of the control processor, 9-6
Response of ET 200, 11-6
Installing, 9-10
Response times. See Data cycle times
Meaning of ”LNPG” in DB 1, 10-4
RESTART, Startup modes for S5: RESTART
Message in operating system datum, 11-5
135U/155U, 6-4
Monitoring time, 11-13
RFI suppression, A-5
Power-up on the bus, 11-4
Routing cables
Response to failure, 11-13
In-building, 3-5
Technical data, 9-8
Notes, 3-2
S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP interface, 1-12
Routing of cables, Notes, 3-2

Index
Saving Standard function block FB IM308C. See FB

As NCM file, G-63 IM308C
To 32 K EEPROM, 9-11, G-60 Standards, iv, 1-2, A-2
To memory card, G-62 Standard-section busbar, Glossary-11
Saving files, Example, G-23, G-28 Star hub, 1-16
Saving in binary database, Example, G-29 Starting, ET 200, 8-2, 11-2
Saving with COM PROFIBUS, G-55 Starting COM PROFIBUS, G-13
Scope of validity of the manual, iv Example, G-18, G-25
Segment, Glossary-10 Startup
Service. See FMS service CPU and IM 308-C power-up, 8-6
Service functions, G-65 Power-up of the S5-95U on the bus, 11-4
Setting parameters, Bus parameters, G-35 Preconditions, 8-2, 11-2
Shared-input master Station, Glossary-11
Assigning, G-52 Station connecting cycle, C-20, C-21
Definition, G-52 Station description
Preconditions, G-52 FMS station parameters, G-44
Shared-input slaves, Definition, G-52 Master parameters, G-39
Shared-input master, Glossary-10 Slave parameters, G-42
Shield impedance, Glossary-10 Station diagnostics, 6-13
Shielding of cables, 3-10 Station status, 6-13, 10-6
Short-circuit, Glossary-11 Structure, 6-19
SIMADYN D, 1-8 Station type
SIMATIC NET PC modules, Glossary-11 FMS station parameters, G-44
SIMATIC TI, 1-8 Master parameters, G-39
SIMOCODE, 1-11 Slave parameters, G-42
Simultaneous operation of PROFIBUS-DP and Status bar of COM PROFIBUS, G-14
FMS, G-46 Status of inputs/outputs
SINEC L2, Glossary-11 Example, G-23
SINUMERIK, 1-8 With COM PROFIBUS, G-67
Sinusoidal interference, A-5 Steady-state operation, C-21
Slave, 1-3, Glossary-11 STEP 5
Slave diagnostics, 6-13, 10-6 Diagnostics, 6-13, 10-6
Definition, 6-17, 10-8 Error detection, 6-13
Requesting, 6-17, 10-8 Error recognition, 10-6
Structure, 6-18, 10-9 STEP 5 application program writing, Procedure,
With COM PROFIBUS, G-66 2-6
Slave parameters STOP, Glossary-11
Definition, G-42 Operating mode of IM 308-C, 8-7
Entering, G-43, G-44 STOP LED. See ”STOP” LED
Entering – example, G-21 Storage conditions, A-6
Meanings, G-42 Structuring the ET 200, Procedure, 2-3
Slave-specific diagnostics, 6-13 Suppressor, Glossary-11
Structure for DP Siemens slaves, 6-22 Switching CPU to STOP or RUN, 8-9
Structure for DP standard slaves, 6-21 Switching on
Slave-specific diagnostics, 10-6 Power supply, 8-5
Slots for the IM 308-C S5-95U and the power supply, 11-7
In the S5-115U system, 5-9 Switching on power supply and S5-95U, 11-7
In the S5-135U and S5-155U systems, 5-10 Switching S5-95U to STOP or RUN, 11-9
Slow mode, C-24 Switch-off byte, B-15
SOFTNET for PROFIBUS, Glossary-11 Switch-on byte, B-15
STAD, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8

Index
SYNC, Glossary-12 TSET, Glossary-13

Definition, 6-23 TSL, Glossary-13
Preconditions, 6-23, G-51 tslave, C-9
SYNC-able, Slave parameters, G-42 TTR, Glossary-13
System starting, Of ET 200, 8-2, 11-2 TYP, Block parameters of FB IM308C, 7-8
System startup after certain events, 3-3 Type file
Definition, G-30, G-54
Preconditions, G-54
T Type files, Opening and reading, G-54
Target token runtime Ttr, Bus parameters, G-35
tcons, C-4
tDP, C-8 U
Technical data UL certification, A-3
Bus cable, 3-24 UNFREEZE, Glossary-13
Bus connectors, 3-27 UNSYNC, Glossary-13
FB 230, 10-12
FB IM308C, 7-5
General technical data, A-1 V
IM 308-C, 5-8
Varistor, 3-14
RS 485 repeater, 4-4
Version of the components described in the
S5-95U, 9-8
manual, iv
TELEPERM, 1-8
VFD, Glossary-13
Temperature, A-7
VFD number, G-45
Terminating resistor, Glossary-12
Vibration, A-8
Bus connectors, 3-35
RS 485 repeater, 4-6
Text displays, 1-11
TID1, Glossary-12 W
TID2, Glossary-12 What to consider before parameterization with
tinter, In S5-95U, C-7 COM PROFIBUS, Procedure, 2-4
Title bar of COM PROFIBUS, G-14 Word consistency, B-16, B-18, B-20, B-22,
Token, Glossary-12 B-24, B-26
Token passing, C-20, C-21
Token ring, Glossary-12
Token runtime, Glossary-12 X
Toolbar of COM PROFIBUS, G-16
X10, 5-3
tprog, C-3
X9, 5-3
in the S5-95U, C-6
TQUI, Glossary-12
tR, C-16
Transport conditions, A-6 Z
TRDY, Glossary-12 Zener diode, 3-14

Index

Siemens AG
A&D AS E 82
Postfach 1963
D–92209 Amberg
Federal Republic of Germany
From:
Your Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Your Title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Company Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
City, Zip Code:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Country: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Phone: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please check any industry that applies to you:
Automotive Pharmaceutical
Chemical Plastic
Electrical Machinery Pulp and Paper
Food Textiles
Instrument and Control Transportation
Nonelectrical Machinery Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Petrochemical

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1

Remarks Form
Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness
of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire
and return it to Siemens.
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range
from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents meet your requirements?
2. Is the information you need easy to find?
3. Is the text easy to understand?
4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?
5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:
Additional comments:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c
Siemens AG
A&D AS E 82
Postfach 1963
D–92209 Amberg
Federal Republic of Germany
From:
Your Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Your Title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Company Name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
City, Zip Code:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Country: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Phone: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please check any industry that applies to you:
Automotive Pharmaceutical
Chemical Plastic
Electrical Machinery Pulp and Paper
Food Textiles
Instrument and Control Transportation
Nonelectrical Machinery Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Petrochemical

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c 1

Remarks Form
Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness
of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire
and return it to Siemens.
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range
from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).
1. Do the contents meet your requirements?
2. Is the information you need easy to find?
3. Is the text easy to understand?
4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?
5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:
Additional comments:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

2 EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c

Et200 e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Et200 e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Et200 e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Important information, Table of

EWA 4NEB 780 6000-02c

Correct Usage Note the following:

Trademarks SIMATIC and SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.

Copyright Siemens AG 1995 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability

Siemens AG Technical data subject to change.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6ES5 998-3ES22

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

Scope of validity This manual is valid for the following:

Module / software Order number As of release/

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

3.3 Characteristics of the bus cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

6.4 Reading slave diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

10.4 Diagnostics in the STEP 5 application program of the S5-95U . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

C Reaction times in the ET 200 distributed I/O system

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

G.7 Creating and opening a program file; importing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-30

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

6-1 Diagnostics structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

G-19 Alternative ways of importing master systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-31

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

6-10 Structure of the master PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

B-6 P-page addressing with the 945 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

D-11 Contents of DB 230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

Section Topic Page

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

1.1 What is the ET 200 distributed I/O system?

What is PROFIBUS is a bus system designed for communication in small cellular

Reference PROFIBUS is based on EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. A distinction is

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

Parameterization The COM PROFIBUS parameterization software is used for straightforward

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

1.2 Expansion options of the ET 200 distributed I/O system

Maximum A bus segment consists of up to 32 stations. You must insert a terminating

Master No. 6 Master No. 20

Slave No. 10 Slave No. 13 Slave No. 64

: Station (master or slave)

: Station with terminating resistor in circuit

Figure 1-1 Structure of a bus segment

Baud rate Max. cable length of a segment (in meters)

ET 200 Distributed I/O System

Linking bus The configuration below will serve by way of example:

Slave No. 4 Slave No. 64

Slave No. 6 Slave No. 12 Slave No. 21